Home

Advancing Computer Knowledge

1. 6997 39 HARDWARE FEATURES 2MHz 6809 CPU 2 RS232C Serial Ports DMA Double Density Floppy Disk Controller Dual 8 DSDD Floppy Disk System 128KB Static Ram SOFTWARE FEATURES Your choice of either UniFLEX or OS 9 LEVEL TWO Both are Unix like Multi User Multi Tasking Operating Systems 96KB FLEX 0 9 SWITCHING SYSTEM 4148 49 HARDWARE FEATURES 2MHz 6809 CPU DMA Double Density Floppy Disk Controller 56K Static Ram x 2 Built in 51 4 40tr DSDD Disk Drives 2 RS232C Serial Ports 80 Track DSDD Drive Option add 400 00 SOFTWARE FEATURES GMXBUG monitor FLEX Disk Operating System x OS 9 LEVEL ONE Multi tasking operating system for up to 56K of memory WINCHESTER SUBSYSTEMS Winchester packages are available for upgrading current GIMIX 6809 systems equipped with DMA controllers at least one floppy disk drive and running FLEX OS 9 LEVEL ONE or OS 9 LEVEL TWO The packages include one or two 19MB unformat ted Winchester drives DMA Hard Disk Interface and the appropriate software drivers The Interface can handle two 574 Winchester Drives providing Automatic Data Error Detection and Correction up to 22 bit burst error detection and 11 bit burst error correction Dual drives can be used together to provide over 30 MBytes of on line storage or use one for back up of the other More convenient and reliable than tape backup systems 90 includes o
2. uc 98 Gimix REEF 1 Gloucester Computer Bus ON ET 88 Hudson Digital 84 Company REIS ee 76 Intec Peripherals 11 Interesting Software MEER 123 John Bell Engineering sds Stas tone 30 COM I igo ur Dore va 2295 Leading BC Logical Devices 57 oos ode een Lyco CLE PEE 56 Metacblab i 7 ll irde norr etira Bf Microhouse csse ee ene Ae Micro 2 2 ds dde tose 22454 7 Micro Peripherals POM CEPR 44 Microtech 75 Micro Ware 81 Modular Mining Systems 37 Modular Systems e 37 Optimized Systems S dors P ES d Bela 460 Penguin Software o ie eee sees 6 Performance Micro en ste Perry Peripherals ERN 2 34 RH RUE 47 107 Rock 2522 2 Qu ovs TOM Scientific Software MES DR E i sac MD ETE UE Ug ied AL ALAS RR E M rs id aa SJB Distributors 2222 du Ware ger by Skyles Electric Wo
3. 27 58 March 1983 MICRO 37 oe f tten tion A Brand New Book The Last Word in OSI Information ADS Improvements for your Ohio Scientific Computer including Machine Language enhancements and BASIC Aids TRACE BASIC programs DEBUG machine language programs and improve your OS65 D operating system Hardware modifications for enhanced reversed video iQ programs for control code and upper lower programs with PRIN case entry and a What s Where in the OSI DELETE AUTO NUI C1 C2 are just some of the useful informa FUNCTION o Eo Wi tion presented Improve your own BASIC Mail To MICRO 34 Chelmsford St Box 6502 Chelmsford 01824 in PA 1 800 662 2444 1 Yes Send MICRO on the OSI 19 95 plus 2 s h CheckEnclosed O VISA l Address MasterCard Zip Or Call Toll Free l 1 800 345 8112 i Card residents add 5 sales tax Allow 6 8 weeks for delivery 38 MICRO No 58 March 1983 es PRINTERS APPLE PRINT USING Routine by Celestino R Monclova A machine language routine to simulate PRINT USING from Applesoft BASIC PRINT USING requires Apple 1 with Applesoft When called from BASIC this machine language routine has the cap ability of merging two string variables
4. lt gt ft MICROCALC BY P DALEY REM COPYRIGHT C 1982 REM BY MICRO INK NL 23 1 HOME 20 CC 95 20 FOR II 1 TO 38 BL BL NEXT BL BLE 44 GOSUB 430 75 VTAB LL PRINT S LL IF MID S LL 2 1 THE PRINT SS LL INVERSE PRINT CHR CC RIGHT BL 38 LEN S LL LEN BB LL NORMAL 1 UB 60 100 PEEK 16384 IF lt 127 THEN 100 105 IF FLAG 1 THEN FLAG 0 FOR II 1 TO NL SS II NEXT 110 POKE 16368 0 120 AA 128 130 IF AA 64 THEN FLAG 1 GOSUB 950 GOTO 250 131 IF AA 38 THEN GOSUB 530 11 1 GOSUB 60 GOTO 100 135 IF AA 44 OR AA 58 OR AA 59 OR AA 93 THEN 246 146 IF AA gt 39 AND AA lt 95 THEN 216 156 CC 32 GOSUB 60 160 IF AA 13 THEN LL LL 2 IF LL gt NL THEN LL 1 170 IF AA 8 AND YY gt 1 THEN S LL LEFT S LL LEN S LL 1 YY YY 1 GOTO 180 175 IF AA 8 AND YY 1 THEN S LL YY YY 1 180 IF AA 21 THEN LL LL 2 IF LL lt 1 THEN LL NL19 IF AA 27 THEN GOTO 1000 200 GOTO 230 210 YY 1 IF YY gt 38 THEN CC 32 60508 60 LL LL 2 Y Y GOTO 230 220 S LL S LL CHR AA 230 YY LEN S LL CC 95 GOSUB 60 240 GOTO 100 250 XY LL 255 FOR II 1 TO NL STEP 2 260 LEN S II lt 2 THEN 410 276 IF MID S II 2 1 lt gt THEN 250 280 FOR JJ 1 TO LEN S II 296 POKE 511 JJ ASC M
5. Pete amp Pam Computers Micro Products Sales Group Blue Ridge Computers Lancashire England Lynn Mass Capetown South Africa 3541 Old Conejo Road Suite 104 Newbury Park CA 91320 805 498 1956 No 58 March 1983 MICRO 89 INICRO PET Vet By Loren Wright ANDs and ORs PEEKs and POKEs VIC and Commodore 64 owners may be a little puzzled about all the mysterious programming required to control video and sound on their machines Most of this is accomplished with four BASIC functions and understanding how they work will make things a lot easier PEEK and POKE are fairly easy since their names actually describe what they do PEEK means you are looking at a particular memory loca tion and returning with the number found 7680 returns the number found in memory locaton 7680 POKE works the other way around you take number and stick it into a specified memory location POKE 7680 0 puts character the one represented by 0 in the upper left corner of an unexpanded VIC screen The numbers involved may be BASIC expressions as long as the addresses are kept between 0 and 65535 and the numbers are kept between 0 and 255 Don t go POKEing numbers into memory at random many combinations will cause your computer to crash All the control registers of the VIC the VIC II and the SID are treated by the computer as normal memory loca tions You can program a great number
6. 530 A 42 G8 66 540 A 43 ge 550 A 44 eee 560 45 570 a 46 580 A 47 6 e 590 A 48 eee 600 A 49 8666 610 A 50 eee 620 A 51 eeeeee 630 a 52 640 A 53 650 4 54 8 6 660 55 8686 e 58 1983 BASIC Listing continued 678 A 56 6 680 A 57 685 REM LETTER COMBINATIONS 698 1 111114141 700 2 12 710 3 1313 720 B 4 2 144 54 54 4 738 B 5 748 6 16775778 1 9 161112131415 750 B 7 1 1617187 192017 760 B 8 1 2122 776 B 9 1 232425 780 B 10 1 252423 790 B3 11 1 2627235 232726 800 12 810 B 13 1 2626265 262626 1 2829 820 14 1 26262626262626 830 B 15 1 2828 840 16 1 30163126322221 850 17 1 12252525252512 860 B 18 1 335 30 870 19 1 3334357779 880 20 890 B 21 1 24257 7 7 7 36 1 31374 38395 31 906 22 1 4077777 15 910 23 920 B 24 930 B 25 940 B 26 950 27 960 B 28 978 B 29 980 BS 30 1 12777778 1 21213411413 1 3677777 36 2167777712 1 4242 1 4344 1 264 2425 14444444 990 31 1 25244 26 1000 B 32 1 22212119454546 1010 B 33 1 12257 47473548 1020 35 1030 B 35 1 494 3839384 49 1577777 36 1040 B 36 1 12252525252524 1050 B 37 1060 B 38 1076 B
7. Dodge Racer Synassembler 6 5 Protector Nautilus Disk Manager DATABOFT Pacific Coast Highway Canyon Climber Tumble Bugs Shooting Arcade Clowns and Balloons Graphic Master Graphic Generator Micro Painter y Text Wizard Spell Wizard Bishop s Square Sands of Egypt Text Formatter Family Budgeter Eastern Front Family Cash Jukebox Downhill Outlaw Holy Grail Player Piano Keyboard Organ Number Blast Frogmaster 747 Land Simulator Bumper Pool cas K razy Shoot Out K razy Kritters K razy Antics K star Patrol EPYX Crush Crumble amp Chomp Crypt of the Undead Curse of Ra Mis Datestones amp Ryn A Invasion Orion King Arthur s Heir Morloc s Tower Rescue at Rigel Ricochet Star Warrior Temple of Aspha Upper Reaches of Apshai WICO Joy Sticks for Atari Commodore Apple amp Franklin CALL computer mail order west 800 648 3311 IN NV CALL 702 588 5654 BOX 6689 STATELINE NV 89449 INTERNATIONAL ORDERS All shipments outside continental United States must be pre paid by certified check only include 3 minimum 3 00 shipping and handling EDUCATIONAL DISCOUNTS Additional discounts are available trom both Computer Mail Order locations to qualified Educational Institutions APO amp FPO Add minimum 5 00
8. Get paid for your ideas write for MICRO Thousands of people NAT AENEXT T read MICRO every month MICRO is sold in computer stores 3000 GRAPHICS LP I PORE PAR CUIDUKE 709 C TEURE 710 C21POKE 712 C4 I PEEK S40 4256x and on newsstands worldwide Send fora of our Writer s 9018 POKE S4284 192 121231 a5 AHPEEK 106 23POKE 54279 254 559 46 Guide now Our author payment rate is competitive with the 9026 PEER PHE lt gt 0 THEN FOR I PMB TO 120 0 I leading magazines in the industry tet vss E eati as We welcome articles on any aspect of 6502 6809 68000 140 23 248 104 160 103 126 194164 Ce ee hardware and software for the Apple Atari CBM PET TRS 80 9060 DATA 104 104 133 178 104 133 177 140 1 177 177 138 145 177 200 20 192 5 24 Color Computer VIC OSI 6809 or 68000 9870 Gara 104 104 133 178 104 133 177 168 4 177 177 200 145 177 135 134 192 255 9080 Onta 20 0 20 1983 Features April Communications Listing 2 Cassette Revision to DIGI DRAFT May Wave of New Computers 3010 7 Are you sure Y N I GET 4 KEY IF KEY lt gt 89 THEN RETURN June Operating Systems 9413 coca Ue is Lowest blank cassette press RECORD and PLAY then press RETURN July 2015 7 Caii insert screen date tape press PLAY then press REIURM IFRa UI August Word Processing 3010 2 Press A for ATARI characters ar N to load new
9. 209 HP 41C HP 10 11C HP 12C 15C HP 16C 149 00 59 00 72 00 99 00 99 00 99 00 HPIL PERIPHERALS In Stock Cal for CALCULATOR SPECIALS 400 16K 5199 32k 274 4BK 8359 Non Atari Ram 410 Recorder 810 Disk Drive 822 Printer 825 Printer 830 Modem 820 Printer 850 Interface CX40 Joy Sticks pair CX853 Atari 16K Ram 74 00 429 00 269 00 589 00 159 00 259 00 169 00 7818 00 77 95 48k 499 Call for Price and Availability of the NEW 64K ATARI 1200 Axton 32K Ram 89 00 2 Axlon 48K Ram 13900 Axion 128K Ram 399 00 Intec 48K Board 159 00 Intec 32K Board 7400 One Year Extended Warranty 70 00 481 Entertainer Package 6900 CX482 Educator Package 13000 CX483ProgrammerPackage 5400 8 CX484 Communicator Package 34400 SOFTWARE FOR ATARI ATARI Pac Man Centipede Caverns of Mars Asteroids Missile Command Star Raiders Galaxian Defender ON LINE Jawbreaker 27 00 Softporn 27 00 Wizard and the Princess 29 00 The Next Step 34 00 Mission Asteroid 22 00 Mouskattack 31 00 Frogger 31 00 Cross Fire ROM 36 00 33 00 33 00 32 00 29 00 29 00 35 00 33 00 33 00 SYNAPSE File Manager 800
10. common boundary between auto matic data processing systems or parts of a single system or between two systems or devices K Kilo A symbol equivalent to the numeral 1024 e g 8K equals 8192 Loop 1 The repeated execution of a series of instructions for a fixed number of times 2 A coding technique for repeating instructions that are usually modified Machine language 1 A set of symbols character or signs and the rules for combining them that con veys instructions or information to a computer 2 Information or data expressed in code that can be used directly without further processing Matrix A rectangular array of numbers subject to mathematical operation A table is a matrix The glossary will be continued next month MICRO special register groups 70 MICRO No 58 March 1983 E SJB DISTRIBUTORS THE MOST COMPETITIVE PRICES ON COMMODORE commodore MONITORS GREAT RESOLUTION 64 OR VIC Amdeck Color I II or Iii Comrex 6500 13 Color NEC JC 1212 Transtar 20 High Resolution Green Phosphor Video Audio Cable call 299 310 129 PRINTERS LETTER QUALITY CBM 8300 40 cps Diablo 620 25 cps ComRiter 17 cps ax Tranatar 130 16 cps auto load wp features NEC 7700 series NEC 3500 series PRINTERS DOT MATRIX CBM 4022 80 cps graphics CBM 8023 150 cps graphics Epson FX Printer E Okidata 82A 120 cps serial and parallel
11. 22 95 39 95 BROTHER Daisywheel Printer 895 24 95 Four cards on one With true simultaneous opera WORD PROCESSING SPECIAL WITH WORDSTAR AND SUPERCALC Do professional word processing on your APPLE All necessary hardware and software included Complete 80 column video display enhanced character set 16K memory board Z Card with CP M software Wordstar and word processing software and SuperCALC 99 00 475 00 FRANKLIN ACE 1000 COMPUTER 25 00 with Apple Il List 51 228 Special at 795 M FRANKLIN ACE 1000 COMPUTER plus 5 DISK DRIVE CONTROLLER 1 80 CARDS List 6 Microsoft Softcard 7 80 399 00 5289 00 ALS Synergizer 749 00 595 00 U Z 80 Processor Board 125 00 Microsoft Premium Syst 595 00 80 COLUMN CARDS 55 00 and MAGICALC 109 00 EXPAND A RAM PLUS MAGICALC Everything that Visicalc can do and much more 22 50 plus additional memory Fully compatible with 24 95 ME visicalc Includes DOS CP M Pascal Disk Smarterm 80 ColDisplay 345 00 5225 00 27 95 Emulator No preboot or Apple modification Smarterm Expanded 27 95 required Character Set 40 00 175 00 64K EXPAND A RAM plus Ee smarem 260 00 49 00 Videx Videoterm 275 00 128K EXPAND A RAM plus Videx Enhanacer ll
12. 99 50 Second or 79 60 OFFER EXPIRES April 30 1983 Sub Total Mass res 5 Tax Shipping amp Handling 4 50 Information on other switcher models TOTAL Charge to O MasterCard O Visa O Check Money Order Gard House M Mesi Exp Date MICE Cal Free 1 800 373 1455 Within Massachusetts 617 682 6936 Circle No 61 UV EPROM ERASER Sem names 49 95 Element 7700 hours HOBBY MODEL intensity 12Ws acm at 1 INDUSTRIAL MODEL Erases UV EPROMS 2716 2732 2516 2532 etc QUV T8 2N 68 95 WITH TIMER AND SAFETY SWITCH QUv T8 T 97 50 INTELLIGENT PROGRAMMER STAND ALONE RS 232 RELIABLE EASY COPY No externat equipment needed USER FRIENDLY COMPATIBLE TRS 80 APPLE CPM FLEX TEKTRONICS MOS PROGRAMS 2508 2516 2532 2716 27016 27032 2732 2758 8748 8749H 8748H OPTIONAL MODULES 2564 2764 8755A 8741 STANO ALONE CRT OR COMPUTER CONTROL UPLOAD DOWNLOAD IN MOTOROLA OR INTEL HEX FORMAT M 68 48 3 MICROPROCESSOR BASED 4 K INTERNAL RAM 90 DAY PARTS amp LABOR WARRANTY ON ALL PRODUCTS ROG RAMMIN SOON TO BE RELEASED POICEINGEUDES PERSONALITY MODULE PROMPRO 8 128K Version S689 489 00 MONEY BACK GUARANTEE LOGICAL DEVICES INC 781
13. 4 TRS 80 Color Computer with printer Price 89 95 Manufacturer The Micro Works P O Box 1110 Del Mar CA 92014 Description This product is a complete Editor Assembler and Debug Monitor in a program pack for the Color Computer ABUG the debug monitor is a short version of CBUG their excellent stand alone monitor It has memory examine change display change registers two ways of entering a user program plus cassette utilities The powerful line oriented screen editor has been optimized specifically for editing assembly language source code Editor features include twelve cursor move options string search line insert delete plus block No 58 March 1983 oe move copy The full feature assembler section has condi tional assembly evaluation of complex expressions and optional direct object tape generation The assembler pro vides a variety of printer options and allows single step screen assembly Pluses A maximum of software development is given in a minimum of time The assembler is the equal of most pro fessional assemblers allowing the experienced program mer to use all tricks of the trade in developing 6809 software Minuses A few minor facets would be disturbing to an ex perienced programmer i e a program made up of uncon nected modules must be handled as separate modules and then installed as separate blocks of object code Documentation The 40 page booklet is clear and t
14. COLORFORIH INTRODUCING ZYTREX ZT14411 CMOS BAUD RATE GENERATOR REPLACES MOTOROLA 14411 PIN FUNCTION COMPATIBLE IMPROVED FREQ OUTPUT DRIVE 4 LSTTL LOADS FULLY STATIC OPERATION TTL COMPATIBLE INPUTS WIDE OPERATING VOLTAGE FREE EVALUATION SAMPLES FOR VOLUME USERS 6 20 EACH 1000 PCS ZYTREX CORPORATION 224 NORTH WOLFE ROAD SUNNYVALE 94086 408 733 3973 Circle No 11 MOVE UP FROM BASIC Forth is a new high level language available now for the TRS 8O Color Com puter COLORFORTH a version of fig FORTH has an execution time as much as 10 to 20 times faster than Basic and can be programmed faster than Basic COLORFORTH is highly modular which make testing and debugging much simpler COLORFORTH has been specially customized for the color computer and requires only 16K It does not require Extended Basic When you purchase COLORFORTH you receive both cassette and RS DISK versions the standard fig EDITOR and an extensive instruction manual Both versions and 75 page manual Add 2 00 shipping Texas residents add 5 percent DEALER AND AUTHOR INQUIRIES INVITED ARMADILLO INTL SOFTWARE P O Box 7661 Austin Texas 78712 No 58 March 1983 MICRO Phone 512 459 7325 Circle No 12 13 INICRO Apple Slices By Tim Osborn This month I present a file structure known as linked lists This structure chains records together into logical groups so th
15. Change color by pressing dos 25 3 4 995 i Press SPACE BAR to exit continued MICRO No 58 March 1983 Listing 1 continued l 1000 FOR N 270 TO 429 2 1 05 1 Y22C2 KEOUERSCANESIN ND SIF PEEK K lt gt RET THE ji 6 N 60508 1050 AH 1020 IF X2 lt 1 OR 2 gt 159 OR Y2 1 OR Y2 gt 79 THEN NEXT N 1030 COLOR CiFLOT X2 Y2 IF 1 THEN ORAWTO C1 C2 65 Real Time Clock 1040 NEXT NiGOTO 1000 2 3 1080 KEveS2 THEN 1 IGOSUS MENUIRETURM Provides hour minute second day of week day month 1200 REN TEXT year Twelve or 24 hour format Pin compatible with AIM 1210 Enter TEXT string you wish printed INPUT B 2 THEN connector also SYM KIM Four switch 1224 POKE 752 137 05 position cursor at beginning location and pres selectable interrupts Nicad battery backup Industrial quali 1230 GOSUB JOY IF Bel THEN 1230 ty board 4 5 6 All ICs socketed Single 5V supply i220 FOR Adi TO LEN BR Tie HE ASC BS A A gt 127 THEN FaRET Twenty two page manual All software included Bare board ideo IF vis7e TMEN visa 1772108 29 00 Complete AAT 93 00 includes batteries Add 1290 B ASC ES A A IGOSUB 1390 R PEEK 7S K254 BTBIFOR I 0 TO 7 COLOR 0 4 00 shipping and handling CA residents add 6 1300 IF 02127 THEN 0 0 128 PLOT X1 Y1 I gt 1310 IF D 43 THEN 0 0 44 0 X1 1 Y1 I Data D
16. 195 program alone plus 400 for softcard 69 95 199 95 400 375 for 8 disk plus 375 for UCSD p System 29 95 124 95 149 95 disk tutorial amp manual incl 124 95 99 no frills combination 89 frills only 149 95 combination 99 disk 149 95 175 39 95 245 495 1500 5000 695 This Language Package information sheet 18 continued from the February issue Information Sheet 1 information Sheet 1 Language Packages Pascal At 6809 Ap CB M 6809 6502 68000 Ap Plus Ap CB M 6809 TRS 80C 6809 PET Ap OSI C4PF CP C4 Ap CBM Ap II Ap HE Ap I Small C 6809 TRS 80C VIGIL VIC PET XASM 6502 with CP M XPLO Ap II KIM SYM AIM Atari Pascal Dynasoft Pascal 1 2 Tiny Pascal UCSD Pascal Pascal Level I Pascal Pascal P 6800 Pascal Color Pascal UCSD Pascal Pascal Compiler Pascal Compiler JRT Pascal Pascal Tiny Pascal Plus KMMM Pascal Apple Pascal Pascal 1 3 Pascal M 2 2 Tiny Pascal Pascal I Pascal II Program Develop ment I OGI Pascal Level 1 PILOT APPILOT PETPILOT Nevada PILOT M Vanilla PILOT APPILOT II EDU DISK Apple PILOT Nevada PILOT Atari PILOT Small C Compiler Small C Compiler VIGIL interactive games language XASM 6500 Systems Implemen tation Language XPLO Atari Dynasoft Systems Limited Abacus SofTech On Going Ideas
17. 280 PRINT PRINT BSAVE XXXXX 00 1 256 AD 3326 298 VTAB 3 END Listing 5 Move It 20 POKE 16384 0 POKE 16385 0 POKE 104 64 20 106 64 108 64 110 64 126 64 17 6 64 44 CLEAR 50 END Listing 6 Test Demo 5 HGR X 130 60 0 136 0 Y 30 POKE 2303 0 14 HCOLOR 1 FOR L 0 TO 279 STEP 26 HPLOT 0 0 1 191 NEXT L HCOLOR 3 FOR L 102 79 STEP 30 HPLOT 279 0 TO L 191 NEXT L 20 4d 3d POKE 2301 0 POKE 2302 0X CALL 2048 44 POKE 2301 Y POKE 2302 CALL 2048 0 X 0Y Y 58 X X INT RND 2 3 1 4 INT 2 3 1 4 IFX d OR X gt 256 OR Y lt OR Y gt 160 THEN 5 64 GOTO 36 MICRO horizontal axis that repeat themselves When a shape is not animated six phases are simply identical copies of the first phase If you choose to animate a shape you can edit and change any or all of the seven phases When editing phases after the first one it is important to add all leading zeros that the program appends to strings This will be obvious when you come to 10 Making small changes in each phase produces animation in a fashion similar to cartoon animation Repeating form every seven phases is ideal for cyclical motions such as mov ing arms and legs blinking lights on a space ship or spinning propellers on an airplane The animation is effective only when the shape is
18. GET B NORMAL 1 23 CALL 868 IF B THEN F OLD T NW GOSUB 8000 GOTO 2100 IF B D THEN F OLD T NW GOSUB 8000 GOTO 3045 2834 IF B Q GOTO 100 2835 IF B lt gt COTO 2830 2836 R NXT OLD REM PREPARE TO GET NEXT RECORD IF R THEN HOME HTAB 5 4 PRINT THE END OF FILE HAS BEEN REACHED FOR 1 TO 2000 NEXT GOTO 104 GOSUB 9015 REM CONTINUE BROWSE GOTO 2814 REM REM 39e DELETE RECORD 3x REM GOSUB 4000 REM GET HEADER IF FIC THEN HOME VTAB 5 HTAB 4 PRINT THERE ARE NO RECORDS TO DELETE FOR K 1 TO 2000 NEXT K GOTO 100 HOME GOSUB 6000 REM GET FIRST LAST NAME GOSUB 9000 REM FIND REC IF RC 0 GOTO 3045 GOSUB 9075 REM DISPLAY NO T FOUND MESSAGE 2831 2832 2833 2840 2850 2860 3000 3001 3002 3014 3020 3036 3040 3041 3042 20443 IF A C THEN POP REM IF CHANGE 3644 100 3045 DR R REM SAVE NO OF DELE TED RECORD 3050 F OLD T NW GOSUB 8000 REM SAVE DELETED RECORDS DATA 3060 IF R FIC THEN FIC NXT O LD GOTO 3100 2070 R LR GOSUB 5000 REM GET PREV RECORD 3080 NXT OLD NXT NW F OLD T WR GOSUB 8000 050 700 REM UPDATE PREV RECORD 3100 NXT WR NA NA DR 3110 R DR GOSUB 7000 REM UPD ATE DELETED RECORD 3120 GOSUB 4500 REM UPDATE HEADER 3125 IF A C THEN RETURN 3130 GOTO 100 3140 REM 3997 3998 REM x READ HEADER 3999
19. Merrimack Systems Commodore Business Machines Lucidata Computerware 3 Taligrass Technologies Corporation Microware Omega Software JRT Systems Inc Hemenway Assoc Inc Abacus AB Computers Apple OSI Sorcim Abacus On Going Ideas On Going Ideas On Going Ideas On Line Muse Commodore Tamarack Muse Apple Ellis Computing Atari Wordsworth Duggers Growing Systems Abacus Succinct Systems 6502 Program Exchange Language Packages Information Sheet 1 disk drive 6809 16K cassette Ap disk cassette 64K for Prog Development UCSD p System Disk II DOS 3 2 or 3 3 48K Applesoft ROM GIMIX under TSC FLEX ASCII Text Editor 32K min OS9 4 059 DOS FLEX XDOS DOS69 CP M 32K ROM or 48K RAM 16K or 32K disk drive recom 2 drives C4PF 5 disks CP C4 8 disks CP M Z 80 card 64K 2 drives 48K ROM Applesoft 8K min runtime 48K Disk II 48K ROM Applesoft Disk II Z 80 card 16K RAM 48K DOS 3 2 recom 2 drives Softcard CP M 1 drive FLEX 9 or DOS 69D 48K Assembler Pkg 3K or 8K expander 32K min plus CP M 48K Disk II Apple Il 20K cass with others 49 95 45 cass 6809 55 disk 50 cass 90 1 3 GIMIX systems with FLEX 40 cass 35 disk 375 35 diskette Level 1 69 Level generates 6502 machine code 250 90 2 1 MiniFLEX 100 2 2 FLEX 2 100 FLEX 9 49 95 tape 59 95 disk 495 425 29 95
20. NOTES U1 CD4025 U2 CD40174 109 series of books that are virtual open sesames to basic understanding and use of all the most popular personal micro computers KIDS amp THE APPLE KIDS amp THE ATARI KIDS AND THE VIC and KIDS AND THE T I Texas Instruments These fun to read books will prepare your children to take their place in the computer generation by solving the mysteries of their computer in ways they ll find interesting and fun Thousands of copies are already being used by families kids and adults schools and computer clubs throughout the U S These marvelous books authored by Ed Carlson lead the reader gently yet quickly into the fascinating world of computers Each is a large 8 x 11 spiral bound book which can be opened flat easily 33 chapters each one Circle No 68 Kids of all ages are thrilling to our Upon the knowledge gained in the previous present scores of cartoons anc illustrations which amuse as they make important points easy tc understand There are even special sections at the beginning of eacr chapter for parents and teacher which aid in creating lessor plans and in helping the kids over any rough spots But the reason kids of all ages really love these books is that they re written to be truly easy tc understand without confusing technical language that makes computers seem more complicatec than they really are And the r
21. the most complete memory id ever published as well as detailed E information needed for actual programming for only 24 95 plus 5 00 s h For Fast Service Call our toll free number 1 800 354 8112 In PA 1 800 662 2444 MICRO makes it easy to order Send check payable to MICRO to MICRO P O Box 6502 Chelmsford MA 01824 VISA and MasterCard accepted MA residents add 5 sales tax 80 MICRO No 58 March 1983 loading machine language program or just using Applesoft If you have written a program that uses the graphics routine to run it you must do the following in order 1 RUN Move It 2 LOAD BASIC program 3 BLOAD Graphics Sub 4 BLOAD shape table being used 5 RUN BASIC program This procedure could be automated with the use of an EXEC file Remember to retain the color integrity of the shape shapes with Plot Code 0 can have only even numbers for their X coordinate and shapes with Plot Code 1 have only odd numbers for their X coordinate Thus when moving a shape around the screen it must be moved in increments of two along the horizontal axis The program in listing 6 Test demonstrates the graphics routine with shape 0 assuming that the Plot Code is 0 Test moves the shape randomly over a background without erasing it Integer BASIC The Integer routine follows the same POKEs and rules as Applesoft except the Move It program is not necessary
22. toSR CCR Opword Format 151413121110 19 8765 4 3 2 1 20 Address The ffective address the destination register The following effective addresses cannot be used 2 10 11 12 13 14 The immediate data is exclusive with the 1 contents of the Status Register SR and the results stored in the Status Register M EORI to SR Opword Format continued 58 March 1982 MICRO Table 2 continued Mnemonic Data Size CCR Name Comments ANDI 16 AND AND the immediate data with the contents of to SR CCR Immediate gt the dern Register Bs and place the results XNZVC to Status in the SR Register Opword Format 1515141312110 9 87 6543210 ORI 16 Inclusive The contents of the Status Register SR and the to SR CCR OR immediate data are inclusively and the XNZVC Immediate results stored in the SR za to Status Register Opword Format 71514131211 10 987 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Word Data ANDI 16 AND o The Status Register and the immediate data are to SR CCR Immediate logically ANDed and the r sults left i in the XNZVC to the Status Register Status Register A 1 Format RESET Reset This instruction causes the reset pin of the CCR External 68000 to reset the external dev
23. 10 CA9 Parallel Printer Port 175 Centronics standard parallel printer inter face with 10 ft flat cable BP 580 8 Slot Backplane 47 Assembled 8 slot backplane for OSI 48 pin buss 24 9 5380 16MEM CM9 5300 24MEM CM9F 5530 16MEM CM9F 450 8 9 210 8 360 5 50 1470 5180 24K memory floppy contrajier card sup ports up to 24K of 2114 memory chips and an OSI type floppy disk controller Available fully assembled and tested with 8 16 or 24K of memory with floppy con troller F Controller supports 2 drives Needs separated clock and data inputs Available Bare BMEM CM9F or controller only FL 470 Ideal way to upgrade cassette based system No 58 March 1983 plete with 10 ft cable Optional Real Time Calendar Clock may be set or read using CALL function in high level languages Power requirements are only 5 volts at 1 4 amps Available with WORDSTAR for serial terminal systems INCLUDES CPM 2 2 D amp N 80 serial 695 D amp N 80 serial w Wordstar 870 D amp N 80 video 695 OptionO01 80 parallel printer and real time calendar clock C1P EXP Expansion Interface 65 Expansion for C1P 600 or 610 board to the OSI 48 pin buss Requires one slot in backplane Use with BP 580 backplane 1600 Bare lO card 50 Supports 8K of memory 2 16 bit parallel ports may be used as printer interfaces 5 RS 232 serial ports with manual and Molex connectors D
24. 4306 Upton Ave South Minneapolis MN 55410 No 58 March 1983 Mail list merge for business letters Pre printed forms manager Electronic mail THE DATABASE Our users tell us that the Electronic Card File is worth the price of the entire package It s not really but with its ease of use its multiple alphabet and numeric sorts its re port options that include to tals and subtotals it is supe rior to many databases cost ing well over 100 00 MAIL LIST MERGE You can write documents in the editor that call for informa tion from the Electronic Card File and merge the in formation to produce cus tomized forms and form let ters Conditional printing al lows you to skip words blocks of text or entire let ters based on criteria that you define in each card in the card file And you can also draw information from other popular databases from Visicalc and from your own custom programs ALPHABETICAL INDEXER This unique tool allows you to specify page numbers for each occurrence of a term and to produce a properly formatted alphabetical in dex of those terms Two levels of indexing are sup ported so that entries like beans navy and beans green are handled properly with two levels of indenta tion MICRO PRE PRINTED FORMS MANAGER Use a se quence of special embed ded commands to define the row and column positions of the blanks on pre printed forms Our template
25. INPUT ENTER TEL TEL OLD IF TEL OLD GOTO 2290 GOSUB 9500 REM REDISPLAY REC IF CN Y THEN CN F OLD T NW GOSUB 8000 GOTO 1020 REM RE ADD RECORD FOR NAME CHANGE 2310 F OLD T WR GOSUB 8000 GOSUB 7000 REM REWRITE RECORD GOTO 100 REM REM xx INQUIRY x33 2230 2244 2250 2255 2257 2264 2270 2280 2290 2295 2297 2300 2320 2500 2501 2502 REM 2505 GOSUB 4000 IF FIC THEN HOME HTAB 4 VTAB 5 PRINT THERE ARE NO RECORDS TO INQ UIRE UPON FOR 1 TO 200 NEXT K GOTO 100 HOME HTAB 5 VTAB 4 PRINT WHICH TYPE OF INQUIRY HTAB 5 VTAB 5 PRINT D IR ECT OR B ROWSE GET BS IF GOTO 2750 IF B lt gt D GOTO 2510 HOME GOSUB 6000 REM GET KEY GOSUB 9000 REM FIND RECORD IF RC gt THEN GOSUB 9075 GOTO 100 REM IF NOT FOUND DISPLAY MESG AND RETURN HOME GOSUB 9500 REM DIS PLAY RECORD 2630 5 VTAB 23 INVERSE PRINT HIT RETURN TO CONTINUE GET B NORMAL GOTO 100 2750 HOME HTAB 1 VTAB 4 PRINT ENTER A PORTION OF OR WHOL E LAST NAME HTAB i VTAB 5 INPUT FOR START OF BROWS E LAST NW FIRST NW 2800 GOSUB 9000 REM FIND REC 2810 IF RC 1 THEN GOSUB 9675 GOTO 100 REM DISPLAY NOT FOUND MESG AND RETURN TO MA IN MENU 2589 2514 2520 2558 26 2610 2612 2620 MICRO 2820 GOSUB 9500 REM DISPLAY REC 2820 1 VTAB 23 INVERSE PRINT ENTER C HANGE D ELE TE Q UIT
26. Installation Opera PENTRAK driver allowing tion Programming simultaneous use of multiple user defined character sets The complete user s manual includes in structions for installation and check out as well as basic and advanced Installation Checkout Diagnostics Applesoft light pen programming 90 Day Limited Waranty LPS Il and PENTRAK are trademarks of Gibson Laboratories Irvine CA Apple and Applesoft are trademarks of Apple Computer inc GIBSON LABORATORIES 23192 D VERDUGO DR e LAGUNA HILLS CA 92653 e 714 770 3088 Manual Many Complete Application amp Sampie Programs Operates in All Screen Modes e Installs Easily into I O Slot 7 Circie 64 98 Software Catalog continued Name SpeedSTAT Volume 1 Frequencies and Crosstabs Apple II or Apple II Plus Memory 48K Language Applesoft or 6502 Assembler Hardware Two disk drives Description extremely easy to learn easy to use Statistics package designed for non programmers that has a capacity of over 10 000 data points and over 30 different statistics measures Speed STAT is a state of the art genera purpose business and marketing analysis tool Price 250 00 Includes diskettes user written manual cloth covered slipcase Author Shaffer amp Shaffer Available SoftCorp International 229 Huber Village Blvd Westerville OH 43081 800 543 1350 toll free System Name Data Manager System VIC 20
27. NR GOTO 1500 1050 R FIC REM GET FIRST DATA RECORD 1055 GOSUB 5000 REM DATA RECORD 1060 IF NOT LAST NW FIRST NW lt LAST OLD FIRST O LD GOTO 1074 1061 NXT NW R 1062 IF R FIC THEN FIC NR GOTO 1500 10664 R LR GOSUB 5000 01 NR T WR F OLD GOSUB 800 GOSUB 7000 GOTO 1500 1070 IF NXT OLD THEN NXT OL D NR F OLD T WR GOSUB 8000 GOSUB 7ddd NXT NW 0 GOTO 1500 1075 LR REM SAVE PREV REC NO 1080 R NXT OLD GOTO 1055 REM GET NEXT DATA RECORD 1500 GOSUB 4500 REM WRITE 1ST REC 1518 R NR F NW T WR GOSUB 8004 GOSUB 7000 1528 GOTO 1040 2000 REM 2001 REM CHANGE RECORD 2002 REM 2004 GOSUB 4000 REM GET HEADER 20065 FIC 0 THEN HOME VTAB 5 HTAB 4 PRINT THERE ARE NO RECORDS TO CHANGE FOR 1 TO 2000 NEXT GOTO 100 HOME HTAB 4 VTAB 4 PRINT DO YOU WISH TO CHANGE THE NAME 2 015 4 VTAB 5 PRINT ENTE R Y ES OR N O GET CN IF CN GOTO 2050 2020 IF CN lt gt Y 2015 2030 GOSUB 3030 REM DELETE REC 2031 F NW T OLD GOSUB 8000 REM RESTORE DELETED RECORDS DATA 2414 2017 2032 HOME 4 VTAB 5 INPUT ENTER NEW FIRST NAME FIRS T OLD 2034 IF FIRST OLD GOTO 2032 2036 4 VTAB 6 INPUT ENTE R NEW LAST NAME LAST OLD 2038 IF LAST OLD GOTO 2036 2040 GOTO 2070 REM GET OTHER I NPUTS 2050 HOME GOSUB 6000 REM GET INPUTS 2060 GOSUB
28. TOTALS TOTALS Nor do you need zeros after a decimal point mask five Zap The last mask TOTALS TUN 00 shows flexibility by using decimal point fill The BASIC inter ace to this routine is the technique that assigns X at the beginning of your BASIC pro gram Later when you are ready to edit your data you must first assign your mask X totals 00 The mask must be reassigned each time you edit This is because the mask is modi fied and not your data string Next your data string is defined as any string variable available to BASIC If you have a numeric variable then use the instruction Y STR X where X is the variable you wish to edit No check is made on the numeric quality of this data string so an in struction like Y STR X will give you the floating dollar sign After X has been assigned as the first variable at the beginning of your BASIC program and the machine language routine has been loaded the actual usage could be 100 X 00 CALL 27904Y PRINT X The lack of space comma or colon between the CALL and your data name is important This routine which converts numeric strings into English makes MICRO use of the presently unused input buffer page If you want to defer printing after the CALL instruction to do INPUT or save the newly edited string for reuse then you must save it from its volatil
29. The operating system of the Atari 1200 supports four more graphics modes These modes are instruction register modes 4 5 C and E IR modes 4 and 5 are character graphics modes which allow characters to be formed using bit pairs as color register references IR mode 4 uses one scan line per character row and mode 5 uses two Most of the reference materials I have claim that these are four color modes and it is true that you can have only four colors in each character on the screen but they are actually five color modes The colors normally origi nate from registers 4 background 0 1 and 2 but if you PRINT the character in inverse video the color that would have been from register 2 will be taken instead from register 3 IR modes C and E are both map modes Mode C is a two color mode using 160 dots per line each mode line is a single scan line Mode E is like OS mode 7 which is IR mode DJ except it has twice the vertical resolution using one scan line per mode line instead of two These new modes can be declared with GRAPHICS statements from BASIC as modes 12 through 15 There are only 14 modes available in the Atari hardware GTIA modes are actually all versions of mode 8 The Atari 1200 operating system supports all but the IR mode 3 a special character mode that supports lower case descenders It has ten scan lines per character allowing you to use all eight in the character set because the other two are automat
30. 100 testored No special program ming rewiring or soldering is required Price 220 00 Includes 4K Rememory Board with battery Available Devices and Services Co 10911 Dennis Road Suite 405 Dallas TX 75229 Name DISCOVER Description DISCOVER is a stylish and sturdy diskette box expertly crafted of naturally finished solid wood with brass simulated aluminum that pro vides convenient and safe storage for as many as forty five 5M diskettes in three equally spaced sections The low profile top design keeps the lid out of the way when open and conveniently ready to close with one hand Price 59 95 Redwood 67 95 Oak 69 95 Walnut plus 3 00 s h Available Leland Young Company P O Box 4127 Bay Pines FL 33504 Name RB5X System Memory 8K Hardware Mobile Intelligent Robot Language Tiny BASIC Description RB5X is an ex perimental intelligent robot that learns from its own ex perience progressing from simple random responses to an ability to generalize about features of its environment Equipped with its own micro processor memory programs and tactile sensors the RB is intended as a tool for experi menters It can be trained studied and adapted in a varie ty of ways according to the im agination of its owner With the standard RS 232 interface the robot s memory can be studied and its programs altered via a personal com puter A Special Option Package with 16
31. 8050 PEDISK II Available from cgrs MICROTECH P O Box 102 Langhorne PA 19047 215 757 0284 129 00 DEALER INQUIRIES INVITED with Intelligent Terminal Communice COMPACK Circle No 45 75 76 ATARi is a trademark o ATARI Inc Warner Communications Company MACHINE LANGUAGE UTILITIES for ATARI 400 800 1200 VERVAN Nervan Software utility programs require no software modifications and are a must for all serious ATARI BASIC programmers CASOUP 1 0 amp 2 0 To copy most BOOT tapes and cassette data files 1 0 is a file copier 2 0 is a sector copier Cassette only 24 95 CASDIS To transfer most BOOT tapes and cassette data files to disk Disk only 24 95 FULMAP BASIC Utility Package VMAP variable cross reference CMAP constant cross reference includes indirect address references LMAP line number cross reference FMAP all of the above Will list unlistable programs Also works with Editor Assembler cartridge to allow editing of string packed machine language subroutines All outputs may be dumped to printer Cassette or Disk 39 95 DISASM To disassemble machine language programs Works with or without Editor Assembler cartridge May be used to up or down load single boot files All output can be dumped to printer Cassette or Disk 24 95 DISDUP For disk sector information copying May specify single sector range of sectors or all Cop
32. COM 64 Memory 8K expander Language BASIC Hardware Disk drive and printer Description Data Manager is complete data management system with up to 1200 entries on disk You may define your own data then add change or delete any record from your disk You may also search print out a hard copy of any or all fields and run totals Price 59 95 VIC 20 79 95 64 Includes documentation and binder Available MicroSpec Ltd 2905 Ports O Call Ct Plano TX 75075 214 867 1333 Name Job Costing Tracking Apple II Apple II Plus or Apple III with emulator Applesoft in ROM Memory 48K Language Applesoft Hardware Two disk drives 132 column printer Description Contractors can save time estimating writing System MICRO proposals analyzing and track ing job costs The program is remarkably easy to use and is designed to provide numerous valuable reports and financial information for any size contractor Price 237 00 Includes program diskettes and instruction manual Author Jeff Park Available Software Solutions 9124 Hwy 17 Scotts Valley CA 95066 408 438 2433 or from any dealer Name Bulk Mailer System Apple Il Memory 48K Language Applesoft Hardware Single or dual disk or Corvus hard disk Description professional quality mailing list program that features duplication elimination fastest possible sorts unlimited coding capa bility
33. File Oriented Disk System DM816 M8A An static RAM board tested for a minimum of 100 hours and warranted for a full 6 months DM816 UB1 A prototyping card with on board 5V regulator and address selection You add the application DM816 P8 4 8K EPROM card for 2708 or 2716 circuits On board regulation of all required voltages Supplied without EPROMS DM816 CC15 A 15 position motherboard mounted in a 19 RETMA standard card cage with power supply KIM AIM and SYM versions DISK PROGRAM LIBRARY Offers exchange of user contributed routines and programs for HDE Disk Systems Contact Progressive Computer Software Inc for details HDE DISK BASIC A full range disk BASIC for KIM based systems Includes PRINT USING IF THEN ELSE Sequential and random file access and much more 175 00 HDE ADVANCED INTERACTIVE DISASSEMBLER AID Two pass disassembler assigns labels and con structs source files for any object program Saves multiple files to disk TIM AIM SYM KIM versions 95 00 HDE ASSEMBLER Advanced two pass assembler with standard mnemonics KIM TIM SYM and KIM cassette versions 75 00 80 00 cassette HDE TEXT OUTPUT PROCESSING SYSTEM TOPS A comprehensive text processor with over 30 commands to format and output letters docu ments manuscripts KIM TIM and KIM cassette versions 135 00 142 50 cassette HDE DYNAMIC DEBUGGING TOOL DDT Built in assembler disassembler with pro
34. HOOK This is what the CONDOS sec tion of the program does Every time you CALL PRNT CON DOS is executed The first thing it does is to find DOS itself This changes from machine to machine depending on the amount of memory available but CSW almost always points to the right place in DOS Now it has to find that internal DOS equivalent to CSW Un fortunately that s not always held in the same place even relative to the ad dress you ve found especially we understand with some customized ver sions of DOS being used privately What does seem to stay constant though is a pair of locations 26 38 bytes past the start of the DOS in tercept routine which holds the ad dress of the address of the device handling routine If you read the ad dress held there you can find the right EVER WONDER HOW YOUR APPLE Il WORKS And it can show you WHY when it doesn t QUICK TRACE will show you This relocatable program traces and displays the actual machine operations while it is running and Single Step mode displays the last instruction next instruction registers flags stack contents and six user detinable memory locations Trace mode gives a running display of the Singie Step information and can be made to stop upon encountering any of nine user definabie conditions Background mode permits tracing with no display until itis desired Debugged routines run at near normal speed until one of the stopping cond ition
35. LOAD BRUN etc are standard If you can oper BRIDGE THE APPLE FORMAT BARRIER The MEGAFLEX diskett does what Apple s cannot read and write diskettes from other computers Software controlled industry stan dard IBM 3740 or System 34 type f rmats allow the MEGAFLEX library of refor matting software to read and write Altos Radio Shack Osborne and IBM PC diskettes Call for the latest software details MORE STORAGE MORE UNIVERSAL FEATURES LOWEST COST MEGAFLEX with 8 maxi or high density 5 25 minis gives you 1 2 Megabyte of formatted data per diskette for 8 times the file and data size MEGAFLEX offers flexible software choices data rate 250 500 Kbits per second single and double density recording and single double sided drive operation max 4 drives MEGAFLEX has the lowest chip count of any controller today This means less power a cooler Apple and better reliability Lowest price highest performance that s ate Apple drives you can op m MEGAFLEX erate MEGAFLEX Your 11722 SORRENTO VALLEY ROAD Apple software will run with ppt out modification too A Division of SVA TWX 910 335 2047 APPLE TWO SDG TRADEMARKS CP M 0 ugital Research Circle No 59 Product Name Foxygraf tape version Equip 4 TRS 80C 16K Price 29 95 cassette 34 95 disk Manufacturer Computerware 4403 Manchester Ave Encinitas Ca 92024 Description Foxygraf is a
36. Line 2005 checks to see if FIC 0 If FIC is not equal to zero the user is asked if the name is to be changed If the user responds Y yes the program pro ceeds to delete the record 5 3030 in line 2030 Since the delete routine saves the deleted data in the NW elements line 2031 moves this data back to the OLD elements Lines 2032 through 2038 accept the new first and last names from the user Control is then passed to line 2070 If the user does not want to change the name then the change function con tinues at line 2050 where a GOSUB 6000 gets the first and last name and a GOSUB 9000 searches for the desired record Line 2070 checks to see that the record was found if not RC 20 then a not found message is displayed Lines 2080 through 2297 prompt the user to change any of the data fields in the record Line 2300 checks for a name change CN Y If there was the data is moved from OLD to NW and the record is added through a GOTO 1020 If the name was not changed then the record is rewritten line 2310 and con trol returns to the main menu DELETE lines 3000 3130 The delete function first reads the header record line 3010 then makes sure FIC 0 Line 3030 GOSUBs to 6000 to get the key of the record to delete Line 3040 GOSUBs to 9000 to search for the record If the record is found RC 0 then processing continues No 58 March 1983 When the record is found line 3045 s
37. NEC 8023A parallel IDS Microprism Star Gemini Star Gemini 15 columns Epson MX 80 Ribbons COMMODORE BUSINESS SERIES SuperPet 5 languages 2 processors CBM 8032 Computer 80 Column CBM Memory Expansion 64K 4032 40 Column CBM 8050 1 mg Dual Drive CBM 8250 2 mg Duat Drive CBM D9060 5 mg Hard Disk CBM 09090 7 5 mg Hard Disk CBM 4040 340K Dual Drive CBM 2031 170K Single Drive DC Hayes Smart Modem BUSINESS SOFTWARE WordPro4 or 5 Administrator VisiCalc expanded The Manager database BPI A R G L Job Cost Inventory Payroll TO ORDER CALL TOLL FREE 800 527 4893 800 442 1048 within Texas SJB DISTRIBUTORS INC 10520 Plano Road Suite 206 Dallas Texas 75238 214 343 1328 489 199 199 Business Hours M F 8 to 6 Sat 10 2 No 58 March 1983 325 SOFTWARE FOR CBM 64 The Assistant Series Writers Assistant easy and flexible File Assistant database with merge Spreadsheet Assistant Personal Finance Assistant great reports Coco computer tutoring game Coco II build your own games easily Home Accounting Package General Ledger A R A P with check writing CBM EasyFinance Data Manager Stock investment analysis Pet Emulator emulates 4 0 basic Sprite Magic use joystick to design sprites Assembler Package cassette or disk compiled includes editor loader disassembler Motormania arcade tape Renaissance Colorsketch draw on screen w
38. OKIDATA 83A OKIDATA 84 OKIDATA TRACTOR NEC 8023A SMITH CORONA STARWRITER BUSINESS SOFTWARE ATARI WORD PROCESSING 109 00 LETTER PERFECT ROM 149 00 LETTER PERFECT disc 129 00 TEXT WIZZARD DATA PERFECT ATARI CX 40 WICO COMMAND CONTROL WICO RED BALL WICO TRACK BALL Book of ATARI Software 346 pages 19 95 PERCOM SINGLE DRIVE SD SINGLE DRIVE DD DUAL DRIVE DD DUAL HEAD DD TO ORDER m CALL TOLL FREE 800 233 8760 or send order to Lyco Computer P O Box 5088 Jersey Shore PA 17740 Circle No 3 mo Digi Draft for Atari 400 800 by Timothy Kilby This drawing program allows you to construct images on an Atari GRAPHICS 7 screen Convenient commands change colors load and save use alternate character sets and draw points lines circles and rectangles DIGI DRAFT is joystick operated port 1 and menu driven Regular drawing is done in the default mode You will have to press a key to select one of the options You won t see an option in the menu to change all the playfield color registers just press SELECT to initiate this option The rest of the menu selections are DIAGONAL LINE Draws a diagonal line from the last plotted point RECTANGLE Automatically draws a rectangle Position cursor at one corner and press FIRE Position cursor at opposite corner and press R CIRCLE Draws arcs and circles either filled or not Circles near the screen s edge w
39. QT D1 I C NEXT 5010 D D QT D1 NF 5020 PRINT 1 D 5030 IF DS THEN 1690 5040 RETURN First note that the record command parks the disk head at the correct spot in the file for this entry as described in part 2 If there is a disk error here or elsewhere in the subroutine a panic exit is made back to the menu module via line 1690 As mentioned before BASIC 2 users will need to call a disk error checking subroutine from lines 4980 and 5030 and use an alternate form of the RECORD command in line 4970 In line 4990 we begin to build a string of information to write to the disk The first piece is the key field in K followed by a carriage return character in variable C Every other field in turn is concatenated onto the end of the data string 0 Each data field is preceeded by a quote character in and each field but the last is followed by a carriage return The quote character allows all other characters to be read back later using an INPUT statement Otherwise we would need the much slower statement You ll find a similar advantage when using carriage returns Since each field is shorter than 80 characters the INPUT statement can read them pro 85 vided that each ends with a carriage return This also allows longer fields without lengthening the overall record When carriage returns separate fields there is no need to know the location of each field within the
40. ZIP code TEL Telephone number NXT Next record in chain ONY NXT is the pointer to the next record in 14 the set When LINK CREATE itializes the file it sets all the data fields to nulls fields 1 through 7 and the NXT pointer points to the n 1 record where n is the current record number Thus LINK CREATE builds a chain of available records The first record is pointed to by in the header record NA is initialized to 1 LINK CREATE prompts the user for the file size desired and places that many data records in the file The last record in the chain contains a zero in the NXT field Zero signifies an end of chain thus zero is also placed in FIC since the used record chain is empty when the file has just been initialized LINK PROG initializes the I O ar rays in line 10 I use element 0 as the file input area OLD is used as the sub Script element 1 is the keyboard or user input area NW for new is used as the subscript element 2 is the file output area WR for write is used as the subscript Lines 100 145 ask for the desired function A DD C HANGE I INQUIRE Q UIT and then branches to it Take a look at how these subroutines work Line Description 5000 Reads the data records into the old elements 6000 Gets user inputs from the keyboard and places them in the NW elements For the add function A it prompts the user
41. a mask string and a data string with the following options 1 Fixed decimal points and commas 2 Fixed dollar sign and text 3 Asterisk or dollar sign fill 4 Floating dollar sign Options 1 2 and 3 are controlled by the way you set up your mask string and may be used in any combination with option 4 which is handled by appending your float character to the data string all in BASIC On the mainframe computer the floating dollar sign and asterisk are handled by setting hardware flags By eliminating the need for flags in this machine language code I feel I have improved upon the mainframe version by allowing any and all ASCII charac ters to float and or fill Included with the assembly listing is a short program that displays a set array of number strings and the result when they are combined with various user masks which are keyed into this routine The first mask TOTAL AMOUNT 15 200 dem onstrates the prime use of this routine and options 1 and 2 above The data strings show that the unused commas will be suppressed The mask is not limited to numeric characters only No 58 March 1983 The second mask TOTAL TO DATE 0000 demon strates dollar sign or any character fill The fill characters still suppress the un needed commas and the zeros after the decimal point are not limited to two In fact you don t even need a decimal point as shown in the third and fourth masks
42. and plot offline Author s note few of the early production 1515 printers do not handle buffer overflow properly in graphics mode If your unit locks up occasion ally while running these routines con tact your dealer or Commodore Cus tomer Support References 1 VIC 20 Programmer s Reference Guide Commodore Business Ma chines Inc and Howard W Sams and Company Inc 1982 2 VIC 1515 User s Manual Commo dore Business Machines Inc April 1981 Contact the author at P O Box 3322 Windsor Ontario Canada N8N 2 4 AICRO 21 E Fantastic action game for Atari The elite corps known as the Nightraiders are trying to bring freedom to a conquered earth Since they are few in number compared to the enemy they must operate under the cloak of darkness As the group s leader your mission is to fly over enemy strongholds identify targets o opportunity and destroy them thoroughly While the invaders cannot mount an air attack after the sun has set they do have weapons o awesome power weapons which relentlesly track your flightpath and anticipate your movements Success does not come easy You must be able to maneuver like the crack of a whip accelerate and decelerate in and out of hyperdrive while carefully lining up the targets for your twin ion bombs And always keep an eye on the special radar screen which spots enemy actio for you Become a Nightraider and meer th
43. quests lines per inch with the LPI prompt The four legal answers to this prompt are 6 8 SPACE and RETURN Anything else makes the printer beep and the LPI prompt is reissued Answering 6 selects six lines per inch 66 lines per page and 62 lines of print per page at which time a form feed is generated Answering 8 selects eight lines per inch 88 lines per page and 82 lines of print per page SPACE or RETURN here ends the initialization sequence This provides an easy way to continue printing from where the last printing left off The next prompt MARGIN allows you to specify a left margin width in decimal Default is no margin The last prompt is OPTS Here is where the real power of the MX Driver 32 Listing 1 Basic Centronics interface and sophisticated printer driver for Epson MX 80 and MX 100 printers with Grattrax Plus Assembled to reside at the top of RAM on a 4K AIM 65 CODE LINE LOC 9001 0000 8660 Q gt 9052 2 8 9 N 5 FF 22 ne 18 Ad 553 ARTA 8 a5 DAR AA 67 Ad F9 MICRO LINE 3 EPSON MX89 MX1990 PRINTER DRIVER FOR THE AIM 65 3 BY LARRY R HOLLIBAUGH E SUPPORTS TWO FORMS OF PRINTER COMMUNICATION 5 1 BASIC CENTRONICS PARALLEL INTERFACE 3 2 SOPHISTICATED PRINTER DRIVER PROVIDING H 5 INITIALIZATION OPTIONS MARGINS LINE FEED SUPRESSION AND 5 PE
44. that teach you programming techniques and concepts Among the articles appearing in The Learning Center this month are MICRO Calc for Commodore and Apple by Loren Wright p 47 This miniature spread sheet program lets you perform a variety of calculations Minor changes are provided for all Commodore machines Phil Daley of fers an equivalent program for the Apple Digi Draft by Tim Kilby p 57 a drawing program allows you to con struct images on an Atari GRAPHICS 7 screen Learn commands to change col ors load and save draw points lines circles and rectangles Another entertaining program displays messages in large letters across your screen A Display Pro gram for the TRS 80C by Bryan Chris tiansen p 65 also includes powerful machine language loading techniques that provide efficient handling of machine language subroutines As Always Don t miss our usual machine specific coverage in Apple Slices CoCo Bits From Here To Atari and Pet Vet No 58 March 1983 HANS DISCSAVERS VINYL PROTECTIVE DISK SLEEVES 24 463 COLOR CODED N Multi color DiscSavers are desdied DURABLE Rigid construction protects against foreasy f cagniti n of individuat disks with your own constant handling to ensure long wear and tear PORTABLE DiscSavers are the only portable vinyl PROTECTIVE 2274 disk sleeves for use with a diskette t
45. use Atari character set LDX 2C light yellow background or color of your choice LDY 06 dark text color STA D40A wait for WSYNC STA D409 store Atari character pointer in CHBASE STX D018 store background color in COLPF2 58 TO 2 09 FOR OVAL SHAPE 7010 REM READ JOYSTICK ASSTICK 0 1B 8TRIG O IRPMB Y 1 1F A 11 AND X gt 44 THEN 1 PL X RETURN IF 7 AND X 203 THEN X X 1 POKE PL X RETURN IF 4 12 AND Y lt 94 THEN O USR O D 1 YsY 11 KETURN IF A 14 AND Y gt 15 THEM D USR U I Y Y 1 KETURN IF A 9 AND X gt 44 AND Y lt 94 THEN 1 PL X D USR XD I YzY 1 RETURN IF 5 AND X 203 AND Y lt 94 THEN 1 PL Xi0 USR XD 1 i Y 1 RETURN IF 1 X gt 44 AND YD15 THEN 1 PL X 09USK XU I 1Y Y 1 RETURN 100 IF amp AND X 203 AND Y gt 15 THEN X X 1 POKE PL X 0 U8R XU I1 YsY 1 110 RETURN 120 REN DRAWING ENTRY POINY_ 130 60808 JOY IF B 0 THEN COLOR C GOSUB 410 135 SOUNO 8 0 0 0 IF PEEK K lt gt RET THEN GOGUS 250 IF 53279 5 THEN 7 C 88 GOSUE 2010 GOSUB MENU COTO 130 REM LINE COLOR CHANGE IF 49 THEM 1 6068 8 230 IF KEY 50 THEN 2 0508 230 IF 51 THEN 3 0508 230 IF KEY 92 THEN C 0 COSUB 230 220 RETURN 23 FOR I 0 TO 20 704 0 704 14 NEXT I POKE 704 88 RETURN 240 REM 259 GET 4 KEY IF KEY 76 THEN C COSUB 5010 050 MENU 249 GOSUB 189 IF 48 THEN GOSUB 510 270 IF 40 THEN
46. 132 JMP OUT2 133 134 PARAMETER LOCATIONS AND DEFAULTS 135 PAGELEN DFS 1 65 136 STEP DFS 1 16 137 PAGENUM DFS 1 1 138 RIGHT DFS 1 70 139 LEFT DFS 1 16 140 CURPOS DFS 1 0 141 LINCOUNT DFS 1 0 142 5 OFF 47 143 TITLE ASC PAGE 20 144 HEX 00 145 END END MICRO nected Its address is still in CSW where you expect to find DOS s address instead In this case RESET unhangs the system Simply put a PRINT com mand or PRINT after your PR 1 before CALLing our routine Our routine assumes that Apple soft not Integer BASIC is the currently active BASIC in the system It uses Applesoft internal routines so it will not work when Integer BASIC is active To use it to print out Monitor disassembly listings type FP if you re in Integer BASIC then CALL 151 and you can use the routine from the Monitor You can use our routine to format the output of many otherwise print inflexible utility programs including some assemblers In most cases it has to be reassembled to reside at an ad dress that doesn t conflict with the utility s memory use All addresses are defined relative to the origin in this program so reassembly with the origin changed will take care of this com pletely Other programs unfortunately will not allow use of this formatter no matter where located For example if you want to three hole punch the out put from Apple s DOS Tool Kit Assem bler without punching out the ad dresses printe
47. 1444 Linden Street Department 302 Bethienem PA 18016 Dealers inquiries welcome INTEGRAL DATA SYSTEMS IDS MICROPRISM 480 PRINTER 599 00 IDS PRISM 132 PRINTER 1199 00 IDS PRISM 80 PRINTER 879 00 INTERACTIVE STRUCTURES PKASSO 145 00 INNOVATIVE SOFTWARE INC ca Sass wetness 369 00 69 00 9 00 INFORMATION UNLIMITED SYSTEMS 49 00 EASYSPELLER 159 00 EASYWRITER 11 279 00 MAXELL FD 1 1 32 8 SINGLESIDED 41 50 FD 2 amp DOUBLE 5 48 95 MD 1 1 574 SINGLE SIDED 31 25 MD 2 2 5 DOUBLE SIDED 47 10 CALCSTAR DATASTAR MAILMERGE WORDSTAR WORDSTAR MAILMERGE 128K RAM FOR IBMPC 599 00 BASIC COMPILER FOR APPLE II 315 00 128K RAMCARD 599 00 192K RAMCARD 699 00 256K RAMCARD p 799 00 64K RAMCARD 399 00 MICROSOFT 280 PREMIUM PACK 619 75 MICROSOFT 280 SOFTCARD 279 00 MULTIPLAN 229 00 TASC APPLESOFT COMPILER 149 00 NORTH AMERICAN BUSINESS SYSTEMS THE ANSWER 249 00 PEACHTREE ACCOUNTS PAYABLE 375 00 ACCOUNTS
48. 149 00 125 00 MAGICALC Videx VisiCalc Preboot 49 95 45 00 MODEMS FOR YOUR APPLE II 24 95 APPLEsurance II Hayes Smartmodem 300 229 00 Hayes Smartmodem 1200 699 00 550 00 Micromodem Il 279 00 controller plus automatic check Hayes 100 Baud Apple 389 00 299 00 of system hardware D eat Modem 19900 17500 MONITORS Amdek 3006 Green 159 00 Color Taxam RGB with Interface 395 00 PARALLEL INTERFACE Centronics Compat PRT 1 69 00 JOYSTICK Replaces two 99 95 Diagnostic Disk Controller and System 39 95 Assurance Package Standard disk 295 00 249 00 574 DISK DRIVE Use with either standard Apple Il disk drive or APPLEsurance ll 24 17 95 GRAPHITTI CARD Prints HIRES page 1 or 2 from onboard firmware Features True 1 1 aspect ralo p diae mode reverse mode rotates 90 degrees plus 22 85 more Compare al his with the Grappler We think Apple Paddle Controllers 59 00 39 00 E you ll agree that this is the best graphics card on 1 22 95 the market Specify for use with EPSON NEC FUNCTION STRIP 79 00 65 00 59 95 8023 C ITOH Prowriter or Okidata MEMORY EXPANSION 34 95 List 125 Prometheus 16K Module tu complete 169 00 65 00 89 95 PARALLEL PRINTERS 5 FLOPPY DISKS Box of 10 with hub ring
49. AD F9 8 20 88 08 A5 26 18 69 12 85 26 4C 47 68 60 48 29 C 85 26 4 4A 5 26 85 26 68 85 27 0880 STA 8F9 JSR 0888 LDX 08FE LDA 0900 STA 0881 CLC ADC 26 STA 26 LDA 0A00 X STA 0834 8FF ASL ASL ASL ASL STA 082 STA 0836 STA 0830 40 00 STA 8FC LOX 05 LDA 8C Q X STA 084B INX LDA 0000 STA 084 LOY 60 STY 8FA LDX 8 LDA 6E5B CMP 80 BEQ 0887 STA 908 AND 26 Y AND 7F BEQ 085D STA 08FA LDA 8FB EOR 26 Y STA 26 Y INC 0848 BNE 086C INC 084C DEX BEQ 0874 INC 26 JMP 0844 INC 68F9 68F9 JSR 0888 LDA 26 CLC ADC 12 STA 26 JMP 0847 RTS PHA AND 0 STA 26 LSR LSR ORA 26 STA 26 PLA STA 27 ASL ASL ASL ROL 27 ASL ROL 27 ASL ROR 26 LDA 27 AND 1F ORA 20 STA 27 RTS No 58 March 1982 Listing 3 Shape Definer 10 DIM L 58 CC 58 20 HOME INVERSE PRINT SHAPE DEFINER NORMAL 30 PRINT INPUT WIDTH OF SHAPE INPUT Wi W2 INT W1 2 7 2 40 AC W1 50 PRINT INPUT LENGTH OF SHAPE 3 INPUT LE PRINT INPUT SH APE PLOT CODE INPUT CC 60 8192 W2 8193 LE POKE 8194 CC AD 8194 76 HOME PRINT BEGIN SHAPE DEF INITION PRINT 80 FOR LO 1 TO LE 90 IF LO 2 gt 23 THEN VTAB 24 TA 23 GOTO 116 100 VTAB LO 2 TA LO 2 1
50. Apple can help you cram for the Scholastic Aptitude Test SAT Computer SAT is a computer package that leads students step by step through the test preparation process The program diagnoses the student s strengths and weak nesses prepares a study plan and guides him her through a comprehensive set of study exercises Price 69 95 Includes 470 page textbook How to Prepare for the SAT 50 page user s manual two double sided diskettes Available Harcourt Brace Jovanovich Inc 1250 Sixth Avenue San Diego CA 92101 and leading bookstores and computer stores Name Gusher System Apple II Apple III IBM PC Memory 64K Apple II and IBM PC 128K Apple Language Pascal Hardware Two disk drives and printer and interface 132 column Description This specially designed accounting package for oil and gas well operators automates joint interest billing and revenue distribution It calculates revenue distribution from production runs for each revenue owner joint interest statements for all working interest owners and A F E reports The package also gen erates well pay out reports and tracks the balances of revenue and working interest owners Invoices from and payments to vendors are also tracked Addi tional reports provided include 1099 reports list of expense categories list of vendors and vendors invoices The pack age also prints checks Price 995 00 Includes complete docu
51. C8 79 INY 6085 A9d2 86 LDA 2 STRATOR S LIBRARY 6087 9169 81 STA 369 Y A G I L is a product 6089 60 82 RTS Animation Graphics Inc 11317 Sunset Hills Road Reston Virginia 22090 40 MICRO No 58 March 1983 PRINTERS continued from pg 39 on one end or the other from destroy ing adjacent strings in variable memory more pointers The third problem in volves scanning the mask string to find the decimal point Moving and iso lating it does not cost much processing time and the space is available anyway Starting at line 16 the subroutine called PERIOD moves X to 200 and at the same time records the last period at location 1C Lines 27 Listing 2 10 X REM FIRST VARIABLE 50 PRINT CHR 4 BLOAD PRINT U SING d 100 FOR X 1 TO 10 READ Y X NEXT 150 INPUT Y REM GET DEMO MASK 200 FOR X 1 TO 10 Y CALL 279 4Y X 250 PRINT X Y X NEXT 300 GOTO 150 350 DATA 12345678 123456 8 1234 5 78 1234 678 123 5678 12 45 678 1234567 400 DATA 66012345 12345 78 12 3 5678 _ Listing 3 608 X DIM A 20 610 PRINT CHR 4 BLOAD PRINT USING 625 FOR X TO 19 READ A X NEXT FOR X TO 9 READ B X NEXT 700 INPUT 7 730 X 333 330 00 CALL 279 007 PRINT X PRINT 745 X 000000 00 CALL 279042 IF VAL Z lt 1 THEN PRINT GOTO 790 750 FOR X TO 1 5 6 2 FOR 0702 IFZ gt 9 THE
52. CALC PRIOR RECORD 6270 IF K9 gt 1 THEN 9 9 1 6280 RR 9 6290 RETURN The key position of the current record is in K9 Going up if it is less than the last active record then K9 is in creased and RR is assigned the alpha betically next record number to read Going down if it is greater than 1 the first record K9 is decreased and RR is assigned the prior record To be sure the record will fit the space allotted each new or altered record has its length checked 5410 REM RECORD LENGTH CHECK 5420 ER 0 5430 WK LEN K 1 5440 FOR M 1 TO LEN D1 M 2 NEXT 5450 WK WK 1 5460 IF WK gt RL THEN ER 1 5470 RETURN Variable ER serves as an error flag It starts equal to zero but if the record is too long it is changed to one After the subroutine the main program checks the value of ER to see if the record is too long If so the user must redo the last field altered to make it shorter If we wrote an overlong record to disk the disk copy would be truncated at the assigned length losing re maining data On the other hand MICRO records may safely be shorter than the allotted space One other check is made on newly entered postal code data If the postal code is not valid in either the U S or Canada the program accepts it but dis plays a warning Bennett s original ver sion made the user re enter such data Finally we are ready to read a relative rec
53. Celestino Monclova presents a machine language routine that when called from BASIC merges two string variables a mask and a data with the following options fixed decimal points and commas fixed dollar sign and text asterisk or dollar sign and floating dollar sign If you are using an Apple printer in terface card you can send only 7 bit ASCII code To find out how to add pro gram control to the eighth bit read Mark Boyd s Full Byte for Your Apple Printer 42 We also offer a brief tutorial by Fred Wallace Plotting with the VIC p 19 that describes the graphics mode available on a VIC 20 equipped with the VIC 1515 graphic printer Mr Wallace includes a BASIC subroutine that permits plotting of either a mathematical function or a user generated array on a grid with labeled axes Robert Paul explains how to utilize the open area of OS 65D directory sec MICRO tor 1 to include a diskette ID on printed directories in Disk ID for Printed Directories p 36 If you re looking for a printer read through our Information Sheet p 105 before you go shopping It describes the 10 to 20 most popular printers for the computers we cover major character istics are compared New The Learning Center Now computerists just beginning to tap the keyboard can enjoy MICRO as wel as sophisticated programmers The Learning Center provides fun easy to key in programs with accom panying tutorial text
54. FORII 1TONL INPUT 1 A IFA THENA 5120 S II A NEXT RETURN 6500 BB ASC LEFT S JJ 2 64 IFBB gt 13THENBB BB 13 GOT06538 6510 ONBBGOSUB6560 6570 6580 6598 66006 6610 6626 6638 6640 6650 6660 6678 6680 6520 60706540 6538 5 86694 6700 6710 6720 6720 6744 6750 6760 6770 6780 6790 6800 6814 6544 S JJ XX 6550 RETURN 6560 XX A RETURN 6570 XX B RETURN 6580 XX C 6598 XX D 6600 XX E 6610 XX F 6626 XX 0 6630 6640 XX I 6658 XX J 6660 XX K 6676 XXsL 6680 XX M 6696 XX N 6704 XX 0 6716 XX P 6720 XX Q 6736 XX R 6746 XX S 6756 XX T 6760 XX U RETURN 6776 XX V RETURN 6786 XX W 6790 6800 XX Y 6810 2 RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN 7000 PRINT CH FORII 1TONL S S II SS S II 7010 X IFRIGHT S 1 THENX STR SS 8006 RESTORE FORII T042 READAA 8510 PRINT CLR CD FORII 1TONL S S II RVS LEFTS BL 16 LEN STR SS 7620 PRINTCR S X NEXT RETURN POKE828 II AA NEXT RETURN 8500 FORII 1TONL S II S II NEXT 8520 PRINT YEL S RVS LEFT BL 26 LEN S CD NEXT PRINT CH CD RETURN 9000 A 0 B A C A D A E A F A G A H A IzA J A KsA L A M A 9010 N A 0 A P A Q A R A S A T A U A V A W A X A Y A Z A RETURN 9828 DATA165 122 141 112 3 165 123 141 113 3 169 8 133 122 169 2 133 123 32 121 9848 197 169 0 133 122 169 2 133 123 32
55. If the user selects the BROWSE op tion processing continues at line 2750 which asks the user to enter a part or whole of the last name This tells the program where to begin the BROWSE Line 2820 displays the record Line 2830 asks the user to change delete look at the next record in the chain or return to the main menu quit To con tinue lines 2836 through 2850 preprare to get the next record first making sure that the end of the chain has not been reached NXT OLD 0 If it hasn t MICRO EUR ERR then the next record is obtained by a GOSUB 9015 line 2850 The BROWSE cycle is continued by looping back to line 2810 QUIT line 150 Quit makes sure the file is properly closed so any data in the buffer is writ ten to the file before processing ends Program Hints LINK PROG is an example of how to deal with linked lists It provides you with all the basic processing com ponents of linked lists but is not de signed as an end in itself It is simply an example of an application of linked lists Note that as the linked list gets longer the processing begins to slow down To access the last record in the chain all subsequent records must be read first So linked lists are best used where the lists are relatively short An example of this is the catalog sectors that Apple DOS use to store file description entries Also linked lists are most powerful when they are built on top of each ot
56. Instead simply set LOMEM to 16384 before BLOADing the graphics routine and shape table In Integer there is no inherent command to set the high resolution mode The following Integer line acts like the HGR command when executed from within a program FOR L 8192 TO 16383 POKE 10 NEXT L L PEEK 16300 PEEK 16297 PEEK 16301 PEEK 16304 Substitutiong 16302 for 16301 sets full screen graphics Assembly Language From assem bler the X coordinate is stored in loca tion 8FE the Y coordinate in location 8FD and the shape number in loca tion 8FF If a collision is detected a number greater than O is stored in loca tion 8FA To exclusive OR the shape with the hi res screen jump to the subroutine at location 800 Begin all programs after location 4000 to insure that your assembly language program does not interfere with the graphics Advanced Technique To use the graphics routine op timally you could define all shapes that should register collisions with each other using only dots of the same col umn parity then define a background using only dots of the opposite column parity This way shapes can run over the background smoothly detecting only collisions with other shapes You should not attempt this method unless you have a thorough understanding of the Apple graphics system With the graphics routine and sup porting software presented in this arti cle you should be able to m
57. K Bell P O Box 7 Augusta GA 30903 continued Circle No 63 It s like old times again in the mutual funds game Figures for the top equity funds of 1982 are just short of unbelievable Sales of fund shares are soaring Heard on the Street Wall Street Journal 1 6 83 GET A FULL DAY S JUMP ON THE MARKET FINALLY A TOOL TO HELP YOU MAKE MORE INFORMED DECISIONS ABOUT MUTUAL FUND INVESTMENTS FUND MASTER TC IS HERE Don t wait for next day s newspaper Automatic data retrieval through Dow Jones News Retrieval Service TM provides ability to enter data on day of market closing No additional program necessary Gain the ability to follow and chart the performance of up to 100 mutual funds and several market timing indicators Funds and indicators are charted against an exponentially smoothed moving average Automatic ranking of funds according to momentum and rel ative strength Analysis useful for long term investments and switch trading Manual entry for system without modem SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Apple II TM with 48k Apple III TM Franklin Ace T M 1 2 disk drives Optional Hayes Micromodem II TM Printer Special introductory offer 150 00 until April 10 1983 175 00 after April 10 1983 Order today Time Trend Software P O Box 128 N Billerica MA 01862 Visa and Mastercard accepted include card number expiration date and signature Mass residents ad
58. LOCAL DEALER 800 227 9998 FOR THE NAME OF YOUR NEAREST DEALER California Canada Alaska and Hawaii please call 415 965 1735 Skyles Electric Works 231G South Whisman Road Mountain View CA 94041 Europe please contact Supersoft Winchester House Canning Road Harrow Wealdstone Middiesex England 7SJ Tel 01 861 1166 Circle No 38 We have a complete Typesetting System which expands the capabilities of an EditWriter to accept data from the phone lines produce plain paper proofing copy use improved word processing techniques plus run a variety of printing publishing oriented packages We have given SERVICE CALL a new meaning Using our Master Slave programs a system can be examined tested and often fixed via the telephone Blown data disks strange malfunctions and other quirks can be cured immediately over the telephone Software updates can also be sent directly to your system YES we have been very busy In addition to our development work in both hardware and software we have been providing board level products to a variety of OEMs and end users We don t have time right now to tell you about all of the things we can provide but write or give us a call and we ll make time Call us at 617 256 3649 or call our FOCUS System at 617 250 1460 300 BAUD Significant OEM Discounts Start At Only Five 5 Units FOCUS DRAM PLUS VIDEO PLUS MICRO Plus FLEXI PLUS and TypePlus
59. PLA CMP FF BEG MXDUN FHA AND 7F CMP LF BEQ MXRET CMP FFEED BNE MXOUT2 LDA LINCNT BNE MXOUTS LDA MRGFLG BNE MXOQUTS BEQ SMF LDA MRGFLG BNE MXOUTS INC MRGFLG LDA MARGIN SED SEC SBC 1 CLD BMI MxOUTS PHA LDA JSR CTOUT PLA BPL MRGLUP PLA PHA JSR CTOUT AND 7F CMP FFEED BEQ NEWPAG CR BEQ NEWLIN CMP VTAB BNE MXRET INC LINCNT LDA LINCNT CMP LINMAX BCC SMF LDA FFEED JSR MXOUT1 PLA RTS NEWPAG LDA SMF 5 GETMRG e STA LINCNT LDA 6 STA MRGFLG PLA RTS 5 IGNORE AIM S NULL CODES 3STRIP MSB 31GNORE LINE FEEDS FEED FALREADY AT TOP OF FORM IFIRST CHAR IN LINE DO IT YES SUPRESS EXTRAS 1 TO DO MARGIN SNOT YET YELEAR FLAG DECREMENT IN DECIMAL DONE IF PAST ZERO 3PRINT A SPACE JAND LOOP 360 PRINT IT iS STRIP MOD 3 FEED 3YES RESET TOP OF PAGE i RETURN 3YES i VERTICAL TAB WE RE Hea LINE iSKIP QVER PERF YET 3NOT YE 3YES DO FORM FEED 3 ZERO LINE COUNT 3SET MARGIN FLAG GET MARGIN WIDTH GETMRG LDA ADDR 3SAVE ADDR LDA ADDR 1 PHA GTMRGi JSR CRLOW SHRGMSG LITS JSR PMSG IREQUEST MARGIN JSR ADDIN IT JSR BELL J SIGNAL ERROR JMP GTMRG1 SAND ASK AGAIN MRGOK LDA ADDR SUSE ONLY LAST 2 NUMBERS ENTERED STA MARGIN PLA J RESTORE ADDR STA ADDR 1 PLA STA ADDR RTS 3 GETOPT GET OPTIONAL PRINTER MODES GETOPT LDY 4OPTMSG LITS JSR PM
60. POKE PL TRAP 4080 CLOSE 91 0 1 4 0 F8 4030 FOR 12708 TO 712 GET e1 C POKE I 4040 POKE 852 PEEKCGG POKE 852 PEEK 89 855 129 857 121 0 850 7 4050 JeUSR ADR CCIOS 0 4060 POKE 54286 192 C 1 POKE PL XiTRAP 130 0 7 08 1 709 3 C2 PEEK 710 4 712 POKE 54284 192 7 C8 08 Sorry Problems with that file Tey again FOR D 1 TO 300 NEXT OGOTO 4079 5000 REM LOAD CHARACTER SET 5010 POKE 752 03 Enter filename for your character set Press RETURN for ATARI characters 020 TRAF 5070 INPUT F9 POKE 752 1 1 F 2 THEN 7 89 P KE 756 2241T9 0 RETURM 5030 CLOSE 1 0PEN 1 4 0 F8 POKE 852 0 POKE 823 8 856 P POKE 857 4 8 50 7 5040 J USR AOR CCIOS S050 POKE 754 9 42856 192 C8 D8 Load complete FOR 1 TO 25 NEXT Di T 1 060 TRAP 130 KETURN 2070 POKE 4286 192 CS 08 Problenms with that file Try again B FOR 0 1 TO 390 NEXT D GOTO 5040 7000 REM TITLE SCREEN 7010 GRAPHICS 17 708 214 PDSITION 5 7 5 OIGI ORAFT POSITIQON 4 19 BY TIM KILEY 8000 REM INITIALIZATION 8010 OIM 15 1 8 19 0 1 19 71 10 4 8020 FOR 0 1 TO amp READ A CIOS D D 2CHRS AD2 NEXT D 8030 DATA 104 152 16 76 B6 228 040 C9150 C1270 24228 1C42141C 1 IRETe255 T40 14764 JOY 30 PL 597481 NENU 37010E it Pays to Write for MICRO Em POKE MINT un 2m YX25A EPOKE SIS
61. Peripherals Repairs KIMs SYMs and AIMs Too We will Diagnose Repair and Completely Test your Single Board Computer We Socket all replaced Integrated Circuits You receive a 30 day Parts and Labor Warranty Your repaired S B C returned via U P S C O D Cash Don t delay Send us your S B C for repair today Ship To Preferably via U P S Perry Peripherals 6 Brookhaven Drive Rocky Point NY 11778 KIM 1 Replacement Modules Exact replacement for MOS Commodore KIM 1 S B C Original KIM 1 firmware 1K and RAM versions Replacement KIM 1 Keyboards Identical to those on early KIMS SST switch in top right corner Easily installed in later model KIMs Perry Peripherals is an authorized HDE factory service center Perry Peripherals carries a full line of the acclaimed HDE expansion components for you KIM SYM and AIM including RAM boards Disk Systems and Software like HDE Disk BASIC V1 1 Yes we also have diskettes For more information write to P O Box 924 Miller Place NY 11764 or Phone 516 744 6462 Circte No 22 34 MICRO No 58 March 1983 Listing 1 continued LINE LOC CODE LINE 0255 TABLE OF INITIALIZATION PARMS FOR GRAFTRAX PLUS 9254 erco INITS 0255 FC 1B RESET ESC 3RESET PRINTER 254 eFC1 48 9257 2 1B BYT ESC O 3RESET SOP WE DO OUR OWN 09258 259 FC4 iB BYT ESC C 90 11 FORM LENGTH 11 INCHES 02408
62. RECEIVABLE 375 00 GENERAL LEDGER 375 00 NY 575 00 187 50 SALES INVOICING pe 375 00 PERFECT SOFTWARE PERFECT CALC 139 00 PERFECT FILER 279 00 PERFECT SPELLER 139 00 PERFECT WRITER 239 00 QUADRAM 128K MEMORY EXPANSION 380 00 192K MEMORY EXPANSION 475 00 64K MEMORY EXPANSION 280 00 64K MEMORY UPGRADE 129 00 MICROFAZERS ALL MODELS CALL QUADBOARD 64K 499 00 QUADBOARD 128K 649 00 QUADBOARD 192 749 00 QUADBOARD 256K 829 00 CONTROLLER FOR ELITE 99 00 RANA 379 00 RANA ELITE II 559 00 RANA ELITE Ill 729 00 SMITH CORONA 5 1 5599 00 SUPERCALC BY SORCIM 209 00 SPELLGUARD 189 00 MICROHOUSE YOUR MICRO COMPUTER PEOPLE Circle No 4 v rne gt o an n T J BE 21 a Anon 74 5 by David Lubar and Mark Pelezarski _ Paint on your computer in over 100 colors with 96 different brushes Magnify mode for precision touch ups mirror image color reverses move any part of picture eking any standard graphics screen b
63. Rabble OZI Computers P O Box 781 Shepparton VIC 3630 Australia System No 58 March 1983 FORTH At At 400 800 6809 Ap At 400 800 TRS 80C TRS 80C Ap Ap II 6809 6502 Ap FORTRAN Ap Plus Ap Plus Ap Ap OSI Ap AP LISP 6502 400 800 LOGO Ap Plus TRS 80C Ap Plus Ap Plus VIC 20 Micro Dymanic Ap Modula 2 Ap II 68000 MUMPS 6809 68000 Apple Extended fig FORTH FORTH FORTH FORTH valFORTH Int l Color FORTH Color FORTH FORTH 72 Version 2 MicroSPEED I II structured totally recursive com piled language FORTH 1 7 OGI fig FORTH fig FORTH source listings polyFORTH Apple FORTRAN FORTRAN 80 FORTRAN Nevada FORTRAN FORTRAN 3 4 FORTRAN 77 Nevada FORTRAN LISP APP L ISP p LISP muLISP muSTAR 80 INTERLISP LOGO TRS 80 Color LOGO Terrapin LOGO Apple LOGO Turtle Graphics Micro Dynamic Modula 2 systems implementation Multi FORTH MSM 09 Language Packages Editor s Note This list provides a sample of the most popular packages available and is not meant to be comprehensive Atari Quality Software Kenyon Microsystems Kuntze valFORTH Hoyt Stearns Electronics Hoyt Stearns MicroMotion Applied Analytics Information Unlimited Software On Going Ideas 3 FORTH Interest Group FORTH In
64. Richard Vile President Editor In Chlef Robert M Tripp Publisher John Grow DEPARTMENTS 2 March Highlights 7 Editorial 8 CoCo Bits 10 From Here to ATARI 12 Short Subjects 14 Apple Slices PET Vet Interface Clinic Reviews in Brief Software Catalog Hardware Catalog Language Information Sheet Data Sheet Printer Information Sheet 6809 Bibliography Next Month in MICRO Advertiser s Index No 58 March 1983 NO 58 MARCH 1983 IAICRO Advancing Computer Knowledge PRINTER FEATURE 19 24 31 Hi Res Plotting with the Fred Wallace Combine 1515 1525 printer with the VIC 20 for high resolution graphics Print Control for APPLE Printers John R Vokey and H Cem Kaner A short subroutine for automatic pagination and user selectable margins Centronics Printer Driver for Your Larry Hollibaugh An MX Driver assembly language program 36 Disk ID for Printed OSI Directories Robert A Paul Put unused disk space to good use 39 APPLE PRINT USING Routine Celestino R Monclova A machine language routine for formatted output 42 A Full Byte for Your APPLE Printer Mark J Boyd Greater control using the eighth bit THE LEARNING CENTER 47 MICRO Calc for Commodore and APPLE Loren Wright A miniature electronic spreadsheet 57 Digi Draft for Atari
65. TR 120MIP High Res Green 5159 00 DIABLO Mark VII Auto Answer Call 119 00 MICRO PRO TRS lor Computer 99 00 CT 160 Dua Mode Color 299 00 620 eee 222 5999 00 5 80 Color Computer Word Star Mail Merge 399 00 630 18176900 9 Volt Power 9 00 computer mail order east 800 233 8950 IN PA CALL 717 327 9575 477 E THIRD ST WILLIAMSPORT PA 17701 stock items shipped same day you call No risk no deposit on C O D orders Pre paid orders receive free shipping within the Continental United States with no waiting period for certified checks or money orders Add 3 minimum 3 00 shipping and handling on C O D and Credit Card orders NV and PA residents add sales tax All items subject to availability and price change NOTE We stock manufacturer s and third party software for most ali computers on the market Call today for our new catalogue Circle No 4 1000 ACE 10 with Controlier ACE Writer Word Processor CALL FOR SYSTEM PRICE Ace 1000 SYSCOM 48K Color Computer 100 Apple Com patible Apple Soft Basic 769 00 VISICORP for Apple IBM amp Franklin Visidex 189 00 Visitte 189 00 Visiplot 159 00 Visiterm 89 00 Visitrend Piot 229 00 VisiSchedule 229 00 Desktop Plan 189 00 Visicalc Applell Atari CBM IBM 179 00 Visicorp prices for IBM may vary slightly CONTINE
66. The brain in your computer is a MP that performs nearly one million operations machine cycles each second Any operating computer is reading and ex ecuting a list of instructions called a program making that list is called pro gramming regardless of the language Without a program the computer is helpless and stupid However when 108 you turn on any modern computer like the Color Computer it already knows how to read the keyboard display in formation on the screen and read pro grams from the cassette recorder and perhaps the disk It also knows BASIC and is able to help you learn how to operate it In other words the modern home computer already has a lot of program information furnished as part of the package This column will help you learn to use the existing hard ware and software for new purposes and to add more hardware and software to perform new tasks Before I begin discussing interfaces you need to be aware of some calling conventions used in hardware and logic discussions First most logic lines will be assigned names that enable you to discuss them Where possible the sig nature will remind you of the line s function If a logic line has one logic level high or low that causes something to happen that is the active level For example memory enable lines usually enable turn the memory for read or write when the line is at logic 0 the line is defined as active Jow A dual functi
67. Trademark TCI Dynacalc TM Computer Systems Center VisaCalc TM VisaCorp Circie No 39 64 P eoupuramar Bringing Computer Power Into FOCUS We have been upgrading our board level products If you are expanding your existing AIM SYM or KIM computer or building a system from the ground up check out these updated boards DRAM PLUS now 16 32 64 80 128 K bytes plus up to 8K static RAM or EPROM Programmer VIA s VIDEO PLUS MICRO Plus has been refined FLEXI PLUS has gone to 64K dynamic RAM DMA for the Floppy and IEEE 488 2 MHz We have been expanding the Capabilities of the FOCUS System and have added a ot of software TypePlus a complete word processing system SpellingPlus interactive spelling checker Dynacalc the latest in VisaCalcTM type Spread Sheets Accounts Receivable Accounts Payable and other business packages Mailing List with Form Letters and more Send More INFORMATION Name Company Address City State Zip MY INTEREST THE COMPUTERIST 34 Chelmsford St Chelmsford MA 01824 617 256 3649 eee eee MICRO No 58 March 196 BANNER A Display Program for the Color Computer by Bryan Christiansen If you have ever wanted to see your name in lights I Have just the program for you The routine is written for the TRS 80 Color Computer and displays large
68. W OAKLAND PARK BLVD FT LAUDERDALE FL 33311 Phone Orders 305 974 0967 TWX 510 955 9496 SEE US AT COMDEX SPRING BOOTH 3019 MICRO 95 96 knowledge of machine language Pro all done transparently No need to be aware mediately Also included is a versatile print sort routines for single dimension arrays FTTTTTTTTTITITITTIT Circle No 62 Now from the programming experts at SD S 2 diment in 90 jacebat and a 3 easy to use way of putting the POWER Sffen needed ee as well E ae and SPEED of machine language routines i inc id YOUR OWN APPLESOFT PROGRAMSE ROUTINE MACHINE does all the work foryou erie gramming whatsoever is required Simply ET choose the routine you need from an ever E growing library and Routine Machine will effortlessly put them your program and gars of or bother with BLOAD 5 HIMEM ee me Best of all with just this starter akoga you ull have the routines to put High Resolution graphics and sound in your programs using module to banish the decimal point gt G i enoed Wake 2 demons forever To round out the n xampl GOSUB we ve also included powerful search and Search 1000 Sen 4 second Sort 100 5 OUR GUARANTEE IF YOU DON T SAVE MORE THAN THE PUR g CHASE PRICE OF ROUTINE MACH
69. Z 80 CP M Ver 2 x amp Northstar also available YES Affordable 99 95 Low cost enhancement option Hi Res turtle graphics YES Floating point mathematics YES Powerful package with own manual 50 functions in all AM951 1 compatible FORTH 79 V 2 requires 48K amp 1 disk drive ENHANCEMENT PACKAGE FOR V 2 Floating point amp Hi Res turtle graphics COMBINATION PACKAGE CA res add 696 tax COD accepted MicroMotion 12077 Wilshire Blvd t 506 L A CA 90025 213 821 4340 Specify APPLE CP M or Northstar Dealer inquiries invited 99 95 49 95 139 95 Circle No 32 54 MICRO continued 466 PRINT SS NEXT 470 PRINT S VTAB 8 HTAB 5 PRINT MICRO CALC FOR APPLE 480 VTAB 16 HTAB 5 PRINT BY DALEY 490 12 HTAB 5 PRINT COPYRIGHT 1982 566 DIM 5 25 55 25 510 GOSUB 570 520 FOR I 1 TO 506 NEXT 530 INVERSE VTAB 1 535 HOME 546 FOR I 1 TO NL STEP 2 PRINT BI IF I lt gt NL THEN PRINT 542 88 1 545 NEXT 550 NORMAL 560 RETURN 576 FOR I 768 TO 862 571 READ A POKE I A NEXT 572 DATA 165 184 72 165 185 72 169 08 133 184 573 DATA 169 2 133 185 32 89 213 169 0 133 574 DATA 184 169 2 133 185 32 7 6 218 104 133 575 DATA 185 104 133 184 96 636 RETURN 640 BB ASC LEFT S 11 1 64 650 BB GOTO 670 680 690 700 716 720 736 746 750 760 770 780 gt 790 800 810 820 830 820 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 92
70. as an on off switch for the VIC s voice 1 To turn this bit on without affecting the frequency POKE 36874 PEEK 36874 OR 128 To turn the bit off POKE 36874 PEEK 36874 AND 127 No 58 March 1983 How to chart your company s fortune without spending one It s a fact A single chart or graph can tell you instantly what it takes hours to interpret from printouts or other raw data Now with the Strobe 100 Graphics Plotter and Software package you can create superb hardcopy graphics directly from your computer And you can do it for a fraction of the cost of most other systems The Strobe System transforms complex data into dynamic colorful visuals with a few simple commands from your computer Charts and transparen cies that once took hours to pro duce are plotted within minutes Information can be presented as bar charts pie charts curves or isometrics in a variety of colors And with a resolution of 500 points per inch the Strobe 100 matches or surpasses the quality of plotters costing thousands of dollars more You can also save and modify your graphics through Strobe s menu driven programs A broad selection of software including data base management compatible programs is now available When the Strobe Graphics System is interfaced to your computer an 8 1 2 x 11 inch sheet of paper can speak any one s language visually Visit your local dealer and learn how to start chart ng your for tunes tod
71. by two hex digits In this way control codes and complex escape sequences can be sent With Graftrax Plus you can print at 66 characters per eight inch line by enabling double width and compressed characters at the same time To do this type W 01 0F W sends ESC W double width mode con trol 01 turns the mode on and 0F is CTRL O enable compressed Change the lines of print per page by preceding two hex digits with a single quote mark This number is not sent to the printer but is used by the MX Driver for forms control To set the MX 80 to eight dots per line feed 99 lines per page with 93 lines of print per page enter A 08C 63 5D for Graftrax 80 or A 08 5D for Graftrax Plus With Graftrax Plus the form length has already been set to 11 inches Be careful when answering this prompt as it does no error checking Use the DELETE key to edit and type SPACE or RETURN when correct Now the MX Driver sends a form feed and resets the printer It sets up for eight lines per inch if selected and sends the requested options As characters are sent out by OUTALL they go to MXOUT This routine ignores the nulls FF and line feeds sent out by AIM s CRLF routine when in TTY mode Be sure the MX 80 is set up to do a line feed automatically with carriage return by setting switch 2 3 ON See the original MX 80 user s manual Appendix C or the Graftrax Plus manual Appendix This way the printer operates properly
72. cheracter set iIGE September Education 3012 IF KEY265 THEN 7 756 224 752 1 T 0 RETURN October Programming Techniques 2016 2 0 0 1 amp character data tape press PLAY than press REIURM 86 November Games 5020 IF PEEK K lt gt 12 THEN 5020 MICRO December New Microprocessors No 58 March 1983 MICRO 59 C 65 Another Powerful First from 055 program available to you with systems so C 65 is the first commercially available C compiler for both the Atari Apple nadire which actually 3 produces assembly language output C 65 supports a very usable subset of the extremely powedul and popular C language Just as C is used by the most sophisticated programmers from the professional and academic communities so shall C 65 prove to be a powerful and much needed tool for 6502 software developers C 65 supports INTegers and CHARacters arrays thereof and pointers thereto Naturally it also features full recursion easy assembler interface INCLUDE and a non macro version of DEFINE AUTOmatic global EXTERNal variables are also available When used with our MAC 65 assembler C 65 is a powerful and flexible tool 80 00 Strong Software Family Other major systems software products from OSS include BASIC Ac MAC 65 TINY C BUG 65 the only logical upgrade to Atari BASIC with extra features for games and business programs 80 00 the fines
73. communications and bulletin boards Next Month s Learning Center features Master for Commodore and Apple a simple guessing game for one or two players Plus Apple LETTERMASK Interfacing the Atari Joystick to the Color Computer Mutual Funds on the OSI Bond Quotations on the Apple 112 MICRO Advertser s Index ABC Data 54 Acorn Software 62 Alternative Energy 83 Animation 40 Anthro Digital 27 AppleTree 41 Ark Comp ting v breve EE Abu SS aerem 92 Armidillo 13 Artscl In o eos e SEDE ED soa AER ei Chameleon 6 Compu 13 18 26 e GompuTechi ol ees who ee ER ent d 66 The Computerist 64 Computer Case 7 Computer Mail 68 69 Computer Science 37 D amp N Micro M RUD 9 Datamost ETE 12 22 110 Digital pP 12 Execom V etnies DAE AUN CN 87 Gibson
74. cost you the time of re entering the shape To make another shape simply run the program again and save the shape under a different name Shape Definer can be used to imple ment a simple fast and effective form of animation When your shape is pro cessed there are actually seven separate versions of the shape saved These ver sions or phases as I call them corres pond to seven relative positions on the MICRO Listing 2 Graphics Sub dadd 8 3 8 6 8 9 8 812 0813 815 0817 81 81 820 0821 0822 6823 0824 0827 82 82 0830 0833 0835 0838 683 83C 083F 0842 844 0847 84 O84F 0851 0854 0856 858 085 850 86 0862 0864 867 0869 86 86D O86F 871 0874 877 87 0870 O87F 88 882 84 0887 0888 0889 88B 88D O88E 88 0891 0893 0894 896 897 898 0899 89B 089 089 89F 8A1 08A3 8 5 8 7 8 9 AD FD 8 8D F9 08 20 88 08 AE FE 08 BD do 8D 81 08 65 26 85 26 BD 00 da 8D 34 8 AD FF 08 8D 2E 08 8D 36 08 8D 3D 68 AD 00 8D FC 08 2 05 BD 0 c 8D 4B 08 E8 BD 00 c 8D 4C 08 00 8C FA 8 AE FC 08 AD 5B E C9 80 FO 36 8D FB 08 21 26 29 TF 03 8D FA 08 AD FB 08 51 26 91 26 EE 4B 8 D 03 EE 4C 08 CA 5 6 26 4C 4A 08 EE F9 08
75. enter a filename Typing the remark statements is not necessary Type all underlined spaces and characters in inverse by pressing the Atari logo key Lines 8030 and 9050 9070 must be typed exactly as printed or the program will crash You can save memory by changing frequently used constants like 0 and 1 to variables but this will make reading the code more difficult DIGI DRAFT s Design DIGI DRAFT s design begins with a simple GRAPHICS 7 drawing program then uses advanced program design for unique results The cursor has been replaced with a cursor like player You have seen players in the form of spaceships aliens or six shooting cowboys DIGI DRAFT s player is an X character that marks the pen s position This player is independent of all other graphics it is able to dance around the screen without erasing lines Points will be plotted and lines will be drawn based on the player s position on the screen Another special feature is a text plotting routine that will draw text characters in the graphics window It permits you to use all 256 characters including inverse video and control characters If a custom character set is loaded a nice way to add architectural electronic game piece or other special symbols those characters can be used in the graphics window Furthermore you can load new character sets at any time so that characters from several different sets could be used within one design The routine plots
76. graphics development program for the TRS 80C Its major function is a screen drawing program that allows simple selection of page and screen Graphic screens can be easily interfaced with machine language routines Files may be stored on tape Pluses Written in relocatable machine code Foxygraf is compatible with the RS disk system In addition memory moves and jump to machine language subroutines are allowed A HELP command displays all available options The program teaches much about the 6847 Video Display Generator VDG Minuses None noted Documentation A 56 page manual provides complete documentation of the program including major entry and patch points A discussion of the VDG is included Skill level required Beginners will have no trouble using the screen drawer but a knowledge of assembly program ming is required to get the most from the software Reviewer John Steiner Product Name Turtle Graphics Equip req d Any VIC Price 40 00 Manufacturer Human Engineered Software 71 Park Lane Brisbane CA 94005 Description An easy to learn graphics language along the lines of LOGO Pluses The easily installed cartridge offers few commands and uses letters instead of whole words Turtle Graphics is a painless way to learn to write short programs The manual covers the commands well Minuses VIC s high resolution drawing capability is totally ignored which limits resolution to 22 by 24 dots Skill leve
77. holding other listings and printouts The prob lem will be worse if in a brilliant economy move you buy a thermal printer or some other printer that uses rolled paper rather than fanfold We made this mistake when equipping one of the five Apples that our two labs use The rolled paper curls back into little scrolls which are easily mutilated and defy attempts at neat filing There s an obvious and cheap means of bringing this problem under control Three hole punch the print outs and bind them in paper or card board binders With some gentle per suasion stacking about 50 pounds of books on top of the printouts for a few days usually works even the rolled paper can be made to lay almost flat inside the binders Unfortunately there are a few difficulties in doing this for BASIC listings and printouts from programs that do not allow formatting of output The first problem occurs when you separate the pages of output fanfold paper or rip the rolled paper into pages The top halves of some lines appear on the bottom of some pages while the bottom halves are at the top of the next 24 pages After relettering these lines by hand and three hole punching the pages you ll note the next problem Some of the line numbers have been replaced by holes This won t be noticeable though because the paper or cardboard strip in the binder that presses the left edge of your output flat will hide the rest of your line numbers anyway
78. joystick paint save to tape or disk INTERFACES AND ACCESSORIES 80 Column Expander VIC 1600 Modem VIC 1650 auto answer auto dial VIC 1525 Graphic Printer VIC 1530 Datasette Recorder VIC 1541 Oisk Drive VIC Switch connect 8 64 s or Vics to printer dd IEEE Interface 5 en Programmers Reference Guide Verbatim Diskettes 10 per box Victree VIC PRODUCTS AND ACCESSORIES 8K RAM Memory Expansion Cartridge VIC 6 Slot Expander RS232 Printer interface Cassette Interface Heswriter wp cartridge Turtle Graphics cartridges Arcade Joystick Heavy duty w 2 firing buttons Great for the VIC or 64 MasterCard Visa Money Order Bank Check COD 5 accepted Add surcharge for credit cards n stock items shipped within 48 hours F 0 8 Dallas TX MICRO All products shipped with manufacturer s warranty Prices are subject to change without notice Circle No 42 71 72 The 68000 DREAM MACHINE WE SORT OF LIED Motorola has been promoting its advanced microprocessor chip as a vehicle for large complex systems exclusively Now the 68000 does work well as the heart of big complex Systems But their promotional literature implies that one can only build big complex systems with the 68000 and that is dead wrong in our opinion Nevertheless the public that s you perception of the 68000 follows Motorola s line Big systems Complex systems Our boards are
79. most applica tions Years of trouble free service Each side AC line fuse protected Tele Tale LED Pwr Panel Indicator Three separate voltage outputs Metal enclosure provides physical and EMI protection For experimental use or permanent power source Soft start feature pro tects critical circuits e Parallel operation acceptable for higher current needs Push in termin als accept wire or test lead Light weight easy to use AC line cord permanently attached Most reliable power source for a variety of uses and applications e 48 hour burn in assures MTBF of 3 years reasonably priced at 1 90 watt Full one year guarantee 2 tone ano dized e Custom volt current outputs on Special order Input surge promotion Auto egulati n 0 136 change put Ripple Noise Over Voltage rotection Reverse Polarity Protection Compact only 7 x 4 x 2 ast load transient response 5 volt adj 10 Out put 42 Watts continuous e 70 Efficiencye New Push On type terminations SCHOOLS LABS QUANTITY PRICING ON REQUEST 4 0 4 Qeecoscvoceccocccece Hee 1545 Osgood St Unit 118 No Andover MA 01845 Name Plaase print Address ORDER INFORMATION City __ 5181 output 1 Output 2 output 3 8 1 5 6 12 0 5 12 05 5V 6A 18V 0 4A 15V 0 4A 5V 6A 12V 0 5A 5V 1 Zip Order First Unit
80. moving hori zontally vertical movement does not change the phases It is important to note that the length and width of an animated shape must be entered initial ly as the length and width of the largest phase defined Using Shape Table Definer After you save all the individual Shapes on disk they must be grouped together into a shape table that allows you to reference different shapes by number much like the Applesoft shape table system When Shape Table Definer is run you first enter the number of shapes that comprise the table 16 maximum Then you are in structed how to load the shapes in one at a time The number of the shape be ing loaded appears at the top of the screen Remember to note which num ber goes with which shape When all the shapes are loaded you are instructed how to save the table This table is BLOADED when you use the routine Using the Graphics Routine The graphics routine is called easily from Applesoft BASIC Integer BASIC or assembly language The three languages have the following in com mon the X and Y coordinates for the shape represent the coordinate of the upper left hand point of the rectangular limits of your shape This might be a black dot as is the case with shape man All other points are drawn relative to this one The upper limit of the X coordinate is 255 and 191 for the Y Because the Apple actually has 280 horizontal positions there is a space on the right side o
81. not your MX 80 has this bug turn it off and back on If the paper moves it s got the bug At RESET in listing 2 the printer is reset by turning off the various modes it could be in M S B italics empha sized double strike and compressed character modes and setting up the de fault of six lines per inch 66 lines per page For those without an assembler the only references to the initilization table are in the SETMX subroutine The Offsets into the table need to be adjusted when the table is changed By changing this table the MX Driver can be used with many printers other than Epson Larry R Hollibaugh has been a computer hobbyist for the last five years learning by building up the AIM 65 into a dedicated controller development system complete with video disk and printer He is employed as a field service technician repairing coin operated amusement devices You may contact him at 1206 S E Harney St Portland OR 97202 MICRO MICRO EE Srl SENSEI CARDBOARD 6 87 95 An expansion interface for the VIC 20 Allows expansion to 40 K or accepts up to six games May be daisy chained for more versatility CARDBOARD 3 39 95 Economy expansion interface for the VIC 20 CARD CARD PRINT 79 95 Universal Centronics Parallel Printer Interface for the VIC 20 or CBM 64 Use an Epson MX 80 or OKIDATA or TANDY or just about any other CARDETTE 39 95 Use any standa
82. not complex and not necessarily big starting at Our newsletter is subtitled Journal of Simple 68000 Systems But since the public has become condi tioned to the 68000 as a vehicle for FORTRAN UNIX LISP PASCAL and SMALLTALK people naturally expect all these with our 595 starting price simple attached processor Wrong We wrote our last ad to understate the software we have available because we wanted to get rid of all those guys who want to run multi user multi tasking UNIX on their Apple 11 and two floppy disks Running UNIX using two 143K floppies is well absurd The utilities alone require more than 5 megabytes of hard disk HERE S THE TRUTH We do have some very useful 68000 utility programs One of these will provide In conjunction with a suitable BASIC com piler such as PETSPEED Pet CBM or TASC Apple II a five to twelve times speedup of your BASIC program If you have read a serious compiler review you will have learned that compilers cannot speed up floating point operations especially transcendentals Our board and the utility soft ware we provide does speed up those operations Add this line in front of an Applesoft program 5 PRINT CHR 4 BLOADUTIL4 A 8600 CALL38383 That s all it takes to link our board into Applesoft assuming you have Applesoft loaded into a 16K RAM card Now run your program as is for faster number crunching or compile it to add the benefit of faster interpreta
83. numbers must match If the volumes do not match the DOS will not boot correctly Embedded within the DOS is the value of the expected volume number If the expected value does not match the actual disk volume number the load is ignored At the end of the boot the loader transfers to an expected code entry and the system errors off I discovered two places within DOS that should be modified plus one location in the VTOC A disk ZAP routine is needed to do these modifications Three different sectors must be modified The first location is in track 0 sector 1 Sector 0 1 must be loaded and then the relative hex location EB changed to the desired volume number Note all values in this article are for DOS 3 3 Editor s note 00 may also be used as a wildcard volume since it matches any found volume Sector 0 1 is equivalent to location B7EB when the DOS is loaded into a 82 48K system This location is in the RWTS parameter list and is the volume number expected After you modify location write the sector back out to the disk The next location to be modified is sector 1 9 If this location is not modified your HELLO program will not load correctly producing a volume mismatch error No program will be loaded into memory and the cursor will come back ready to accept input Load sector 1 9 into memory and then set relative location 66 hex to the new volume number T
84. of your printer Full Byte requires Apple Il a printer and one wire modification This article is for the many Apple users who have a printer connected to their computer by an interface that sends only 7 bit ASCII codes Specifically I discuss the Epson MX 80 and the Epson Apple interface but other interfaces can be modified in a similar manner and other printers can make use of the full 8 bit code For the MX 80 use of bit 8 means block graphics and full con trol of line spacing To gain control of bit 8 which is normally held low by the interface card you must find a TTL output that can be controlled from your programs The Apple has four such outputs called annunciator outputs located at the game I O connector Two of these outputs ANO and ANI are set low on power up or reset This is just what you need since bit 8 should be low for nor mal use of the printer You must connect the annunciator output to bit 8 on the printer interface On the Epson interface card this bit is normally held low by a jumper to ground All you need to do is discon nect it from ground and connect it with a piece of wire to the annunicator out 42 put The wire can be easily routed from the interface card to the game I O socket without interferring with other peripheral cards The annunciator outputs are trolled by accessing certain locations in memory There is no actual memory at those locations but trying to
85. of Frogger MOTOR MOUSE 29 95 What a cheese ee game CRIBBAGE viC 20 14 95 C 64 17 95 This ts the game of Cribbage STAR TREK viC 20 12 95 C 64 17 95 Excellent adventure game MASTER MIND vic 20 12 95 C 64 19 95 Makes you think ROACH MOTEL 9 95 Kill the bugs YAHTZEE 1 1 12 95 14 95 HOME INVENTORY 20 YAHTZEE 2 1 TO ORDER W P O BOX 18765 WICHITA KS 67218 316 684 4660 Personal checks accepted Allow 3 weeks or C O D Add 2 00 Handling charges 2 00 VIC 20 is a registered trademark of Commodore S e S6 SES Circle No 18 iwO DPU SENSE CARDBOARD 3 An Economy Expansion Interface Motherboard For the VIC 209 Personal Computer The CARDBOARD 3 is an expansion inter face designed to allow the user to access more than one of the plug in type memory or utility cartridges now available It will accept up to 3 RAM or ROM cartridges at once For example 16k RAM 16k RAM 3k RAM 16k RAM 8k RAM Super Expander 16k RAM 8k RAM Vic Mon 16k RAM RAM Programmer s Aid High quality T R W gold plated connectors This board is fused 90 day free replacement warranty covering everything except the fuse 39 95 CARDBOARD 6 An Expansion Interface for VIC 209 Allows memory expansion up to 40K Accepts up to six games Includes a system reset button All slots are switch selectable Daisy chain several units for even mo
86. of drawing is much like the Applesoft X Draw command Call ing 2048 twice in succession with the same X and Y coordinate draws the shape first in full color and then erased to black leaving any original back ground intact An important feature of hexadecimal location 800 As one ac quainted with Murphy s Law might ex pect this is exactly where Applesoft stores its variables and source code for BASIC programs Happily this colli sion of data can be circumvented Run the program in listing 5 Move It and pointers will be set to locate Applesoft programs and variables above the hi res screen area This insures that the graphics routine hi res screen and Applesoft never meet In Applesoft Move It must always be run before loading a program writing a program a What s Where in the Apple A Complete Guide to the Apple Computer This Revised Edition of the famous a Apple Atlas provides Apple na computerists with a framework for i understanding both the overall structure of the Apple system programming techniques that exploit that knowledge For owners of the original edition MICRO is offering a companion book THE GUIDE to What s Where in the Apple for 9 95 plus 2 00 s h THE GUIDE contains all new material that explains and demonstrates how to use the Atlas and Gazetteer published in the original volume of What s Where in the Apple What s Where in the Apple contains 2
87. of the chips functions using PEEKs and POKEs with these memory locations If you look carefully at the VIC Chip por tion of this month s VIC Data Sheet page 103j you will see that controlling the chip is not as simple as POKEing a number into an address For instance 900F 36879 actually controls three different things the screen color reverse mode and the border color How do you change the screen color without affecting reverse mode or the border color One way is to know what those are supposed to be and POKE the appropriate number But you do need a way to figure out what the border color and reverse mode statuses are Each memory location is actually a byte consisting of eight bits Each one of these bits can be either on 1 or off 0 Together they make up a binary number which converts to decimal by adding in increasing powers of two 90 starting at the right end If the right hand bit is on you add in 2 to the 0 power or 1 This continues 2 4 8 16 32 64 until you reach 128 or 2 to the 7th power at the left end If there isa 1 in the binary number then add in that power of two The bits are numbered according to the power of two they represent The 16 possible screen colors for the VIC all can be represented in four bits Color 0 is represented by 0000 while color 15 is represented by 1111 To fit into bits 7 to 4 of the VIC register you must multiply the color by 16 which is the same as sticking
88. points rather than prints characters so any of four colors could be used Special effects such as 3 D shadowed text and color on color are easily implemented Atari characters are the default MICRO 57 STY D017 store text color in COLPF1 PLA TAY PLA a 8 rien mal RTI The DLI routine along with the machine language player movement and input output routines is located in program memory thereby freeing page six for screen dumps or other machine language routines Your drawings can be saved by DIGI DRAFT and reloaded at a later time The screen saving subroutine stores all graphics data and the colors from the color shadow registers into a data file The routine saves data for the graphics window directly from screen memory instead of retrieving pixel data from the screen a rather slow procedure The screen loading subroutine does just the opposite The loading subroutine beginning at line 4000 could be used with other programs to load your picture data files to a GRAPHICS 7 screen Thus your screen designs could be incorporated in a variety of program applications Just imagine an electronics program with schematic drawings selected by menu or an adventure game with code books or detailed maps Figure 1 Sample Screen from DIGI DRAFT R RECTA E AGONA M C CIRCLE ROKEM LINE az L LOAD SCREEN characters if you want custom characters you will have to create them yourself with a ch
89. prices ac cordingly So now even hackers can afford a 12 5MHz 68000 board With we remind you absolutely zero wait states Swiftus maximus Do you know of any other microprocessor based product that can do a 32 bit add in 0 48 microseconds AN EDUCATIONAL BOARD If you want to learn how to program the 68000 at the assembly language level there is no better way than to have one disk full of demonstration programs and another disk full of machine readable and user modifiable 68000 source code Those other educational boards have 4MHz clock signals even the one promoted as having a 6MHz CPU honest so we ll call them slow learners They do not come with any significant amount of demo or utility software And they com municate with the host computer via RS 232 9600 baud max That s 1K byte sec Our board communicates over a parallel port with hardware AND software handshake at 71K bytes sec We ll call those other boards handicapped learners Our board is definitely not for everyone But some people find it very very useful Which group do you fit into DIGITAL ACOUSTICS 1415 E McFadden Ste F Santa Ana CA 92705 714 835 4884 Apple Applesoft and Appie are trademarks of Appie Computer Company Pet is a trademark of Commodore Business Machines No 58 March 1983 68000 BCD and Privileged Instructions by Joe Hootman The information presented this month was compiled w
90. program and tack a machine language No 58 March 1983 program to the end of it BASIC has two memory locations that hold the address of the end of a BASIC program in memory That address is used for saving BASIC programs to tape Also when you edit anything in BASIC the address is used to find out how much memory has to be moved Since BASIC does not use the address for listing or running a program you do not have to worry about your machine language program interferring with your BASIC program While it is reading a program BASIC looks for three zeros to determine the end of program All you have to do is find out the address of the end of your BASIC program and add the length of your machine language program to it Then change the end of program memory location to the number you calculated Finally store your machine language program in memory and you have combined the two programs The machine language program moves up and down in memory with your BASIC program so you do not have to worry about changing your BASIC program Also since there is no need to reserve memory for machine language routines you are using the memory in your computer economically Accidentally clearing string space will not destroy the machine language routines There are some limitations to the technique the machine language routine has to be position independent and since the routine moves every time you change your BASIC program you may have tro
91. read or write it sets what Apple calls soft switches TTL flip flops For ANI which I used the locations are 16293 to set it high and 16294 to set it low When sending a control sequence to set the printer for a spacing of N 1 72 inch increments per line use the following code 27 POKE 16293 0 CHR POKE 16294 0 CHR 27 MO The first POKE sets bit 8 high This causes the interface to actually send CHR N 128 as required by the printer The second POKE sets bit 8 low again so the second ESC sequence is sent properly The best way to make the connec tion is by soldering a 16 pin DIP header to a 16 pin DIP socket The wire to the interface then can be soldered to the ANI connection pin 14 between the socket and the header Pin 14 is the third pin up on the left hand side of the socket when viewed from the front of the Apple This method leaves the game I O connector free for other use A simpler way and the one I used is to solder a small diameter insulated solid wire to the interface connection the non grounded side of the jumper on the Epson the left hand side when viewed component side up The other end of this wire can be plugged directly into the game I O socket You can avoid soldering by using a jumper wire with insulated miniature alligator clips Clip one end to the non grounded side of the jumper after you cut it and clip the other end to a short pie
92. record Just be sure fields are written and read in the same order This allows the record to appear larger on the screen than on disk In Bennett s program if every field were filled the record couldn t hold the resulting information This is rarely a problem because a full field normally alternates with a barely used one balancing out overall The cost of the technique is the space wasted by the carriage returns No carriage return is added to the last field because the disk already knows when the last character is reached The IEEE 488 EOI end or identify line flashes This changes the ST status variable to 64 and any cur rent INPUT finishes just as though a carriage return had been added The ad ded logic in lines 5000 and 5010 that handle this do slow the program a bit If speed is crucial add a carriage return at the end and skip the special handling We only PRINT the data to disk after the entire record has been con catenated into the single variable D Each record must be written with a single PRINT statement Otherwise each succeeding PRINT will go to the next record sequentially almost never what we have in mind Even preceeding each successive PRINT to the same record with a RECORD statement wouldn t help In that in stance each new PRINT to the record would overwrite earlier PRINT s This could be avoided only by using the byte extension to the RECORD statement for each PRINT specifying wh
93. s CSW address If accidentally you issue two CALL PRNTs in a row RESET will get you out of this infinite loop For more information on the work ings of DOS see Worth and Lechner s Beneath Apple DOS Also note that if you do not use disks this runaround through DOS is unnecessary in your program and won t work Rewrite CONDOS simply to point HOOK at the address in CSW and to point CSW at HOOK With the extra room gained in the routine you can insert a test in the initializing routine where CON DOS is to leave HOOK s print address alone if CSW is pointing to HOOK already We d love to build that test in for the DOS version as well but PRNT is one of a number of programs that we swap in and out of memory as needed all running from 300 up To fit PRNT into 300 to 3CF we had to leave out this error test Printer Idiosynchracies and Other Notes Some printers and or cards won t linefeed in response to a simple PRINT command If nothing has been printed on a line then PRINT PRINT causes nothing rather than two carriage returns on the printer The Apple Parallel I O card connected to a Centronics 737 gives us this problem We don t know whether this is a defect in the card in Apple s firmware or in the 737 Disconnecting the printer from the card for testing is an incon venience for reasons not germaine to this article The problem exhibits 28 itself in erroneous pagination of output from DOS Tool Kit s
94. size messages on the CRT screen In addition I have included some powerful machine language loading techniques that provide efficient and safe handling of machine language subroutines My program lets you input any message with capital letters and punctuation You can vary the height width and speed of the display The program prints the large letters and the background on the video monitor with any character the computer can generate in the alphanumeric mode The message scrolls from left to right just like on Wall Street The program is smooth and versatile because machine language subroutines do a lot of the work One routine fills the screen with any character another routine does the printing and scrolling Here is a brief explanation of how my program works First all the character definitions are in the form of string arrays From those strings in BASIC the program makes a table in memory which the machine language subroutine reads There is also an array that contains the information required to construct each letter The BASIC program points to the memory location of strings to be printed and the machine language subroutine takes care of the rest The BASIC program also controls the speed the size and the colors of the letters This article includes information on how you can combine the BASIC code with the machine language routines You can use this method with your own programs First the theory is to take a BASIC
95. that allows ac cess to a user defined output device AIM s output subroutine OUTALL 9 now also transfers control through this hook The 6502 5 carry flag is clear for an initialization request from WHEREO and set for character output from OUTALL If you put the address of CTOT in listing 1 in the UOUT vector you will have a basic Centronics compatible parallel interface as the User Output Device At CTOT the carry flag is first tested to see if AIM wants to initialize the port or output a character Initialization identifies itself sets up the output port with full handshaking and sends a couple of nulls to the printer to start the hand shaking sequence If the printer is off line at this point nothing more hap pens until it is put on line Output goes to CTOUTI the character from OUT ALL is already on the stack This rou tine waits if the printer is busy off line or in an error condition and sends the character when ready Listing 1 provides an alternate way to print text When you put the address of MXOT in AIM s UOUT vector you get the MX Driver a sophisticated printer driver with skip over perf a choice of six or eight lines per inch the ability to define a left margin and an easy way to select the various printer options The initialization calls from WHEREO now go to MXINIT and out put calls from OUTALL go to MXOUT MXINIT first calls the subroutine discussed earlier then re
96. the brick floors for them to fall into CC65 Video Mania Introducing your enemies EVIL EYE 39 95 WALWOKER KILLERBOX Your only defense throw your alien zapper CS1 Flags of Nations game that challenges players 10 95 to identity flags of various widely known nations of the world CS2 Flag of Nations Second Edition A tield of 10 95 34 tlags of lesser Known nations of the world CS3 Cities and States game that draws a map of 10 95 a state or states and asks players to name key cities in those states CS4 Cities of the World Deais with important 10 95 Cities of nations throughout the world CS5 Mountains and Rivers Draws large geographical 10 95 area maps You identify major mountain ranges rivers amp bodies of water NEW GAMES FOR YOUR C 64 Tank Arcade Also for VIC 20 Pre determine how many hits 13 95 it will take to wipe out your opponent Then on with the battle Battlefield changes Roadracer Choose the type of track amp a time or lap race Use 13 95 steady control at speeds of 50 to 200 miles per hour Hit the wall amp lose valuable time Shootout at the OK Galaxy Also for VIC 20 30 alien 19 95 warships have entered your war zone Shields up Energy level OK Defend yourself Galaxy Have you ever wanted to conquer the universe Send 19 95 your galactic fleets out to explore solar system by solar system From 1 to 20 players Bomber Attack Ground to air warfare You re in command 14 95 of a sup
97. the interim display you set up If there are many computations and screen commands required to complete the final screen you will probably want to supply the display list and screen so that there is an interim screen showing during the computations Remember that DMA Direct Memory Access can steal up to 30 of your processing time If you make the interim screen simple you limit the DMA substan tially One or two lines of IR mode 6 or 7 OS modes 1 and 2 instead of a full graphics or text screen will not steal many cycles from your computations There are other ways to shut off the vertical blanking You can write directly to the hardware register NMIEN at 54286 write a zero but that stops the entire routine and the clocks will also stop If you do this write a 64 to 54286 to reenable the routine Using location 66 called CRITIC does not stop the system clock What happens in the above pro cedure is that shadowing is temporarily No 58 March 1983 suspended This means that you can modify the normally shadowed hard ware registers in any way you want to get any interim effect you need then restore all of them to the values you set up for the next screen by a POKE 66 0 All of the hardware registers are up dated during a vertical blank period so the next television frame contains your new screen You do need your own dis play list and screen area because your GRAPHICS PLOT DRAWTO and PRINT statements wil
98. this series MICRO 56 53 Notice that this is in BASIC 4 ex actly the same statement we use to open a sequential file for read access The file header in the diskette directory tells DOS which type is meant Also notice the DOS error handler at the end of the line When an IF THEN state ment is evaluated as true or false it does so with simple math Truths are worth 1 and falsehoods are worth If the result of the expression following IF is non zero the part of the line following THEN is executed Other wise the program falls through to the next line instead Thus IF DS THEN has the same effect as IF DS 0 THEN and saves three spaces Since this statement is needed after nearly every disk command the savings are considerable If there were an error the routine at 1690 closes files tidies up and exits to the menu module Any cur rent changes in the key file are lost reverting to the contents it had when 58 March 1983 the current session began However nothing is lost from the relative file all changes with the possible excep tion bf the one that caused the un timely exit are preserved Adding a Record Now as promised let s tackle our primary goal writing and reading relative file data Assuming this is our first use of a newly formatted data file we need to add some information to the file In our example mail list each record is entered in two parts After making sure there is r
99. want to use it Rewind the cassette VERIFY it make sure ST 0 and you are ready to try it out Using MICRO Calc If you don t already have MICRO Calc in memory LOAD it from the tape Type RUN and press RETURN After a brief delay the screen will fill with ten yellow lines and a yellow diamond will appear in the upper left hand corner The diamond called the cursor indicates where characters you type will appear on the screen A Simple Example For this first example we want to add two numbers and print the result Our two numbers are labeled A and B and the sum defined as C Type the left hand portion of each of the following lines pressing RETURN after each The rest of the line is printed here only to help you understand what is going on 5 assign 5 to A 7 assign 7 C A B assign sum to C request value of C Now press The cursor disappears for a second the answer 12 the sum of 5 7 is printed after the C and the cursor reappears after the 5 the first line To change the value of A to equal 2 press the INST DEL key type 2 and then The new answer 9 appears after the C The formula may be changed For example to make it C A B use the CRSR down key unshifted to move the cursor to the end of the third line Remove the B by pressing INST DEL twice then type the new portion of the formula B When you press the
100. window through which the user views the information as it is entered Textual information such as headings numerical values and formulas can easily be entered into the spreadsheet 4 commodore CA WE f ai ae Am AT 64 Rae For Commodore VIC 20 For Commodore 40 columns For Commodore CBM 80 column SuperPet BUSICALC Your Computer Drone for Repetitive Calculations The outstanding advantage of using a computer is that it acts not only as a pencil and paper but as a perfect eraser and an automatic calculator The user can quickly and easily make any number of alterations to the data within the table The BUSICALC will evaluate any formula using the data that has been entered Further it retains the formulas and displays the resulting value With BUSICALC controlling the entry of data provid NE ing a comprehensive memory and performing arithmetic the preparation of a spreadsheet is faster and more accurate than if it were prepared by hand BUSICALC With the Sting Removed from the Prices BUSICALG 20 sob eee aa OSL CES only 49 00 for the VIC 20 BUSICALC 64 THE eee ae ee AE only 69 00 for the CBM 64 BUSICALC 40 only 79 00 for the original 40 column PET CBM BUSICALC 80 only 89 00 for the original 80 column CBMs and SuperPets BUSICALC AVAILABLE NOW FROM YOUR
101. 0 660 RETURN 670 680 698 700 XX 716 720 730 XX 746 XX 756 XX 766 XX 770 XX 786 XX 796 XX 800 810 XX 820 XX 830 846 XX 856 XX 866 XX 870 880 XX 890 nuk mo u m ft m m mn m m m wu m m m mu w mn w n XD C2 n3 UD DU O UO ZOAROUU WV 64 ki G D Oo b UO Uo S A T A U A HOME D CHR 4 ONERR GOTO 1000 VTAB 10 INVERSE PRINT 5 NORMAL PRINT AVE OR INVERSE PRINT L NORMAL PRINT OAD PRINT PRINT RETURN FOR CATALOG GET A PRINT IF ASC A 13 THEN PRINT D CATALOG GET A GOTO 1006 IF A S THEN GOSUB 1100 IF A L THEN GOSUB 1200 HOME 216 0 1090 32 FOR LL 1 TO NL STEP 2 GOTO 86 1100 PRINT PRINT FILENAME INPUT 1110 PRINT D OPEN A 1126 PRINT D WRITE A 1136 FOR II 1 TO 25 1140 PRINT 5 11 1150 NEXT 1160 PRINT D CLOSE RETURN 1200 PRINT PRINT FILENAME INPUT 1216 PRINT D OPEN A 1220 PRINT D READ FOR II 1 TO 25 INPUT S II NEXT PRINT D CLOSE RETURN GOSUB 60 NEXT CC 95 No 58 March 1983 The Executive Secretary Document editor Powerful printing program e Flexible database Alphabetical indexer for books and theses INTEGRATED means that ail of the above is included in the 250 suggested retail price a combination that would cost hundreds of dol lars more IF you could find a set of programs that would work tog
102. 00 MICRO instead ANDing with 15 is exactly what you want to do to preserve the border color and reverse mode status Combining this with the color calculated above involves the OR operation The OR operation also is used most often in BASIC IF THEN statements such as X lt A OR X gt 2 THEN PRINT A LETTER RETURN If either or both of the ex pressions separated by the OR is evaluated as true then the overall ex pression is also true Only if both are false is the result false PET BASIC s OR also operates on the bit level If either of the corresponding bits in the two numbers is 1 then the result will have a 1 in that position 00001011 OR 00100000 00101011 This example has successfully com bined the screen color red 2 with the existing border color cyan 3 and reverse mode condition off 1 To make sure that this works on a general example I will run through it step by step PEEK 36879 xxxxxxxx may be any number to 255 XXXXXXXX AND 15 2 0000xxxx yyyy 16 yyyy0000 yyyy any color number 0 to 15 0000 OR 0000 yyyyxxxx POKE 36879 yyyyxxxx If Y is a color number to 15 then one BASIC expression will change the screen color without disturbing the border color or the reverse mode POKE 36879 PEEK 36879 AND 15 OR 16 Frequently you want to change just one bit in a register For instance bit 7 of VIC register 36874 acts
103. 00 VIC 1112 IEEE 488 Interface 86 00 EAGLE 1600 303 CALL Into Pro Plus 219 00 1211 Super Expander 53 00 1602 1603 Power 79 00 VIC Mother Board 99 00 COMPUTERS 8001A 719 00 8031 71900 8012 549 00 PRINTERS 8023 546900 7710 7730 8239900 3510 3530 1599 00 MONITORS JB 1260 38 120 JC 1212 JC 1203 11900 514900 529900 562900 TIMEX SINCLAIR 16K Memory Module Vu Calc Check Book Manager The Organizer The Budgeter Stock Option Loan amp Mortgage Amortizer Mindware Printer 17 95 81395 14 95 13 95 1495 12 95 109 00 1 COMPUTE SHARF ee a goce bees CE 15 Printer Plotter and Cassette interface Unit CE 152 Cassette Recorder CE 155 8K Ram Expansion Module 94 00 CE 125 Printer Micro Cassette 129 00 172 00 62 00 commodore lt a vic 64 429 PROFESSIONAL SOFTWARE Word Processing for VIC 64 79 95 MONITORS PRINTERS MODEMS AMOEK SMITH CORONA HAYES Tm 222 859900 522000 300G 169 00 C ITOH TEC Smart 1200 1200 Baud 549 00 3094 179 00 Starwriter F10 40CPS 1399 00 Chronograph 199 00 3 Color 339 00 Prmtmaster F 10 55CPS 1749 00 Micromodem 100 309 00 RA Color II 699 00 Prowriter 80 Cot Parallel 499 00 Micromodem 279 00 NEC Color II
104. 00 baud switch selectable The UART is controlled parity etc by a 5 pos dip switch Complete source listing is included in the documen tation Both the character generator and the CRT pro gram are in 2716 EPROMS to allow easy modification to your needs This board uses a 6502 Microprocessor and a 6545 1 CRT controller The 6502 runs during the horz and vert blanking 459 of the time The serial input port is interrupt driven A 1500 character silo is used to store data until the 6502 can display it Features 6502 Microprocessor 2K EPROM 2716 Size 6 2 x 7 2 6545 1 CRT controller RS232 I O for direct Output for speaker bell 2716 EPROM char gen connection to computer Power 5 700Ma 2716 EPROM program or modem 12 50Ma 6116 80 columns x 25 line display 12 50Ma BAUD RATE VIDEO TERMINAL GENERATOR 82 018 110 9600 COMPOSITE VIDEO PARALLEL KEYBOARD DISPLAY CIRCUIT SPEAKER BELL OUT 5 12 12 GND RS232 JO This board is available assembled and tested or bare board with the two EPROMS and crystal Assembled and tested 82 018A 199 95 Bare board with EPROMS and crystal 82 018B 89 95 Both versions come with complete documentation JOHN BELL ENGINEERING INC ALL PRODUCTS ARE AVAILABLE FROM JOHN BELL ENGINEERING INC 1014 CENTER ST SAN CARLOS 94
105. 070 ADD SALES IN CALIFORNIA ADD 5 SHIPPING amp HANDLING 3 FOR ORDERS OVER 100 e SEND 1 00 FOR CATALOG 415 592 8411 Ael ii HOURS 9am 4pm 00 1 50 FOR C O D 249 Circle No 21 MICRO No 58 March 1983 PRINTERS _ Centronics Printer Driver for Your Microcomputer Get the most out of your Centronics compatible printer with the MX Driver assembly language program described here MX Driver requires 6502 microcomputer with one parallel port and a Centronics compatible printer The Epson MX 80 printer is touted in advertisements as the best selling printer in the world It is certainly an affordable dream come true for many computer hobbyists The MX 80 has been improved twice since its intro duction making it an even greater value These improvements come in the form of new ROM sets that plug in to the logic board inside the printer The Graftrax 80 option provides bit map graphics at up to 120 dots per inch horizontally by 72 dots per inch ver tically This option adds many fea tures including line spacing to n 216 of an inch form length to 255 lines original ROMs allow maximum form length of only 66 lines slashed zeros and an italics character set Graftrax Plus is the latest enhancement to both the MX 80 and the MX 100 Graftrax Plus has most of the features of Graftrax 80 as well as underline superscript subscript adjustable rig
106. 09 SOFTBOARD SYSTEM CP M SOFTWARE ON SS50 BUS FROM THE KEYBOARD OR PROGRAM NOW RUN WORD PRO 3 OR WORD PRO 4 FROM THE SAME MACHINE Available for either 4000 or 8000 Series ALSO For 2001 3000 Series Computers Operate these Models in a Full 8032 Like Display For Word Pro 4 and ail other 80 Column Software All installation instructions included EXECOM CORP 1901 Polaris Ave Racine WI 53404 Ph 414 632 1004 PET CBM a trademark of Commodore Business Machines trademark of Professional Software Inc Circle No 53 No 58 March 1983 RUN CP M ON YOUR SS50 COMPUTER INCLUDES CP M 2 2 WITH EDITOR ASSEMBLER DEBUGGER UTILITIES FULL SOFTWARE SUPPORT AND USER DOCUMENTATION COMPLETE CP M REFERENCE MANUALS STANDARD CP M DISK Z80A MICRO OPERATING AS A CO PROCESSOR TO YOUR 6809 ALL I O THRU SS50 SYSTEM DEVICES EASY TO INSTALL ONE YEAR WARRANTY OTHER PRODUCTS ON SS30 BOARDS ADC 1200 12 BIT ADC 16 CHANNELS 25 uSec DAC 1220 12 BIT DAC 2 CHANNELS 10 uSec GPIB 4880 IEEE 488 CONTROLLER 303 449 1711 6825 COUNTY LINE ROAD 1 LONGMONT CO 80501 Circle No 54 87 by key or by increasing record number using the alternate key Dumping a file in alphabetical order allows you to keep rarely changing lists in very neat order This is sometimes useful when using the print module as we will see next time However if you use t
107. 1 4 AND L THEN L D3 No 58 March 1983 If field number four is empty this fills it with default 3 as defined in the start up module Second if the user botches a record and wants to abort the change mode this is done by pressing SHIFT RETURN when asked to Select Field for Updating 1 to 8 The line that does this is 2680 IF FS 0 OR W9 SR THEN 2780 This line skips the update when the last character W9 equals SR preset to SHIFTED RETURN It also skips when nothing needs updating as in dicated by the flag variable FS still being equal to zero Third the mail list allows the user to make a quick easy copy of either the entire current record or just the mail label portion of it by pressing a nor mally unused key selected in the set up module Here s the line that calls for a mail label 2960 IF G 2 AND PZ lt gt N THEN GOSUB 6490 REM PRINT MAIL LABEL PET CBM SOFTWARE SELECT 4032 DISPLAY 8032 OR DISPLAY E2 has previously been set to whatever key you want to have trigger the label dump and the check of PZ makes sure you do have a printer before using it Fourth hitting RETURN alone usually returns the user to the prior menu thus giving an easy out if you wander into the wrong section of the program In addition to the delete command mentioned last time there is also a way to change a record s key field This works by deleting the recor
108. 10 PRINT 10 120 4 PRINT COLOR CODE 3 INPUT CC LO 130 IF CC LO lt gt AND CC LO lt gt 1 THEN 9d 148 VTAB HTAB 18 PRINT ROW INPUT L LO 150 IF LEN 1 10 lt gt AC THEN 144 160 IF AG 1 THEN 210 170 NEXT LO 180 HOME PRINT WILL THE SHAPE BE ANIMATED INPUT A 190 IF A N THEN SK 1 200 FOR PH 1707 210 HOME INVERSE PRINT 5 E PH NORMAL AG 6 220 FOR LO 1 TO LE IF SK 1 AND PH gt 1 THEN 24d 236 IF LO 20 THEN VTAB 23 PRINT HIT ANY KEY TO CONTINUE LIS TING GET A VTAB 21 240 PRINT LO HTAB 4 PRINT CC L0 1 10 250 NEXT LO 260 IF PH gt 1 AND SK 1 THEN 320 270 PRINT PRINT IS PHASE PH CORRECT INPUT A 280 IF A Y THEN 320 290 AG 1 PRINT LINE TO CHANGE d TO EXIT INPUT LO 300 IF LO THEN 220 316 HOME TA 2 PRINT LO CC LO L LO GOTO 110 326 INVERSE PRINT WAIT FOR CO NVERSION NORMAL 224 FOR LO 1 TO LE 340 FOR 11 TOW2 1 35d Vi 4 360 AD AD 1 370 B MID 1 10 11 7 1 7 386 FOR L2 1 TO B 390 C MID B L2 1 400 VA VAL C 410 VA VA 2 t L2 1 420 Vi Vl VA 436 NEXT L2 449 IF CC LO 1 THEN V1 V 1 128 450 IF Vl 128 THEN V1 460 POKE AD V1 670 NEXT Li L LO 00 L LO 480 IF PH 4 THEN L LO MIDS 18 10 9 LEN 18 10 8 L LO L LO 498 NEXT LO 500
109. 165 201 173 112 3 133 122 173 113 3 9868 DATA133 123 96 Listing 2 MICRO Calc Assembly Listing for VIC For Information only Don t try to type this in 0010 LET 033C 033E 0341 0343 0346 0348 0344 034c 034E 0351 0353 0355 0357 0359 035C 035F 0361 0364 0366 MICRO A5 7 8D 70 A5 7B 8D 71 9 00 85 7A A9 02 85 7B 20 79 A9 00 85 7A 9 02 85 7B 20 A5 AD 70 85 7A AD 71 85 7B 60 C9 03 DE 0945 0011 0015 TKNIZE 0016 0020 INBUFF 0030 CHRPTR 0035 TEMP 0040 0050 0060 0070 0080 0090 0100 0110 0120 0130 0140 0150 0160 0170 0180 0190 0200 0210 0220 0230 0240 0250 0260 0270 DE DE DE DE BA 08 LDA 3064 49A5 4 0 B930 0579 200 7A 20370 330 CHRPTR TEMP CHRPTR1 TEMP1 L INBUFF CHRPTR AH INBUFF XCHRPTR1 TKNIZE L INBUFF CHRPTR H INBUFF CHRPTR1 LET TEMP CHRPTR TEMP1 CHRPTR1 2 0 C8AD 3C64 A579 4 0 B4FB 2 0 C495 3C64 7A 2 amp 4 377 SAVE POINTER POINT TO INPUT BUFFER TOKENIZE STATEMENT POINT TO INPUT BUFFER VARIABLE ASSIGNMENT RESTORE POINTER No 58 March 1983 ih t a SE A n ST RB Listing 3 Revisions for Commodore 64 10 PRINT CLR POKE53281 0 GOSUB8000 9828 DATA165 122 141 112 3 165 123 141 113 3 169 0 133 122 169 2 133 123 32 121 9848 DATA165 169 0 133 122 169 2 133 12
110. 19 166 270 176 IFT DL THEN248 186 IFT THENS LL S 6050 5000 11 1 6070110 190 5 5 7 200 IFLEN S 19THEN120 210 S LL S 220 LL LL 1 IFLL NL 1THENLL 1 PRINTRB CH CD 0070110 230 PRINTRBSCR CR 0070110 240 5 120 250 PRINTRB 2 CL DI 260 S LEFT S LEN S 1 GOTO126 276 S LL S LL LL 1 IFLL THENLL NL PRINTRB CH 19 CD 0070110 280 PRINTRB CR 3 CU 6070110 2000 GOSUBA50d 2010 IFT ORT CR ORT CD OR T CU ORT ORT DL ORT CLR THENRETURN 2020 IFT gt ANDT lt 2 7 2030 IFT gt ANDT lt 2 7 2044 IFT gt ANDT lt 2070 2050 2070 2060 60702000 2070 PRINTT DI RETURN 3000 9000 FORJJ 1TONL IFRIGHT S JJ 1 6504 00703030 3010 IFLEN S JJ lt 3 3030 3020 5 22 6050 2000 3030 NEXT RETURN 4000 FORII 1TOLEN A XX ASC MID A 11 1 POKE511 II XX NEXT 4016 POKE511 II 9 SYS828 RETURN 4500 GETT IFT THENA50d 4510 RETURN 5000 PRINT CLR RVS L OFF OAD OR RVS S OFF AVE 5014 605184506 5020 IFT L THENSA 8 GOTO505d 5030 IFT S THENSA 1 GOTO5056 5040 GOTO5010 5050 INPUT 2 CD NAME NA 5060 OPEN1 1 SA NA IFSATHEN GOSUB59d GOTO5d8d 5070 GOSUB5118 5080 CLOSE1 GOSUB8 0d GOSUB8519 RETURN 5090 FORII 1TONL S S II IFS THENS 5100 A A S CR NEXT PRINT 1 A RETURN 5110
111. 3 Use with PPC 100 Special 19 95 Specify Printer Mr Lister Customer Contact Profiler amp Mailer A Super Mail List Plus more up to 1000 Entries on single 3 3 Disk only 1 Drive required 2 second access time to any name full sort capabilities Dual Index Modes supports new 9 digit Zip Easy to follow manual Not Copy Protected 4 user defined tables with 26 sort selections per table Beta tested for 6 months user defined label generation Introductory Price 135 99 00 Dealer amp Dist Inquiries Invited APPLE LINK Acommunications system for the Apple Requires Hayes Micro Modem Transmit and receive any type of file between APPLES Automatic multi file transfer real time clock indicating file transfer time Complete error check Plus conversation mode Only one package needed for full transfers Compatable with all DOS file types requires Hayes Micro Modem 59 00 THE APPLE CARD ATARI CARD Two sided 100 plastic reference card Loaded with information of interest to all Apple and Atari owners 3 98 NIBBLES AWAY II AGAIN Ahead of all others e AUTO LOAD PARAMETERS Free s the user from having to Manually Key in Param values used with the more popular software packages available for the Apple Il e EXPANDED USER MANUAL incorporates new Tutorials for all levels of expertice Beginners Flowchart for where do begin to Advanced Disk Analysis is in
112. 3 32 165 169 173 112 3 133 122 173 113 3 9868 DATA133 123 96 Listing 4 Revisions for PET BASIC 4 0 10 PRINT CLR GOSUB8000 9828 DATA165 119 141 112 3 165 120 141 113 3 169 0 133 119 169 2 133 120 32 251 9848 DATA180 169 0 133 119 169 2 133 120 32 48 185 173 112 3 133 119 173 113 3 9868 DATA133 120 96 Listing 5 Revisions for PET BASIC 2 0 10 PRINT CLR GOSUB8000 9828 DATA165 119 141 112 3 165 120 141 113 3 169 0 133 119 169 2 133 120 32 149 9848 DATA196 169 0 133 119 169 2 133 120 32 173 200 173 112 3 133 119 173 113 3 9868 DATA133 120 96 Listing 6 Revisions for PET BASIC 1 0 10 PRINT CLR GOSUB8000 9828 DATA165 201 141 112 3 165 202 141 113 3 169 10 133 201 169 0 133 202 32 141 9848 DATA196 169 10 133 201 169 0 133 202 32 157 200 173 112 3 133 201 173 115 3 9868 DATA133 202 96 Listing 7 Revisions for 40 Columns 20 CR CHR CL BL OFF CL 200 IFLEN S 37 120 7010 X IFRIGHTS S 1 2 STR SS RVS LEFT BL 34 LEN STR SS 8520 PRINT YEL S RVS LEFT BL 38 LEN S NEXT PRINT CHTCD RETURN 3 DL CHR 20 RB RVS 38 SPACES DI 1 T No 58 March 1983 Apple MICRO Calc Summary Command Characters Q Calculate Delete previous character RETURN Move to end of next line gt Move to end of last line ESC LOAD or SAVE screen amp Clear screen lines Characters Allowed A Z 0 9
113. 39 1080 40 1090 41 1100 42 1110 43 1120 B 44 1130 45 1140 46 1150 47 1160 48 1170 B 49 1180 50 1190 51 1200 52 1214 B 53 1220 54 1230 55 1248 56 1250 57 1260 58 1 5 252525252512 2157777 2525 1 5 454545452121 1 12252525257 56 1 5 26262626265 1 255 25 1 1630303303051 1 5 3131264 2425 1 5 303030303030 1 5 3 5231523 5 1 5 3 322631535 15 25252525255 1 5 454545454546 1 12252525355455 1 5 45454511189 1467777 7 28 1 2121215 212121 1 51303030303051 1 3 52283028523 1 5 53373237535 1 25244 264 2425 1 3 32262926323 1 a Fon au n he th wn m n 1276 B 59 1 2534357 575625 1280 KOLOR 201 BACK 169 SPEED 20 1 1 4 5 1290 GOSUB1300 GOTO143 1295 REM LOAD LETTER SET 1300 CLS PRINT 4 wait for a count of 57 1301 POKE1624 8 32 POKE1624 12 32 POKE1924 14 32 1302 POKE1624 26 32 POKE1624 23 32 POKE1024424 32 1303 1024 25 55 PRINT 32 C EN 68 1310 FOR A 1 57 1320 PRINT A 1336 FORD 1TOE POKEC BACK C C 1 NEXTD 1340 FOR B 1 TO 7 1350 C MID A A B 1 1360 IF C THEN CHR KOLOR ELSE CHR BACK 1376 FORG 1TOHEIGHT 1380 POKEC CHR C C 1 1396 NEXTG 1400 NEXT B 1410 FORD 1TOF POKEC BACK C C 1 NEXTD 1426 NEXT A RETURN 1425 REM MAIN LOOP 1430 POKE 3 60 POKE EN 4
114. 400 800 Tim Kilby 61 65 70 A sophisticated drawing program The Computer Revolution Reaches the Emmalyn Bentley A look at a new microcomputing learning center BANNER A Display Program for the Color Bryan Christiansen Display a variety of messages in large type on your screen Glossary of Computer Terms ARTICLES 73 77 82 85 68000 BCD and Privileged Instructions Joe Hootman Our 68000 series continues A Versatile Hi Res Graphics Routine for the APPLE Adam P King Design multicolored shapes APPLE Disk Track Copy for Non Matching Numbers Roland E Guilbault Increase your disk library s efficiency It s Relative Part 4 Using Commodore s Relative Records Jim Strasma Read and write relative disk files MICRO 5 IMDB UT PR 529 00 BOTTOM LINE STRATEGIST 279 00 C ITOH PROWRITER PARALLEL 489 00 F 1055 eise err RR 1799 00 F 10 PARALLEL SERIAL CALL GRAPPLER INTERFACE 140 50 789 00 CALIFORNIA COMPUTER SYSTEMS ASYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE 129 00 SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE 149 00 CALENDAR CLOCK 105 00 RS232 124 00 PROGRAMM
115. 451 PRESS ANYTHING TO CONTINUE 1790 IF 1790 15 1680 1800 PRINT 451 PRESS ANYTHING TO CONTINUE 1810 I 6 1F INKEY THEN1816 ELSE1776 1820 CLS PRINT COLOR AND HEIGHT 1836 PRINT PRINT INPUT A NUMBER FOR THE 1831 PRINT LETTERS AND INPUT A NUMBER FOR 1832 PRINT THE NUMBERS THE NUMBERS MUST 1833 PRINT BE BETWEEN AND 255 INPUT THE 1834 PRINT NUMBERS LIKE THIS 1835 PRINT LETTERS BACKGROUND gt ENTER gt 1840 PRINT INPUT NUMBERS KOLOR BACK 1850 IF KOLOR lt OR BACK OR KOLOR gt 255 OR BACK gt 255 THEN PRINT 352 NUMBERS MUST BE BETWEEN AND 255 01000 00701820 1860 CLS PRINT COLOR AND HEIGHT PRINT PRINT YOU WANT SINGLE OR DOUBLE HEIGHT INPUT 1 ORA lt 2 gt 1870 PRINT INPUT NUMBER HEIGHT 1880 IF HEIGHT 1 OR HEIGHT gt 2 THEN PRINT 32 NUMBER MUST BE BE 1 OR 2 FOR A 0701006 NEXT GOTO1868 1890 IF HEIGHT 1THENE 4 F 5 ELSEE 1 F 1 1900 GOSUB1340 GOTO158 1905 REM MWIDTH 1910 CLS PRINT WIDTH 1920 PRINT PRINT INPUT A NUMBER FOR THE WIDTH SUCH AS NUMBER ENTER 1930 PRINT INPUT NUMBER WIDTH 1940 00701580 1945 REM SPEED 1950 CLS PRINT SPEED 1960 PRINT PRINT INPUT SPEED THE HIGHER THE NUMBER THE SLOWER THE SPEED 1976 PRINT INPUT NUMBER SPEED 1980 0 01580 1985 REM CHANGE 55 1998 CLS PRINT CHANGE
116. 5 45 0251 FCA 06 9242 FC7 B 0255 BYT amp 2 128 342 ACTIVE LINES PER PAGE 0254 FC F 1B BYT ESC 8 38 LINES PER INCH 0285 30 9256 D2 BYT 82 128 382 ACTIVE LINES PER PAGE 9267 END Listing 2 Alternate printer Initialization table for Epson MX 80 with Graftrax 80 Replaces table at the end of listing 1 9253 eFBC 3 TABLE OF INITIALIZATION PARMS FOR GRAFTRAX 86 0254 eFCO INITS 9255 RESET ESC 3CLEAR M S B FUNCTION 9256 FCi 3D 0257 eFC2 BYT 5 75 STANDARD CHAR SET 9258 5 55 0259 4 B BYT F 3CANCEL EMPHASIZED MODE 9260 46 9261 1B BYT ESC H 3CANCEL DOUBLE STRIKE MODE 0252 FC7 48 0285 FC8 2 12 3CANCEL COMPRESSED CHAR MODE 0254 OFC 1B BYT ESC 2 36 LINES PER INCH 0285 FCA 32 0255 OFCB 1B ESC C 46 366 LINES PER PAGE 92507 OFCC 45 0268 OFCD 42 0289 FCE BE BYT 624128 362 ACTIVE LINES PER PAGE 0270 1B LPIS BYT 5 0 38 LINES PER INCH 0271 FD 39 272 FD1 B BYT ESC C 88 88 LINES PER PAGE 0275 FD2 43 0274 58 0275 FD4 D2 BYT 82 128 382 ACTIVE LINES PER PAGE you want a different interface If you have a disk or a modem etc there is even more switching and potential for mistakes In the April 1982 issue of MICRO 47 06 there is an article by Joel Swank entitled AIM Us
117. 6 APPLESOFT OUTPUT HOOK 23 LINNUM EPZ 50 WE USE THIS AS TEMP LOCATION 24 CHRGOT EPZ 87 FETCH CHARACTER AT TEXT POINTER 25 DOSCON EQU 3EA DOS CONNECT ROUTINE 26 STROUT EQU DB3A PRINT A STRING 27 CHKCOM EQU DEBE CHECK FOR COMMA AT TXTPTR 28 GETBYT EQU E6F8 GET BYTE OF DATA STORE IN X 29 LINPRT EQU ED24 PRINT A X 30 PRBL2 EQU F94A PRINT X SPACES 31 CROUT EQU FD8E PRINT A CARRIAGE RETURN 32 DOCHAR EQU FDFO ADR OF COUT1 THIS IS A DUMMY 33 ADDRESS ACTUAL OUTPUT ADR IS STORED 2 BYTES PAST 34 HOOK AT RUN TIME OVERWRITING DOCHAR ADDRESS 35 0300 49 04 36 PRNTCTRL LDA 4 5 PARAMS TO 4 COUNT THEM 0302 85 50 37 STA LINNUM IN LINNUM AS GETBYT USES ALL REGS 0304 20 B7 00 38 GETVAL JSR CHRGOT RECOVER LAST CHR IN LIST 0307 FO 10 39 BEQ NEXTPAR DO NEXT PARAMETER 0309 20 BE DE 40 JSR CHKCOM MUST BE COMMA IF NOT EOL 030C C9 2C 41 CMP NEXT CHR ALSO COMMA 030E FO 09 42 BEQ NEXTPAR YES SKIP TO NEXT PARAMETER 0310 20 F8 E6 43 JSR GETBYT NO STORE NEM VALUE IN X 0313 A4 50 44 LDY LINNUM CURRENT PARAMETER NUMBER 0315 8A 45 TKA CURRENT PARAMETER VALUE TO A 0316 99 C2 03 46 STA PAGELEN Y SAVE IT 0319 C6 50 47 NEXTPAR DEC LINNUM CYCLE TILL 5 DONE 031B 10 E7 48 BPL GETVAL 031D 49 031D 40 26 50 CONDOS LDY 26 WHAT IS OUTPUT DEVICE ADDRESS 021F B1 36 51 LDA CSWL Y CSWL SHOULD HOLD IT BUT DOESN T 0321 85 50 52 STA LINNUM POINTS TO DOS INSTEAD 26 BYTES 0323 C
118. 6000 PHI 6000 2 OBJ 800 6000 Addo 3 2 6002 8218 5 STY 18 RA 6064 B169 5 LDA 69 Y X 6006 851C 6 STA 1 SAVE LENGTH 6008 851A 7 STA 1A 6D A CB 8 INY 6 amp D B B169 9 LDA 69 Y 6D D 8568 10 STA 8 AND ADDRESS 6DOF 8 1i INY 6010 B169 12 LDA 69 Y 6012 8509 13 STA 39 AND ADDRESS L 6014 Asad 14 6 6D16 15 FIND X WHILE MOVING TO 200 6016 108 16 PERIOD LDA 8 Y 6018 92 17 CMP 2E 6D1A 0002 18 BNE MOVE 6D1C 841C 19 STY 1C 601 990002 20 MOVE STA 200 Y 6021 C8 21 INY 6D22 CA1A 22 CPY 1A 6024 9dFd 23 BCC PERIOD 6026 24 MOVED WITH PERIOD AND POINTER AT 1 6026 25 DATA AND FIND 6026 20830 26 JSR DFE3 FIND DATA ADDRESS 6029 000 27 6D2B B183 28 LDA 83 Y 6D2D 8587 29 STA 87 6D2F C8 36 INY 6030 B183 31 LDA 83 Y 6D32 8585 32 STA 85 6034 C8 33 INY 6035 B183 35 LDA 383 Y Introducing 6037 8586 35 STA 86 Graphics software developed for the professional 6039 gt id 589 is now available for your Apple Computer A G I L oxi mes a Un for your Apple allows you to create and animate 6D3F Fd 39 BEQ FOUND Hi Res images with sound and color using a 6D41 C8 4 INY joystick or a tablet with total Applesoft compatibility yi ped 2 MENU DRIVEN ERROR PROOF AND FLEXIBLE 6046 43 LDY 87 PAINT PROGRAM Draw on 2 Hi Res pages with rcd ee over 100 colors and textured brushes Add text 6DAC 38 46 SEC wit
119. 7 0 displacement 6 Contact Roland Guilbault at P O Box 427 Atkinson NH 03811 ANICRO No 58 March 198 5 AWARE ASSOCIATES LID t 2 Z tj cn Questionnaire Analysis Software Microcomputer based Avoid the expense of contract services da everything in house on your awn Apple 11 microcomputer Easy data entry Avoid time consuming keypunching Uses respondent marked cards entered with on Optical Mark Reader keyboard entry also possible Camprehensive data analysis Sort on any variable s tally all responses conduct cross tabs correlations linear regressian frequency distributions ond mare Complete editing capabilities Weight items derive camposites odd or delete items and mare Easy to use Programs are user friendly menu driven and interactive No special computer expertise is required Call or send for mare information today SCIENTIFIC SOFTWARE ASSOCIATES LTD 208 WAUSAU 550 TELEPHONE 705 85 2056 Apple 1 is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc Circle No 49 32K CMOS STATIC RAM BOARD for SYM Models MB 132 32K 299 5 16K 241 8K 197 Features 200ns Low Power CMOS STATIC RAM Extends your expansion connector MI Plug compatible with 2716 EPROMS First are jumper selectable Entire board may be bank switched 10 Glass epoxy Full solder mask Gold fingers F
120. 8 PEEK EN 60 0681 0 MICRO BASIC Listing continued 1440 IF STUFF THENSTUFF CHR 34 amp 0123456789 lt gt 7 ABCDEFGHLIKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1450 FOR A 1 TO LEN STUFF 1460 WORK MID STUFF A 1 1476 B ASC WORK 31 1480 IF B lt 10RB gt 59THENB 1 1490 FOR C 1 TO LEN B B STEP 2 1500 D VAL MID B B C 2 1516 D EN 44 16 D 1520 POKE EN INT D 256 EN 1 D INT D 256 256 1530 FOR E 1 TO WIDTH X USR NEXT E 1540 FOR F 1 TO SPEED IFINKEY THEN PLAY V3101T255AA GOTO1588ELSE NEXTF 1558 NEXT C 1560 NEXT A 1576 GOTO 1450 1575 REM MENUE 1580 CLS1 PRINT d MENUE PRINT PRINT 1596 PRINT 1 CHANGE COLOR OR HEIGHT 1600 PRINT 2 CHANGE WIDTH 1610 PRINT 3 CHANGE SPEED 1620 PRINT 5 CHANGE MESSAGE 1630 PRINT 5 RUN MESSAGE 1640 PRINT PRINT PRINT INPUT A NUMBER AND PRESS lt enter gt 1650 PRINT INPUT WHICH NUMBER D 1660 IF D lt 1 OR D gt 5 1580 1670 ON D GOTO1684 1910 1956 1990 1430 1675 REM COLOR AND HEIGHT 1680 CLS PRINT COLOR AND HEIGHT 1690 PRINT PRINT YOU KNOW THE NUMBERS YOU WANT PRESS lt N gt ENTER ELSE PRESS Y ENTER FOR HELP 1700 INPUT DO YOU NEED HELP D 1710 IF D lt gt 1820 1720 15 0 0255 1730 POKE1514 H 1748 PRINT 491 H 1750 PRINT6511 1760 I I 1 IFI gt 6THEN1800 1776 NEXTH 1780 PRINT6
121. 8 53 INY LATER FIND ADDRESS OF ADDRESS OF 0324 1 36 54 LDA CSWL Y DEVICE I E TRUE CSWL VALUE 0326 85 51 55 STA LINNUMi SAVE THIS IN LINNUM TO GET 0328 A0 00 56 THE ADDRESS ITSELF 032A B1 50 57 LDA LINNUM Y AT LAST 032C 8D 4F 03 58 STA HOOK2 AND SAVE IT HERE NOTE THE 032F C8 59 INY SELF MODIFYING CODE WE HAVE 0330 B1 50 60 LDA LINNUM Y A JSR AT HOOK1 SO THIS IS 0332 8D 50 03 61 STA HOOK3 JSR TO TRUE OUTPUT ROUTINE 0335 49 4D 62 LDA HOOK FINALLY POINT DOS CSWL ADDRESS 0337 85 36 63 STA CSWL AT THE OUTPUT INTERCEPT WHICH No 58 March 1983 EMEN PRINTERS Listing 2 0339 9 03 033B 033D 0340 0340 0343 0346 0349 034A 034D 034D 034E 0351 0354 0356 0359 0358 03 0360 0363 0365 0368 0369 036 036 036 036C 036F 0371 0374 0375 0376 0379 0379 0378 037E 0381 0383 0386 0389 038B 038B 038D 0390 0393 0395 0396 0399 039C 039E 039F 03A2 03 2 03 3 03 03 5 03 6 0348 03B0 03B3 03B5 03B8 03 03BC O3BD 03 03 03C2 03C2 03 2 0363 0364 03C5 03C6 03C7 03C8 03C9 03C9 03CC 03 03D0 No 58 March 1983 85 20 AD 8D 20 48 5 48 20 2c FO EE C9 FO AD CD 90 20 68 60 8A 48 AE FO 20 68 AA 4C A9 8D AD FO EE CD BO A9 8D AD FO 48 20 DO 68 8D 98 48 8A 48 A9 20 9 20 20 68 68 A8 4C 41 OA 01 46
122. 9 00 ZENER RAY TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSOR OUR BUILT IN ADVANCED DESIGN UNIT GIVES DRAMATIC COST SAVINGS STOPS ANNOYING DOWN TIME INSURANCE FROM VOLTAGE SPIKES GLITCHES DANGEROUS VOLTAGE SPIKES CAN JEOPARDIZE YOUR COMPUTER SYSTEMS PROTECT COMPUTER DISK DRIVE PRINTER AND MONITOR NO CUTTING WIRES WON T VOID WARRANTY JUST PLUG IN SUPERFAN II WITH ZENER RAY OTHER PRODUCTS BY ELECTRONICS INC SUPER RAM II 16k RAM CARD FOR YOUR APPLE II 2 YEAR WARRANTY 5125 GUARDIAN ANGEL an UN NTERRUPTABLE POWER SOURCE 595 12 VOLT TRANSVERTER 12 RUNS YOUR APPLE Il COMPUTER AND AND 514 DRIVE FROM YOUR CIGARETTE LIGHTER 149 Registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc DEALER INQUIRIES INVITED Circle No 13 No 58 March 1983 MICRO 17 SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS SSS SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSPSSSS SSS SS SSS SSS SSS SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSFSSSESSIESSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSDSSSSSSSS Circle No 14 2 SENSEI VIC 209 VIC 209 Personal Computer 169 95 VIC 1515 Printer 334 95 VIC 1530 Datasette 67 50 VIC 1541 Disk Drive 375 00 VIC 1010 Expansion Module 139 95 VIC 1311 Joystick 9 95 VIC 1312 Game Paddles 19 95 V1C 1600 Telephone Modem 99 95 VIC 1210 VIC 3K Memory Expander Cartridge 34 95 Plugs directly into the VIC s expansion port Expands to 8K RAM total VIC 1110 VIC 8K Memory Expander Cartridge 52 50 8K RAM expansion cartridge plugs directly into the VIC 101 VIC 16K Memory Expander Cartri
123. 9000 IF KEY 47 THEN 7 C GOSUB 910 IF 84 THEN 7 0808 1210 POKE 702 44 494 0 If 70 TNEN GOSUB 610 IF 62 THEN COSUB 710 IF KEY 74 THEN 7 C GOSUB 4010 GOSUE MENU IF KEY 44 THEN C GOSUB 1510 THEN C GOSUB 3010 G0SUB MENU RETURN REN MENU 70 POKE 752 1 62 380 C M lt CLEAR D DIAGONAL LINE T TEXT C CIRCLE EN LINE 390 N F FILL FONT L LOAD SCREEN 1 2 3 4 LINECDLOR S SAVE SC REEN 82 2 RETURN 400 REN 410 1 44 1 15 0 X1 Y1 X2 X1 Y2aY1 420 SOUND 0 X1 79 X1 2 X1 78 12 T1 39 Y1 x Y1238 22 20 10 4 430 RETURM 500 REN DIAGONAL 510 POKE 3279 01X1 X 44 Y1 Y 15 CDLOR X1 Y1 RETURN 740 REM RECTANGLE 710 COLOR Cix1 X 44 1Y12Y 15 0RAWTO X2 Y1 0RAMTO X1 Y1 DRAMTO X1 Y2 0RAMTU X2 Y2 PLOT X1 Y1 X27X1 Y2 2Y1 RETURN 800 REM 810 X12X 441Y1 Y 15 POSITION X1 Y1 POKE 745 0 18 44 0 0 S IKETURN 00 REM 918 F 0 Do you want your circle FILLED Y ND i GET 4 KEY IF KEY 89 THEN F 1 C 09 Position cursor st one point on EOGE of circle or arc and press FI 940 COSUB JOYiIF THEN 940 950 POKE 53279 01FO0R 0 1 TO 50 0 44 1 15 940 2 0 Now position the cursor at the CENTER of your circle or arc and pre FIRE 970 GOSUB JOY IF 8 1 970 980 POKE 53279 0 C1 4X 44 C2 4Y 15 1ReINT SGR AESCCI 942222683062 12421 0 5 2 C 990
124. 9000 REM FIND RECORD 2070 IF RC gt THEN GOSUB 9075 GOTO 100 REM RC 1 OR 2 NOT FOUND GOSUB 9500 REM DISPLAY HTAB 4 VTAB 5 PRINT DO Y OU WISH TO CHANGE THE STREET GET 2080 21d 16 2110 IF CH N GOTO 2140 2120 IF CH lt gt Y GOTO 2100 2130 4 VTAB 5 CALL 868 INPUT ENTER STREET SRT OLD 2135 IF SRT OLD GOTO 2136 2137 GOSUB 9500 REM REDISPLAY REC 2140 4 VTAB 5 CALL 868 PRINT DO YOU WISH TO CHAN GE THE CITY GET CH 2150 IF CH GOTO 2180 2160 IF CH lt gt Y GOTO 2140 2170 4 VTAB 5 CALL 868 INPUT ENTER CITY 0LD 2175 IF CITY OLD GOTO 2170 2177 GOSUB 9500 REM REDISPLAY REC 2180 HTAB 4 VTAB 5 PRINT DO Y OU WISH TO CHANGE THE STATE GET CH IF CH GOTO 2220 IF CH lt gt Y GOTO 2180 2194 2200 2210 4 VTAB 5 CALL 868 INPUT ENTER STATE ST OLD 2215 IF ST OLD GOTO 2214 2217 GOSUB 9500 REM REDISPLAY R ECORD 2220 4 VTAB 5 CALL 868 PRINT DO YOU WISH TO CHAN GE THE ZIP GET CH IF CH COTO 2260 IF CH lt gt Y GOTO 2226 HTAB 4 VTAB 5 CALL 868 INPUT ENTER ZIP 21 OLD IF ZIP OLD GOTO 2250 GOSUB 9500 REM REDISPLAY REC HTAB 4 VTAB 5 PRINT DO Y OU WISH TO CHANGE THE TEL GET CH IF CH N GOTO 2300 IF CH lt gt Y GOTO 2260 HTAB 4 VTAB 5 CALL 868
125. 95 f F10 1395 1500 List ARK Hires Secrets 125 00 89 95 sci j Visiplot 200 00 159 95 695 00 475 00 129 95 99 95 DATA HARDWARE List ARK j Capture 40 64 95 49 95 1 ist ARK Apple Doc 39 95 29 95 VISITERM 100 00 79 95 Applicard 6 Applewriter Z TERM PRO 149 95 109 95 i Graphics Plus 149 95 99 95 f 1 Preboot 19 00 15 00 9 0 The Dictionary 99 95 79 95 S Keyboard PI 99 95 69 EPFIV 7905 5095 DATABASE Kraft Joystick 6495 49 95 95 3 List ARK 1 2 Disk Recovery 3000 21 98 dBASE II 695 00 499 95 Plus 64 95 49 95 Dos Boss 24 00 17 95 MASTER 229 00 159 95 1 Lower Case f Dosource 39 95 2495 DB Utility 1 99 00 69 95 Plus 11 24 95 14 95 Locksmith 99 95 69 9 DB Utility 2 99 00 69 95 Micromodem li Super Disk rere j PFS 125 00 89 95 1 witerm 4090031995 1 q d VISIFILE 250 00 184 95 Microsoft prt 25 2729 f j 16KCard 99 95 79 95 EDUCATIONAL Microtek List ARK Parallel gt Pen know interface 13950 6495 f Watson PORE Your Apple 34 95 29 95 Videx Combo 425 00 250 00 WORD PRECES 2 K Mastertype 39 95 29 95 1 Speed f MAILING LISTS f 0 Sec meets hs Reading List ARK Magic Window 99 95 79 95 Courseware 99 95 79 95 Address Book 49 95 39 95 f f eid Typing Tutor 24 95 19 95 151 Class 74 95 54 95 indow 9 95 119 95 1 i x T t IF YOU DON T SEE WHAT Y
126. A 799 00 Prowriter 80 Col Serial 629 00 Micromodem H with Terms 299 00 3550 PRINTER 2099 ah i ism Prowriter 2 132 Col 799 00 PEHCON DEVE OKIDATA 5 160K Disk Drive 249 00 429 00 00 5 320K Disk Drive 299 00 NE 659 00 D Cat 2 139 00 MOEK 12 Green 79 99 84 Parallel 1049 00 212 Auto Cat 589 00 13 Color 1401 Mid Res 369 00 84 Serial 1149 00 Apple Cat II 279 00 310A Amber Monitor 179 00 9191U 13 329 00 212 Apple Cat Il 609 00 310G sene 179 00 IDs JCA sss 119 00 Amdisk 3 4 Drive 729 00 MicroPrism 649 00 Cat 103 sss 199 00 DXY Plotter 759 00 132 Fully Configured 1599 00 Cat 103 212 e scu 439 00 Color II 699 00 32900 80 Fully Configured 1399 00 SOFTWARE other contigurations ANCHOR 10 5 Easywriter Il 249 00 ZENITH STAR Mark RS 232 79 00 10 5 Easyspeller 129 00 99 00 Gemini 10 379 00 Mark il Atari 79 00 Peach Package GL AP AR 419 00 SHARP Gemini 15 489 00 Mark IIl 1 99 109 00 PROFESSIONAL Sharp 13 Color TV 275 00 DAISYWRITER ibi Fx od SOFTWARE 4 lark V OSBOHNE X Letter Quality 1049 00 PANASDNIC d Mark VI IBM PO _ 179 00 IBM PC Word Processing 31900
127. ABLE TIMER FOR APPLE 99 00 COMSHARE TARGET MARKETINC PLANNER CALC 79 00 TARGET FINANCIAL MODELING 249 00 CONTINENTAL SOFTWARE HOME ACCOUNTANT FOR APPLE 69 00 HOME ACCOUNTANT FOR IBM 129 00 DICTRONICS INC RANDOM HOUSE ELECT THESAURUS 1 29 00 PROOF READER 50 00 EAGLE MONEY DECISIONS 119 00 CALL TOLL FREE 1 800 523 9511 IN PENNSYLVANIA 1 215 868 8219 T MAKER COMPANY 249 00 VIDEX 11 119 00 VIDEX KEYBOARD ENHANCER 105 00 VIDEX VIDEOTERM FOR APPLE II 299 00 VISICORP DESKTOP PLAN APPLE Il 184 00 DESKTOP PLAN IBM 228 00 VISICALC 184 00 VISICALC ADVANCED VERSION 339 00 VISICALC BUSINESS FORECASTING 89 00 VISIFILE APPLE II IBM CALL 184 00 VISIPLOT FOR APPLE 159 00 VISITREND VISIPLOT 228 00 IBM 15 A TRADEMARK OF INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINE APPLE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE COMPUTERS INC CROSSTALK IS A TRADEMARK OF MICROSTUFF INFOSTAR IS A TRADEMARK OF MICROPRO PRICES SPECIFICATIONS AND AVAILIBILITY SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE NOT ALL PROGRAMS AVAILABLE IN ALL FORMATS PLEASE CALL FOR ADDITIONAL PRODUCT INFORMATION MICROHOUSE Box 499
128. AC 2 IF AC 1 8 THEN AC Wl 1 510 AD AD 1 POKE AD 128 520 NEXT PH 520 HOME PRINT SHAPE DEFINITI ON COMPLETED 540 PRINT PRINT COPY OVER THE FOLLOWING LINE PRINT CHA NGING XXXXX TO THE SHAPE N AME 556 PRINT PRINT BSAVE XXXXX A 2000 L LE W2 7 10 560 VTAB 5 END No 58 March 1983 Ms n Listing 4 Shape Definer Table 10 LOMEM 16384 20 HOME INVERSE PRINT SHAPE TABLE DEFINER NORMAL 30 PRINT INPUT NUMBER OF SHAPES TO ENTER INPUT NO IF NO THEN 30 35 IF NO gt 16 THEN 30 40 AD 3327 A1 3071 50 N1 N1 1 HOME INVERSE PRINT SHAPE NUMBER N1 1 NORMAL 66 PRINT PRINT COPY OVER THE FOLLOWING TWO LINES PRINT CHANGING XXXXX TO NAME OF SHAPE 70 PRINT BLOAD XXXXX 80 PRINT GOTO 100 98 VTAB 4 END 100 W2 PEEK 8192 LE PEEK 8193 CC PEEK 8194 116 FOR LO 1 TO LE W2 7 1 120 AD 1 120 AD PEEK 8194 LO 140 NEXT LO 150 1 AL 1 POKE Al w2 160 FOR LO 1 TO 7 VA LO 17 CC THEN 200 18 VA VA 4 190 IF VA gt 7 THEN VA VA 7 200 TE AD LE 2 7 9 W2 LE VA 1 VA 1 210 HB INT TE 256 220 LB TE 256 HB 230 Al 1 1 POKE AL LB 240 1 1 1 POKE AL HB 250 NEXT LO Al Al 1 POKE A1 LE 260 IF Ni lt NO THEN 50 276 HOME PRINT COPY OVER THE FOLLOWING LINE PRINT CHAN GING XXXXX TO FILE
129. AGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED THE UNITED STATES SAVE 20 Subscribe to AAICRO Use This Postage Paid Card to Order the Next 12 Issues of MICRO and SAVE 6 00 Off Newsstand Price Feast Computinc Ideas Order These Books From INICRO IAICRO Reader Service For More Information On The Advertisers In This Issue COMPUTER PRODUCTS ELECTRONICS INC P ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING COPYRIGHT O 1981 PATENTS PENDING 566 Irelan Buellton CA 93427 805 688 2047 8 00 TO 5 00 CALIFORNIA TIME SUPER FAN II FOR YOUR APPLE II COMPUTER One Year Warranty 74 95 With Zener Ray Protection 109 00 MASTERCARD VISA COOL IT ALSO FITS ON APPLE S NEW MONITOR STAND RED PILOT LIGHT ON OFF SYSTEM SWITCH CLIPS ON NO HOLES OR SCREWS REPLACEABLE SWITCH AVAILABLE IN 120V or 240V AND 50 60 HZ DURABLE MOTOR REDUCES HEAT CAUSED BY EXTRA PLUG IN CARDS TWO EXTRA SOLD WORLD WIDE UNIQUE 1 YEAR WARRANTY HO VOLTOU TERTS TAN OR BLACK COLOR QUIETEST FAN ON THE MARKET INCREASED RELIABILITY SAVES DOWN TIME AND REPAIR CHARGES LOW NOISE DUE TO DRAWING EFFECT OF AIR THROUGH YOUR COMPUTER AND SPECIAL FAN AND MOTOR DESIGN TWO EXTRA 120V OUTLETS FOR MONITOR AND ACCESSORIES TURN ON WHEN YOU TURN ON YOUR FAN NOT AVAILABLE ON 240V MODEL SUPER FAN WITH ZENER RAY OPTION 10
130. Automatic pagination and user selectable margin settings are easily programmed tasks for a computer or an jntelligent peripheral or peripheral board but are rarely included While some programs such as Apple Writer do an excellent job of formatting a page others do not Applesoft s LIST com mand for example has no provision for margin adjustment except via text window settings for the TV screen which are ignored by the printer As to the printers most rightfully expect that the computer or the interface board will tell them when to carriage return and what the margin settings should be so there is no solution at this level either Formatting your pro gram listings will have to be done by either the interface or by use of a patch to BASIC Some interface boards such as the Grappler do give the user con trol over the right and left margins of output and over the length of printed pages and the number of blank lines left between them Most don t For exam ple Grappler s closest competitor the PKASO board doesn t allow resetting of the left margin One board we ve used doesn t allow control of even the right margin except via a few DIP switch settings This is most in furiating at times where do you put marginal notes on program listings if there are no margins on the page If you have a Grappler or other board that can do all the output formatting for you read no further Your interface does everything that our pro
131. D it you must always set HIMEM If you plan to call this routine from a BASIC program you should set HIMEM and BLOAD it first then load the calling program The calling pro gram should reset the printer turn off compressed print reduce the line width back to normal and set bit 8 low after calling the routine For stand alone use 1 am including a couple of BASIC programs that allow you to EXEC SP and follow the in structions given on the screen The Listing 3 Screen Print Listing 5 Ds 10 TEXT 20 HOME REM CLEAR SCREEN PRINT 31 PRINT CHR 4 45 PRINT 49 HOME 52 IF A 2 THEN 54 55 PRINT 54 PRINT 55 PRINT SCREEN 57 IF E lt gt Y THEN 49 70 IF B lt gt Y THEN 90 90 HOME 100 IF B lt gt Y THEN 130 SET FOR 80 COL 120 PRINT 80 130 IF A lt gt 1 THEN 150 150 IF A lt gt 2 THEN 170 170 RESTORE NORMAL SETTINGS 180 END MICRO Listing 2 EXEC Flle Maker 10 DS CHARS 4 20 PRINT 30 PRINT D WRITE SP 40 PRINT HIMEM 37760 50 PRINT BLOAD SPRINT 60 PRINT RUN SCREEN PRINT 70 PRINT D CLOSE SP 80 END first program SP CREATE should be loaded and run to create an EXEC File SP SP sets HIMEM BLOADs SPRINT my name for the screen printing routine and RUNs SCREEN PRINT SCREEN PRINT takes care of screen selection displays the chosen screen allows you to print a title abov
132. Drives To accommodate the needs of those with only a single small disk drive Update begins by noting whether two drives are to be used 1070 IF PD lt gt DD then 1110 PD is the drive to use for programs and DD is the drive to use for data If these the same Mail List assumes the user has a 2031 1541 disk drive In that case the user is prompted to remove the program diskette insert a data diskette and then press a key Those with D90 series CBM hard disk drives may want to change this line to always GOTO line 1110 Those drives are big enough to hold both programs and data and there is no diskette to remove BASIC 4 for Everyone As a final note I offer an alternative for those with VICs 64s and older PETs Richvale Telecommunications 10610 Bayview Richmond Hill On tario Canada LAC 3N8 and Skyles Electric Works 231 E South Whisman Road Mountain View CA 94041 sell plug in BASIC 4 equivalents RTC sup plies them on plug in cartridges called V Link for the VIC and C64 Link for the 64 A Skyles ROM for PET is called Disk O Pro and a Skyles pro duct for VIC is called VicTree I can t imagine using my CBM 64 without my C 4 Link it certainly eases the work in adapting large pro grams such as Bennett s mail list originally written for PET BASIC 4 First reports on the Skyles products are also favorable Contributing editor Jim Strasma is assistant professor of comp
133. E Mystery House 24 95 Cranston Mannor 34 95 Frogger 34 95 Screen Writer ll 129 95 Memory Management II 49 95 PEACHTREE GL AR AP Inventory Payroll ea 400 00 ea Micro Buffer Il 299 00 SENSIBLE SOFTWARE Super Disk Copy Ill 29 95 DOS Plus 24 95 SERIUS SOFTWARE 34 95 34 95 Fly 29 95 39 95 Sneakers 29 95 Joy Port 74 95 49 95 Night of Diamonds 34 95 Star Maze 34 95 PES 125 00 PFS 95 00 PFS Graph 125 00 Data Capture4 0 64 95 Merlin Assembly Lines 119 95 64 95 ASCII Express Pro 129 95 Transend Il 149 00 Transendl 89 00 DB Master i 229 00 DB Utility Pack 99 00 STRATIGIC SIMULATION All Software 59 95 All Software 39 95 SYNERGISTIC SOFTWARE Wilderness amp Dungeon 32 50 GPEE ii e eos tene 64 95 TG Joystick 59 95 Select A Port 59 95 Wordstar VisiCalc No 58 March 1983 SPECIAL AND NEW 295 00 Hardware and Software compatible 22 50
134. ED AT FIRST LEVEL 206 REM SO INDENT TO SHOW IT 44 FOR J 17010 58 REM NESTED ANOTHER LEVEL 6 REM INDENTATION MAKES THIS CLEARER 76 NEXT J 80 REM BACK TO THE FIRST LEVEL 90 NEXT I 99 REM BACK TO OUTERMOST LEVEL 120 D 13 PRNT 768 CALL PRNT REM DEFAULTS OK 140 LIST 16 150 966 15 160 966 20 170 966 15 188 POKE 966 10 LIST 20 40 REM INDENT LIST 50 66 RUN 1 REM DOUBLESPACE BETWEEN LINES COURTESY OF APPLESOFT LIST 2 ELIMINABLE IF YOUR PRINTER REVERSE LINEFEEDS REM MORE INDENT LIST 70 80 REM DOWN A LEVEL LIST 90 99 REM END OF ACTUAL PROGRAM and sets the right margin to 80 columns and the page length to 50 lines Once you issue a CALL PRNT com mand the parameters except for page number which is updated after each page stays constant until you turn the printer off with a PR 0 command As long as the printer modem whatever is active you need never call the PRNT routine again In fact you should not call it again without first shutting it off by a PR N command where N refers to any legal output slot As explained below the system will hang if PRNT is re CALLed when it is active If you want to change the formatting para meters while printing just POKE new parameter values into the appropriate locations as specified in table 1 For example POKE 966 15 resets the left margin to 15 Changing output parameter values on the fly can be used to produce for m
135. ERE IN U S A Next Month In the interest of supporting the new operating system modes of the 1200 without abandoning the 400 and 800 I will review setting up character sets for IR modes 4 and 5 The information will be compatible with the Atari 400 and 800 If you want to implement it on the 1200 you can either do it the same way or take advantage of the OS support which will simplify your program in a few places If you have any topics that you would like discussed in this column write me at 97 Jackson Street Cam bridge MA 02140 MICRO THE ULTIMATE TERMINAL PACKAGE FOR STANDARD APPLE DOS Send ANY size or type of file TEXT even Random BINARY APPLESOFT and INTEGER with complete error checking e Extremely enhanced terminal emulation system supporting baud rates up to 9600 baud Up to 26 macro libraries MICRO each containing complete operational parameters along mms with the usual telephone numbers and macro strings AFFORDABLY PRICED AT 429 95 southwestern data systems PO Box 582M Santee California 92071 e 619 562 3221 Circle No 9 11 INICRO Short Subjects 2 Lower Case Fix for the Axiom 801P with Pascal by Louis F Sander Raising Numbers to a Power by Robert D Walker 2 Lower Case Fix for the Axiom 801P Louis F Sander 153 Mayer Dr Pittsburgh PA 15237 The Axiom 801P was one of the few printers with built in PET graphi
136. Editor Assembler in some BASIC programs that issue PRINT commands to insert line feeds and in erroneous pagination by our program For our program the solu tion is simple only one truly blank line is ever printed per page so the line count is off by only one Instead of specifying your page length less 1 for PL specify the exact page length e g 66 instead of 65 and all will work well Some interface boards do not con nect themselves i e do not result in the JSR DOSCON which stores their address in DOS until after the first PRINT command after PR N has been executed Others do connect them selves by issuing their own with or without printer specific default initialization commands If you issue a CALL PRNT right after a PR 1 and your system hangs then your printer modem or whatever is not yet con MICRO Listing 2 Print Control Demo 1 TTL VOKEY AND KANER 1982 2 2 42 PRINT CONTROL 5 6 A SUBROUTINE TO CONTROL OUTPUT TO A 7 PRINTER OR VIDEO SCREEN IN APPLESOFT 8 9 x BY 10 amp JOHN R VOKEY 11 amp 12 H CEM KANER 13 MCMASTER UNIVERSITY 14 X 15 16 17 CHARACTERS AND STANDARD ADDRESSES 18 19 ORG 300 CHANGE ONLY THIS TO RELOCATE 20 COMMA EQU 2C COMMA CHARACTER HIGH BIT OFF 21 CR EQU 8D CARRIAGE RETURN CHARACTER 22 CSWL EPZ 3
137. F Color RAM location without RAM at 400 9800 9BFF I O Block 2 9C00 9FFF I O Block 3 A000 BFFF Expansion ROM C000 DFFF BASIC ROM E000 FFFF Kernal ROM machine independent routines and vectors Table of Musical Notes Poke value Into 36874 36875 36876 or 36877 Control volume with POKE 36878 0 to 15 Expansion Cartridge Connector A B D E F H J K L M N P R 5 T U w X Y 2 123 4 5 6 7 89 1011 1213 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 ABCDEFHJKLMNPRSTUVWXYZ Cassette GND 5V CASSETTE MOTOR CASSETTE READ CASSETTE WRITE CASSETTE SWITCH INIGRO Data Sheet 14 1994S 02 21 T Q gt lt o p AAICRO User I O Game I O Port GND Pn Function 2 5V B 1 JOYO 3 RESET 2 JOY1 4 JOYO D 3 JOY2 5 JOY1 4 JOY3 6 JOY2 F 5 POT Y 7 LIGHT PEN H 6 LIGHT PEN 8 CASSETTE SWITCH J 7 45V 9 SERIAL ATN IN 8 GND 10 9V ee 9 9V M GND LN 12 83 4 BH 8 7 872 6 T 12 A BOD EFH Jk Color Codes Audio Video Pin VIDEO LOW VIDEO HIGH 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SERIAL ATN IN OUT SERIAL CLK IN OUT SERIAL DATA IN OUT RESET 6560 Video Interface Chip VIC Address Hex Decimal Bit Function 9000 36864 7 Interlace mode 1 Ooff 6 0 Screen origin horlzontal 9001 36865 Screen o
138. I boards Uses all standard IBM format CP M software Model 80 1200 2995 2 8 single sided drives 1 2 meg of storage Model 80 2400 3495 28 double sided drives 2 4 meg of storage Option 001 95 Serial printer port dip switch baud rate settings Software available in IBM single density 8 format MICRO 80 COMPUTER Microsoft Basic 80 289 Basic Compiler 329 Fortran 80 410 Cobol 80 574 Macro 80 175 Edit 80 105 MuSimp Mu Math 224 MuLisp 80 174 Digital Research PL 1 80 459 Mac 85 Sid 78 Z Sid 95 C Basic 2 110 Tex 90 DeSpool 50 Ashton Tate dBasell 595 Micropro Wordstar 299 Mail Merge 109 Spellstar 175 Super Sorti 195 Pascal Pascal MT 429 PascalZ 349 PascalM 355 Convert almost any static memory OSI machine to CP M with the D amp N 80 CPU Board Z80A CPU with 4MHz clock 2716 EPROM with monitor and bootstrap loader RS 232 serial interface for terminal communica tions or use as a serial printer interface ina VIDEO system Disk controller is an Intel 8272 chip to provide single or double densi ty disk format 243K single density or 608K double density of disk storage on a single Sided 8 drive A double sided drive pro vides 1 2 meg of storage DMA used with disk controller to unload CPU during block transfers from the disk drives Optional Centronics type parallel printer port com IO CA10X Serial Printer Port 125 Compatible with OS 65U and OS 65D soft ware
139. ID S 11 22 1 300 NEXT JJ 31 511 JJ 13 326 CALL 768 254 IF MID S II 2 1 lt gt THEN 414 366 GOSUB 646 398 SS II STR XX 466 LL II CC 32 GOSUB 60 410 NEXT II 411 LL XY CC 32 GOSUB 60 412 LL 1 06 95 GOSUB 60 426 GOTO 100 438 FOR I 1 TO 29 S S NEXT 446 SS X y 450 5 PRINT S FOR I 1 TO 10 continued 53 33 at the lowest price Call our Modem Hotline anytime 619 268 4488 for exclusive monthly specials Our free catalog contains more than 600 tantastic values ABC Data Products t formerly ABM 8868 CLAIREMONT MESA BLVD SAN DIEGO CALIFORNIA 92123 ORDERSONLY ITTTELEX INFORMATION 800 854 1555 4992217 619 268 3537 FORTH 79 Ver 2 For your APPLE II II The complete professional software system that meets ALL provisions of the FORTH 79 Standard adopted Oct 1980 Compare the many advanced features of FORTH 79 with the FORTH you are now using or plan to buy FEATURES OURS OTHERS 79 Standard system gives source portability YES Professionally written tutorial amp user manual 200 PG Screen editor with user definable controls YES Macro assembler with local labels YES Virtual memory YES Both 13 amp 16 sector format YES Multiple disk drives YES Double number Standard amp String extensions YES Upper lower case keyboard input YES LO Res graphics YES 80 column display capability YES
140. INE IN YOUR OWN PROGRAMMING TIME IN THE FIRST 30 DAYS YOU OWN IT SIMPLY RE TURN IT FOR A COMPLETE REFUND NDS QUESTIONS ASKED 5 KARRRRRRARRRRRRRARERERRRERARRKTERR AR E BOX 582 SANTEE CALIFOI MICRO No 58 March 1983 INICRO Software Catalog Name Stock Momentum Studies System Apple II Memory 48K Language BASIC assembly language Hardware Two disk drives printer 2K EPROM Description The user can chart any stock commodity or index in a variety of modes differentials momentum moving averages exponential averages percentage changes or multiple overlays It permits all parameters and time frames up to one year of daily data ad justable to user s requests Price 525 00 Includes 2K EPROM system master data two communications disks and manual Author Kenneth Troy Harrison Folan Available Troy Folan Productions Inc 29 Miller Road Wayne NJ 07470 Name C64 File and Filewriter Filereader System Commodore 64 Language BASIC Hardware Datasette recorder printer optional Description C64 FILE is a multi purpose database management system that will allow the user to construct sort maintain and print out a relatively wide range of data tvpes Filewriter Filereader 7 the user to produce data files on 72 from the information typed aii any data files stored on cassette tape Price 9 95 C64 File 6 95 plu
141. K add on memory Polaroid Rangefinder sonar sensor and pulsating light option is also available Additional options under development include a mechanical arm a voice syn thesizer and digital radio com munication between RB5Xs Price 1195 00 Special Option Package 295 00 Available RB Robot Corporation 14618 W 6th Ave Suite 201 Golden CO 80401 303 279 5525 Name ZVX4 Megabyter System Apple II Plus Hardware Apple II Plus with 48K 56K one 5 4 drive Language Apple DOS 3 3 Pascal CP M Microsoft and PCPIJ Description ZVX4 Megabyter is 8 disk controller for Ap ple that provides up to 2 2 megabytes with two double sided double density disk drives It uses IBM industry standard 3740 format to create standard 8 diskettes that are usable on other computer systems Price 445 00 Includes controller manual startup software Available Sorrento Valley Associates Inc 11722 Sorrento Valley Road San Diego CA 92121 619 452 0101 Name Rover 1 Portable Computer System Dual 8 Bit Microprocessors 6502 Family Memory 128K RAM 4K PROM built in tape drive Language 6502 Assembly BASIC and others shortly Description The Rover 1 Por table Computer a part of the Rover Computer System is suited for business applica tions home office or schools Standard full travel keyboard with ten function keys 110V or 220V RS 232 serial and parallel ports real time cl
142. MARCH 1983 Advancing Computer Knowledge Printer Feature 1 Ll THE LEADING EDGE IN PRINTERS ONE GREAT LINE ONE GREAT WARRANTY Finally there s one full family of printers that covers every business or word processing application all from C Itoh a company known for packing more product into less price and all distributed exclusively by Leading Edge a company known for searching out and providing that very thing Which means that one call to one source can get you any printer any time you need it for any purpose All backed by a full years warranty from Leading Edge Try that on any other line of printers THE PROS The Prowriters business printers and more The more is a dot matrix process with more dots It gives you denser correspondence quality copy las opposed to business quality copy which looks like a bad job of spray painting Prowriter 120 cps 80 columns dot matrix compressable to 136 10 carriage Parallel or serial interface Prowriter 2 Same as Prowriter except 15 carriage allows full 136 columns in normal print mode Parallel or serial interface THE STAR The Starwriter F 10 In short lor more precisely in a sleek 6 high 30 pound unit it gives you more of just about everything except bulk and noise than any other printer in its price range It s a 40 cps letter quality daisy wheel with a bunch of built in functions to simplify and speed up word processing It plugs into al
143. MESSAGE 2000 PRINT PRINT INPUT YOUR NEW MES SAGE SUCH AS MESSAGE lt ENTER gt 2010 PRINT LINE INPUT YOUR MESSAGE STUFF 2626 GOTO1588 67 commodore 8032 4032 enu 8096 Upgrade Kit 5369 00 Super Pet 1499 00 2091 469 00 8250 DbI Sided Disk Drive 1699 00 1039 00 749 00 09060 5 Meg Hard Disk 2399 00 D9060 7 5 Meg Hard Disk 2699 00 commodore vic 20 149 p TERMINALS 910 22s os 879 00 8050 129900 912 699 00 4040 969 00 920C 574900 8300 Letter Quality 1549 00 925C 749 00 8023 22 59900 VIC 20 Dust Cover 9 99 64K Ram 950 950 00 4022 eos s s 399 00 VIC 1530 Datassette 69 00 780 KB Disk Storage WYSE WY 100 749 00 New 2 Adds CP M amp 64K 549 00 VIC 1541 64K Disk Drive 339 00 Word Processing Ultracalc CP M COMPUTERS The Manager 209 00 VIC 1525 Graphic Printer 339 00 C Basic Software 800A 1299 00 Magis 1 CALL 1210 3K Exp 32 00 802 2649 00 Word Pro 5 Plus 319 00 1110 8K Mem Exp 53 00 Smith Corona TP 1 802H 4695 00 Word Pro 4 Plus 299 00 1111 16K Exp 94 00 Letter Quality Printer 806 4999 00 Word Pro 3 Plus _ 199 00 VIC 1011 RS232C Term Interface 43 00 2995 00 816 8999 00 The Administrator 379
144. March 1983 SAVE 20 Subscribe to Use This Postage Paid Card to Order the Next 12 Issues of MICRO and SAVE 6 00 Off Newsstand Price A Feast Of Computing Ideas Order These Books From INCRO INCRO Reader Service For More Information On The Advertisers In This Issue L Yes Enter my subscription to MICRO and send me the next 12 issues for just 24 00 save 6 00 off the newsstand price Name Address City State Zip lm paying by C1 Check o Card Signature MO O VISA Exp Date NEW for VIC 20 Users Mastering Your VIC 20 With 8 BASIC Projects A book that makes learning to program your VIC 20 fun Con tains 8 projects and programs Games utilities even a VIC 20 version of VisiCalc All 8 pro grams on cassette to help you learn faster INICRO Books NEW for OSI Users MICRO on the OSI Includes Machine Language enhancements and BASIC Aids hardware modifications for enhanced reversed video pro grams for control code and upper lower case entry A valuable programming tool MasterCard OWN O Commodore 64 Apple PET Atari 400 Atari 800 O Other o VIC 20 For Faster Service Call 1 800 345 8112 In PA 1 800 662 2444 VISA or MasterCard Only Best Sellers for APPLE Users MICRO on the APPLE Programming aids utilities gam
145. N 780 755 Z VAL MID X X 3 Y 1 1 5 S 2 IFZ 0 THEN 786 176 IF Y lt gt 1 THEN 775 765 IFZ gt 1 THEN PRINT B Z GOTO 780 770 Z 10 VAL MID X X 3 3 1 775 PRINT A Z IF Y THEN PRINT B i 780 NEXT IF S gt AND X THEN PRINT B 1 785 NEXT 796 PRINT AND RIGHTS X 2 100 795 PRINT GOTO 700 1000 DATA ZERO ONE TWO THREE FOU R FIVE SIX SEVEN EIGHT NINE TEN ELEVEN TWELVE THIRTEEN F OURTEEN FIFTEEN SIXTEEN SEVE NTEEN EIGHTEEN NINETEEN HUND RED THOUSAND TWENTY THIRTY F OURTY FIFTY SIXTY SEVENTY EI GHTY NINETY No 58 March 1983 through 36 locate the data string and save its length at 87 and its address at 85 86 Subroutine ALIGN at line 38 searches forward on the data string for its decimal point Finding none at line 44 it defaults to the right end Now that you have located the data decimal point at FOUND compute in to 1A the left starting position of the data string over the mask string How ever if you start moving the data string at the 1B left end you will miss out on a lot of other goodies Location 1A 1B set up at line 3 is the pointer to the left end position of where the data string should start Loading the Y register with the length at 87 gives you the first data character at the right end There is plenty of room in mem ory if this position should overlap the mask stri
146. NGMAN 12 75 CX4102 KINGDOM 12 75 CX4112 STATES amp CAPITALS 12 75 CX4114 EUROPEAN COUNTRIES 12 75 4109 GRAPHIT CX4121 ENERGY CZAR CX4123 SCRAM 4101 PROGRAMMING I CX4106 PROGRAMMING II CX4117 PROGRAMMING III SPEED READING CXL4007 MUSIC COMPOSER CXL4002 ATARI BASIC CX8126 MICROSOFT CXL4003 ASSEMBLER CX8126 MACRO ASSEMBLER CXL4018 PILOT HOME CX405 PILOT EDUCATOR CX415 HOME FILING TOLL FREE 800 233 8760 In 1 717 398 4079 810 DISK DRIVE 419 NEC8023 PRINTER 449 PERCOM AT 88DISK 395 NEW RELEASES ATARI 1200 COMPUTER THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE EASTERN FRONT 1941 OUTLAW HOWITZER STAR WARRIOR CRUSH CRUMBLE amp CHOMP SHOOTING GALLERY VIDEO MATH FLASH MY FIRST ALPHABET TEMPLE of ASPHAI UPPER REACHES of ASPHAI TRACK ATTACK STAR BLAZER LABYRINTH SEA FOX POOL 1 5 SPEEDWAY BLAST ROM INHOME 400 KEY BOARD PROTECTOR NAUTILUS SUBMARINE COMMANDER ROM JUMBO JET PILOT ROM SOCCER ROM KICKBACK football ROM In Stock items shipped within 24 hours of order Personal tn PA 1 717 398 4079 checks require four weeks clearance before shipping No deposit for COD orders PA residents add sales tax All products subject to availability and price change Advertised prices show 4 discount offered for cash Add 4 for Mastercard and Visa ATARI Warner Communications Compeny PRINTERS PROWRITER i PROWRITER II OKIDATA 82A
147. NT 4 CLOSE4 1 128 MICRO TRUTH TABLE A rire TAXI Figure 1 know your 2 00 was well spent and that your little printer has a new lease on life Raising Numbers to a Power with Pascal Robert D Walker 2850 Delk Rd Apt 2B Marietta GA 30067 first introduction to Pascal was on the Apple computer about two years ago Prior to this I had done most of my programming in BASIC After becoming familiar with Pascal however I have rarely used any other language Among other things Pascal makes it easy to logically structure programs and keep track of variables One shortcoming however had me wondering whether this language was suitable for scientific purposes there was no direct way to evaluate a number raised a power But after remembering some simple laws of logarithms I found the answer Pascal contains the function EXP Z which raises the base ap proximately 2 718 of the natural system of logarithms to the Z power Using the following logic you can develop a formula that uses the EXP Z No 58 March 1983 Short Subjects continued function to evaluate Y raised to the X power The initial expression is Using laws of logarithms yields z Substituting for z the initial equa tion yields eny EXP X LN Y This formula can be used in a Pascal function to directly evaluate Y raised to the X power see listing Although this solutio
148. NT CN 18 C gt STHENPRINT CHR C1 77 60701200 1190 PRINT 1 CHRS 123 1202 NEXTCN PRINT L 1210 FORNN STO45STEP10 FS STR NN 15 PRINT amp 1 CHR CI162 M IDSCF 2 25 1220 MV XS CNN40 5 RXTKG CO SKXITHENXVzB 1230 Ef STRSCXV gt LeLENCES IFL gt 1 THENL 18 1240 FORN2BTOINT S LZ 2 PRINT amp 1 NEXTN 1250 PRINTK1 ES NEXTNN PRINTR PRINT 1260 PRINT amp 1 CHR C14 LeLENCT 24 40 1270 FORN 1TOINT 23 L72 PRINT 1 NEXTN 1280 PRINTK Tf CHR CIS PRINTE1 PRINTS CLOSE1 1298 RETURN Listing 2 99 REM A SAMPLE CURVE GENERATING PROGRAM 100 DIM A 300 110 XS 0 3 952 0 249 V1 002 XIu 1 120 DEF FRYODSSINOOZ0C01 130 T s V 140 DOSUB18GQ END Listing 3 99 REM SAMPLE PDINT PLOTTING PROGRAM 100 DIM AXC320 VAC3B8 110 5 1 1 120 VR 8 90 FORCN T0299 IFON 100W INTCCH 100 gt 5BTHENIN 6 0070125 123 IN 6 1125 VACCN L gt VACCH IN NEXTCN 139 T TRIANGULAR WAVE 148 QOSUB1088 END 1190 RB RV VACCND iFRSCBTHENI128 MICRO No 58 March 1983 PRINTERS 1281 Line 1050 determines if it s time to place a label on the vertical axis If it is then lines 1060 to 1080 calculate its value strain out zero residuals such as 1 729358E 26 and right justify the resulting string into position Enough room is reserved so that any legal string
149. NTAL Home Accnt Apple Franklin Home Accountant IBM 1st Class Mail Apple Franklin 59 00 119 00 59 00 BIRIUS Free Fall Beer Run Snake Byte Space Eggs Sneakers 24 00 Bandits 28 00 BROOERBOUNO 24 00 24 00 24 00 24 00 Apple Panic 23 00 27 00 25 00 34 00 27 00 27 00 David s Magic Star Blazer Arcade Machine Choplitter Serpentine INFOCOM Deadline Star Zork l Zork IV or ii 35 00 29 00 29 00 29 00 MPC Bubdisk 128K Ram AXLON Apple Franklin 128K Ram 399 00 Apple Franklin Ram Disk 999 00 VU MAX 80 Column 719 00 159 00 DISK DRIVES FOR ATARI AT 88 S1 88 At RFD 40 51 RFD 40 41 RFD 40 S2 RFD 44 51 RFD 44 52 399 00 289 00 539 00 329 00 869 00 659 00 999 00 RANA DISK DRIVES Call for price and availability on the new Rana Disk Drives for The Apple and Franklin Computer Systems HA SCI MICRO SCI DISK DRIVES FOR APPLE amp FRANKLIN A2 gut aedeagal 40 PERS 2 349 00 A70 T eens 459 00 C2 Controller 79 00 C47 Controller 89 00 FLOPPY DISKS MAXELL MD Box of 10 m MD II Box of 10 FO 87 FD 1 8 0 VERBATUM 5 SS DD 5 DS DD ELEPHANT 5 SS SO HEWLETT PACKARD CA
150. NTER margin 9225 F7C D 16 BNE BRANCH acwave PER PAGE 9226 F7E 26 SNDBYT Now you have two ways to send 0257 4c 8E oF OT SMP Esch ISEND TE PRINTER characters to your printer If the pro 2228 49 ESCSEQ PHA SEND AS ESCAPE SEQUENCE gram sending the characters to the Ac 0230 20 50 298 CTOUT 3SEND ESCAPE FIRST tive Output Device is doing all of its 232 F B ec JSR 3AND NOW CHARACTER i 0254 F 10 Ci BPL NXTOPT g own and control or sending 025 eru 19 Brg LOOP grap or other non ASCH you can 9236 GF92 PMSG DISPLAY MESSAGE FROM LITERAL TABLE VIA Y use the bare bones Centronics inter 0237 F92 9 9E F PMSG LDA LITS Y CHAR face Every character sent out this way CUNTUR Me S SULT DN ZERO direc t the ri t 4252 6857 E 7A ED Jan OUTPUT SEND IT goes y printer 0241 00 FS BNE PMSG NEXT CHAR To print ASCII text that knows 9242 66 POUN RTS nothing of the special requirements and B243 LITERAL TABLE capabilities of the printer you can use 6244 1 ee T ENTRET the MX Driver to handle the basic for 9545 FAO 22 ae 9247 260 4 LPIMSG LPI 9 matting Unfortunately this involves 9248 BFAD 00 difying the UOUT vector every time 252 20 40 Prete BU MARGINE Iocnymg Ty 8221 VFB 20 OPTMSG BYT 5 Perry
151. OA 00 00 50 45 00 37 EA c3 C8 8E A2 FO 69 03 8 1 C5 8 C6 03 A 68 c9 3A C4 Ch 00 24 65 4 20 STARTS AT HOOK BELOW SO WE CAN FORMAT OUTPUT BEFORE SENDING IT FEED INTERCEPT ADDRESS TO DOS GET STEP OVER SO PAGES WILL ALWAYS START HERE CLEAR AND TAB DUMMY CHARACTER PRINT PAGE AND GOODBYE SAVE CHARACTER TO GO PRINT IT REM DOCHAR IS DUMMY THIS TESTS IF CTRL CHAR IN IF SO DON T INCREMENT CURPOS NOT CTRL CHR PRINT MOVES CURSOR GOT A CARRIAGE RETURN YES ADJUST AND TAB NOT CR CHECK RIGHT MARGIN PAST RIGHT MARGIN NO EXIT DO CARRIAGE RETURN THEN EXIT RECOVER OUTPUT CHARACTER RETURN TO CALLER SAVE X ON THE STACK GET LEFT MARGIN INDENTATION IF NO NEED TO TAB PRINT X BLANKS RECOVER X AND EXIT COME HERE AFTER CARR RETURN CLEAR CURSOR POSITION RECOVER PAGE LENGTH INFINITE PAGE LENGTH ADVANCE LINE COUNT PAGELEN gt LINECOUNT IF YES DO TAB AND DONE SKIP LINES TO GET TO NEXT PAGE CLEAR LINE COUNTER GET STEPOVER NO STEPOVER NO HEADING SAVE STEP CARRIAGE RETURN DO STEP TIMES RECOVER STEPOVER AND RESTORE IT SAVE THE REGISTERS ON THE STACK ALREADY THERE SO NO NEED TO RESAVE IT GET LBYTE OF TITLE GOT HIGH BYTE PRINT THE TI
152. OU NEED GIVE n US A CALL AND WE LL TRY TO GET IT FOR YOU n We accept VISA MASTERCARD Personal checks allow 10 days to clear or COD 2 00 charge Please include 396 for shipping 2 00 min or 596 for blue labei 3 00 Calif residents add 6 sales tax All items are new and carry manufacturers warranty Prices and availability are subject to change without notice CALL FOR FREE CATALOG 714 735 2250 i 1 i 1 Circle No 2 MEGAFLEX ABILITY You Pick The Disk System MegaFlex Controls It WITH SOFTDRIVERS FOR A FLEXIBLE FUTURE MEGAFLEX a universal floppy disk controller and modern alternative to the Apple drive system offering increased storage im proved reliability FLEXIBILITY Enjoy megabytes of online storage with your choice of micro mini or maxi drives or even 6Mb With the Amlyn cartridge pack Ideal for high capacity storage now winchester disk backup later The MEGAFLEX secret is to autoboot soft drivers that match the needs of your drive system All hardware functions are software controlled MEGAFLEX can match new drive capabilities with out hardware changes Drive dependent ROMs have been eliminated APPLE OF COURSE MEGAFLEX is compatible with BASIC CP M Pascal VISICALC SOS and DOS emulation on the Apple Apple Il Franklin Ace and Basis All lan guage features and operating system commands
153. R Get backgroung color 3037 C6 1F LDB LNLNTH Get screen line 3639 8E 6406 LOOP1 LDX SCRSTR Get screen add Clear left hand edge 3C3C A7 80 STA X Clear one loc on left ed 3C3E 3A ABX Line increment X 3C3F 8C 0600 CMPX SCREND Done 3C42 2D F5 BLT LOOP1 No continue Move screen beck 1 address 3044 BE 00400 LDX SCRSTR Get screen add 3C47 6 01 LOOP2 IDA 1 Load char and 3C49 7 80 STA X Move it back one 3C4B 8C 0600 CMPX SCREND Done 3C4E 2D F7 BLT LOOP2 No continue Print right hand edge 3056 8E O41 F LDX SCRSTR 1F Get upper right corner 3C53 3033 STRING Get addr of string to be printed 3056 A6 LOOP3 LDA U Load char and 3058 7 80 STA X Print it 3 5 3A ABX Increment X to next line 3C5B 866 0600 CMPX SCREND 3 5 2D F6 BLT LOOP3 No continue End 3C66 39 RIS Clear entire screen CLS 3C61 86 86 START2 LDA COLOR Get background color 3C63 0400 LDX SCRSTR Get screen add 3C66 A7 860 LOOP4 STA Clear one location 3C68 sc 0600 CMPX SCREND Done 3C6B 2D F9 BLT LOOP4 No continue END 3 6 39 RTS No 58 March 19 BASIC Listing 1 REM BANNER BY 2 REM BRYAN CHRISTIANEN 3 REM 314 N 25 AVE 4 REM FARGO ND 58102 5 REM COPYWRITE 11 11 82 10 CLS PRINT 2 32 7 banner by bryan christiansen POKE1024 8 32 7 32 POKE1024 11 32 7 32 0 1024 17 32 7 32 20 CLEAR256 STUFF BANNER BY B
154. REM 4000 PRINT CD 4001 PRINT CD READ LINK FILE R 4610 INPUT FIC INPUT NA 4020 PRINT CD 4430 RETURN 2040 REM JO0034 0 0000000 H BHOOHO 4500 REM 4510 REM WRITE HEADER 4515 REM 4517 PRINT CD 4526 PRINT CD WRITE LINK FILE R 4530 PRINT FIC PRINT NA 4540 PRINT CD 4550 RETURN 4560 REM FAE HAEE FERAE AEAEE EE E 4999 REM 5000 REM READ DATA REC 5001 REM 5065 PRINT CD 5010 PRINT CD READ LINK FILE R R 5020 INPUT FIRST OLD 5638 INPUT LAST OLD 5046 INPUT SRT OLD INPUT CITY OLD INPUT ST OLD INPUT ZIP OLD INPUT TEL OLD INPUT NXT OLD PRINT CD RETURN REM REM REM INPUTS 5050 5060 5076 5080 5090 5100 5118 5120 5997 5998 5999 6000 6010 6015 6024 6030 6035 6044 6050 6060 6070 6999 7000 7001 7005 7010 7020 7030 7440 7050 7060 7070 7480 7090 7100 7110 7120 7200 8000 8010 8020 8030 8044 8050 8060 8070 8080 8090 8100 9000 9001 9002 9010 9015 9020 9030 9035 9040 9050 9060 9075 9500 9501 9502 9505 9510 9520 9530 9540 9550 9560 9570 9580 REM 4 VTAB 4 INPUT INPU T FIRST NAME FIRST NW HTAB 4 VTAB 5 INPUT INPU T LAST NAME LAST NW IF A lt gt A GOTO 6060 REM ONLY NEED FIRST AND LAST NAME HTAB 4 VTAB 6 INPUT INPU T STREET 5 SRTS NW HTAB 4 7 INPUT INPU CITY CITYS NW HTAB 4 VTAB 8 INPUT INPU T STATE 5S S
155. RF AIM SUBROUTINES AND MONITOR RAM OUTPUT 97 gt TO D REDOUT 975 READ KBD WITH ECHO RDRUB E9SF 3READ KBD WITH DELETE ALLOWED CRLOW 15 3CR LF TO ADDIN EAAE FOUR DIGIT NUMBER PACK 4 sPACK ASCII CHAR INTO HEX BYTE AD A41C 3 ADDIN RESULT DR CURPO2 A415 DISPLAY CURSOR DIBUFF 4438 3DISPLAY BUFFER 5 AIM USER VIA ADDRESSES UDRB 4600 sDATA REGISTER B UDDRB 2 DIRECTION REGISTER B UPCR z 488C PERIPHERAL CONTROL REGISTER UIFR AGOD 3 INTERUPT FLAG REGISTER UIER AGGE 3 INTERUPT ENABLE REGISTER 3 EQUATES CR D LF A VTAB B FFEED ESC 1B 3 PROGRAM VARIABLES MUST BE RAM LINCNT 1 LINE COUNT MRGFLG 1 MAR IN FLAG SET MARGIN LINES ON PAGE 6 MARGIN WI WIDTH IN BCD TEMPORARY STORAGE LINMAX 1 MARGIN 1 1 3 ACCESS TO BASIC CENTRONICS PARALLEL INTERFACE 4 THROUGH THE AIM USER QUTPUT VECTOR cTOT BCS CTOUT1 LDY CNTMSG LITS 5 BRANCH ON CHARACTER OUTPUT JSR 3 IDENTIFY SELF INC MRGFLG DO NEXT FFEED THRU MXOUT 3 CTINIT INITIALIZE PARALLEL PORT CTINIT LDA FF STA UDDRB SALL BITS OUTPUT LDA 18 STA UIER SDISABLE INTERUPTS JUST IN CASE LDA UPCR AND F 3SET CB1 TO NEGATIVE EDGE DETECT ORA 0 3SET CB2 TO AUTO PULSE MODE STA UPCR LDA 4e 3SEND NULL TO GET THINGS STARTED STA UDRB Jee 3SEND ANOTHER TO BE SURE ENTRY TO USE THE MX DRIVER THROUGH THE 5 AIM USER QUTPUT
156. RYAN CHRISTIANSEN PRESS THE SPACE BAR TO ENTER PROGRAM 30 EN 15411 34 REM MACHINE LANGUAGE 35 REM SCROLLER 40 FORA T044 READB POKE EN 2 A B NEXTA 50 DATA13 128 198 31 142 4 0 167 128 58 140 6 32 37 248 60 DATA142 4 0 166 136 1 167 128 140 6 0 45 246 70 DATA142 4 31 254 60 50 166 192 167 128 58 140 6 0 45 246 57 74 REM CLEAR SCREEN WITH 75 CHR 80 FORA GTO12 READB POKE EN 47 A B NEXT 96 134 128 142 4 0 167 128 140 6 0 37 249 57 100 POKE 34 256 EN 35 EN INT EN 256 256 DEFUSRO EN 2 DEFUSR1 EN 47 105 REM LETER PARTS 110 DIMA 57 B 59 120 A 1 n 130 2 140 A 3 90 150 A 4 160 5 170 A 6 66 6 180 7 190 A 8 8 200 9 210 14 8 668 220 A 11 8 80 238 A 12 66066 240 13 88 6 250 A 14 8 8 e 260 A 15 8 270 A 16 6 280 A 17 6 290 A 18 300 A 19 310 A 20 8 320 4 21 8 330 22 340 23 eee 350 A 24 360 25 amp 376 26 380 4 27 866 390 A 28 686 460 A 29 eea 416 30 420 A 31 430 4 02 8 440 4 33 8 8 450 A 34 8 60 466 A 35 8 686 470 4 36 48 37 68 490 A 38 8 6 500 4 39 amp 514 4 520 a 41
157. SG REQUEST OPTIONS LDA CURPO2 876 TEMP ISAVE STARTING BUFFER POS 1 JSR RDRUB 3 INPUT CHARACTERS a 3UNTIL SPACE BEQ OPTIN CMP 30R RETURN OPTIN INY 3 CHARACTER OPT1 TYA ELE ADC TEMP 3CALC TRUE BUFFER INDEX 50 3PAST END OF DIBUFF BCC OPTOK LDA 59 3STOP HERE TAY LDA 9 STA DIBUFF Y 3MARK END RTS SETMX RESET Mx89 AND SET LINES PER INCH SETMX PHA 3SAVE REQUESTED LPI LDA FFEED JSR MXOUT1 380 TO TOP OF FORM LDX RESET INITS JSR mxiLUP 3NOW RESET PRINTER CMP 787 78 LPI REQUESTED BNE MXDUN 3NO LDX LPI8 INITS SET LPI 92 LPP MXILUP SEND INIT PARMS TO PRINTER VIA X MXILUP LDA INITS NEXT PARM BMT SeTLPP 35QUIT ON MINUS JSR CTOUT 35END TO PRINTER BNE MXILUP BRANCH ALWAYS SETLPP AND 7F 3STRIP MSB STA LINMAX LINES OF PRINT PER PAGE MICRO comes into play You can select any of the escape sequences and control codes recognized by the printer and change the number of lines of print per page To select an escape sequence enter the ASCII character that follows the escape Refer to the printer manual for the pro per codes For example the combina tion of emphasized and double strike print modes produces a high quality print On the Epson ESC E enables em phasized and ESC G enables double strike so typing EG followed by SPACE or RETURN sets these modes Absolute hex numbers can also be sent by typing a dollar sign followed
158. SK SW Disk Switch 29 Extends life of drive and media Shuts off minifloppy spindle motor when system is not accessing the drive Complete KIT and manual D amp N Micro Products Inc 3684 N Wells St Fort Wayne Ind 46808 amm 219 485 6414 VISA MasterCard DU TERMS 2 50 shipping Forelgn orders add 15 Indiana residents add 4 sales tax MICRO D amp N 80 CPU BOARD OTHER OSI COMPATIBLE HARDWARE Disk Drives and Cables 8 Shugart SA801 single sided 395 8 Shugart SA851 double sided 585 FLC 66ft cable from D amp Nor OSI 69 controller to 8 disk drive 51 4 MPI B51 with cable power 450 supply and cabinet FLC 51 48ft cableforconnection 75 to 5 1 4 drive and D amp N or OS controller with data separator and disk switch Okldata Microline Printers ML 82A Dot Matrix Printer 534 120 CPS 80 120 columns 9 5 paper width friction or pin feed ML 83A Same as 82A except 895 16 paper width 132 232 columns with tractor feed ML84Same 32 except 200 1152 16 paper width 132 232 columns 2K buf fer dot addressable graphics with tractor feed Circle No 7 INICRO From Here To Atari By Paul S Swanson The recently announced Atari 1200 computer should be available soon at a suggested retail price of 899 00 The significant differences between it and the 400 and 800 computers include 64K memory more function keys and changes in the operating system
159. TLE GET PAGE NUMBER AND ADVANCE IT FOR NEXT TIME HIGH BYTE OF PAGE SO MAX255 PRINT IT CARRIAGE RETURN RECOVER REGISTERS RESTORE X RESTORED Y EXIT WITH CARRIAGE RETURN 66 LINES PER PAGE 1 LINES BETWEEN PAGES START AT PAGE 1 RIGHT MARGIN 70 LEFT MARGIN 10 RT EDGE OF SCREEN OR PRINTER NO LINES YET PRINTED USUAL FOR APPLESOFT STRINGS TERMINATE BYTE FOR TITLE Continued 64 LDA HOOK 65 STA CSWLL 03 66 JSR DOSCON 03 68 INIT LDA STEP 03 69 STA LINCOUNT FD 70 JSR CROUT 71 03 72 JMP TITLEOUT 73 74 HOOK PHA FD 75 JSR DOCHAR 03 76 BIT RTS1 77 BEQ PRINT 03 78 INC CURPOS 79 PRINTI CMP CR 80 BEQ PAGETEST 03 81 MARGINTE LDA CURPOS 03 82 CMP RIGHT 83 BCC OUT1 FD 84 OUT2 JSR CROUT 85 OUTL PLA 86 51 RTS 87 88 TAB 89 03 90 LDX LEFT 91 BEQ DONETAB F9 92 JSR PRBL2 93 DONETAB PLA 94 TAX 03 95 JMP OUTL 96 97 PAGETEST LDA 0 03 98 STA CURPOS 03 99 LDA PAGELEN 100 BEQ TAB 03 101 INC LINCOUNT 03 102 CMP LINCOUNT 103 BCS TAB 104 105 STEPOVER LDA 03 106 STA LINCOUNT 03 107 LDA STEP 108 BEQ TITLEOUT 109 PHA FD 110 STEPLOOP JSR CROUT 03 111 DEC STEP 112 BNE STEPLOOP 113 PLA 03 114 STA STEP 115 116 TITLEOUT TYA 117 PHA 118 119 120 LDA TITLE 121 TITLE DB 122 JSR STROUT 03 123 LDX PAGENUM 03 124 INC PAGENUM 125 LDA ED 126 JSR LINPRT FD 127 JSR CROUT 128 PLA 129 TAX 130 PLA 131 TAY 03
160. TS NW HTAB 4 VTAB 9 INPUT INPU T ZIP 21 HTAB 4 VTAB 10 INPUT INP UT TELEPHONE TELS NW RETURN REM REM REM WRITE DATA REC REM PRINT CD PRINT CD WRITE LINK FILE R PRINT FIRST WR PRINT LAST WR PRINT SRT WR PRINT CITY WR PRINT ST WR PRINT ZIP WR PRINT TEL WR PRINT NXT WR PRINT CD REM 33x MOVE DATA FIRST T FIRST F LAST T LAST F SRT T SRT F CITY T CITY F ST T ST F ZIP T TEL T TEL NXT T NXT F RETURN REM REM REM XXx FIND RECORD 3Xxxxx REM R FIC REM START AT BEGINN ING OF FILE RC REM RESET RETURN CODE GOSUB 5000 IF FIRST NW LAST NW FIRST OLD LAST OLD THEN RETURN REM RECORD FOUND IF LAST NW FIRST NW lt LAST OLD FIRST OLD THEN RC 2 RETURN LR R R NXT OLD REM REM ADVANCE TO NEXT RECORD IF R THEN RC 1 RETURN GOTO 9020 REM GET NEXT REC ORD HOME HTAB 4 VTAB 4 PRINT RECORD NOT FOUND FOR K 1 TO 2000 NEXT RETURN REM REM DISPLAY RECORD REM HOME HTAB 5 VTAB 7 PRINT FIRS T NAME FIRST OLD HTAB 5 VTAB 8 PRINT LAST NAME LAST OLD 5 VTAB 9 PRINT STRE ET SRT OLD HTAB 5 VTAB 10 PRINT CIT Y CITY OLD HTAB 5 VTAB 11 PRINT STA TE ST OLD HTAB 5 VTAB 12 PRINT ZIP CODE ZIP OLD HTAB 5 VTAB 13 PRINT TEL EPHONE NO TEL OLD RETURN AAICRC No 58
161. VECTOR BCS MXOUT BRANCH ON CHARACTER OUTPUT 5 MXINIT INITIALIZE THE PRINTER FOR QUTPUT MXINIT JSR CTINIT INITIALIZE CENTRONICS PORT GETLFI LDY LPIMSG LITS JSR PMSG 3REQUEST LINES INCH GET REPLY 38 LINES PER INCH 36 LINES PER INCH 3SPACE MEANS USE OLD PARAMETERS 3RETURN ALSO BEQ SETPRM Wo BEQ SETPRM CMP BEQ OLDPRM CMP UR BEQ DEDERM JSR BELL MUST BE ERROR BNE GETLPI 3 ASK AGAIN SETPRM PHA SAVE LPI JSR GETMRG 3 GET MARGIN WIDTH 258 GETOPT 3GET OPTIO JSR SETMX JSR SN T OLDPRM JMP CRLOW 3RESET PRINTER AND SET LPI SEND REQUESTED OPTIONS 3 BELL RING BELL ON PRINTER BELL LDA 7 3ASCII BELL CHAR CTOUT SEND CHARACTER TO CENTRONICS PORT CTOUT PHA CTOUTI Es UIFR GET VIA STATUS 31S PRINTER READY BEQ CTQUT1 SNO WAIT STA UDRB 3 YES SEND CHARACTER 3 MXOUT SEND CHAR WITH MARGINS AND SKIP OVER PERF No 58 March 1983 ee PRINTERS TEE Listing 1 continued LINE LOC 0091 0092 2993 9694 0095 9996 Hee eee HOO QION oO gt NOU B WHE a 9 c 9192 9193 0194 9195 196 9197 2198 6199 9200 9261 202 9203 CODE C9 FF 56 GE GE BE BE LINE MXOUT MXOUT1 MXOUT2 MRGLUP MXOUTS E GE 4 a4 EA F EA A4 Aa 4 er BE 9 4 er er 58 March 1983 NEWLIN MXRET MXDUN
162. address Last instruction 59 Top seven byies of stack DS 42 Ci ST 2y7Cc Accumuistor 1 32 X reg Conients pee Next instruction lp tm o Circle No 20 No 58 March 1983 reg AFAA X 99 25 SPsFZ 101 100001 Disassembly LDA HAA Processor codes NV EDIZC Stack poinier Processor status Reference address Disassembly 33 SOC MICRO User defined location amp Conienis Conient of referenced addresa DD Anthro Digital Inc P O Box 1385 Pittsfield MA 01202 413 448 8278 27 PRINTERS CSW replacement finally Having found it store its contents in HOOK see lines 58 and 61 of the listing and HOOK now sends data to the routine that actually prints it jor at least to the next intercept routine which will pass the data on eventually CONDOS is how you find out where to send the data It s also the basis for our caution against CALLing PRNT a second time If DOS is point ing to HOOK already the next CALL to PRNT gets CONDOS working again and it will dump HOOK s address into HOOK as the place to send data to be printed So HOOK will JSR HOOK will JSR HOOK will Don t CALL PRNT twice without issuing a PR N N holding a slot number between PR N resets the DOS CSW pointer so the next CALL to PRNT will find a real I O handler address in this place as it should Note that PR N shuts HOOK off by rewriting DOS
163. ake graphics games on the Apple easily If you take the time to enter and understand the routine you will find you have a powerful graphics tool at your com mand Even the novice programmer should be capable of creating pro fessional quality graphics Adam King is a sixteen year old student who taught himself assembly language He may be contacted at Hut Hill Road Bridgewater CT 06752 ACRO THE TACKLER DUAL e MODE PARALLEL Super Pix Circle No 48 No 58 March 1983 INTERFACE FOR THE APPLE 2 BOARDS IN ONE FOR NO MORE COMPATIBILITY PROBLEMS An intelligent board to provide easy control of your printer s fuil potential Plus a standard parallel board at the flip of a switch your assurance of compatibility with essentially all software for the APPLE Hires printing with simple keyboard commands that replace hard to use software routines No disks to load Special features include inverse doubled and rotated graphics and many text control features available through easy keyboard or software cemmands Uses Industry standard graphics commands This is the first truly universal intelligent parallel interface Change printers no need to buy another board Just plug in one of our ROM S and you re all set ROM S available for Epson C Itoh NEC and Okidata others available soon Specify printer when ordering Call for THE UPGRADEABLE PPC 100 PARALLEL PRINTER CARD Camm Universal Centronics
164. apply if either or both of the dots are white An example shape shown in figure 1 helps clarify these rules and serves as a trial run of the Shape Definer program This is drawn with his first column placed on an even column in accordance with rule 1 He has a green face orange neck violet arms white body orange legs and white feet To understand how the col ors were derived compare each dot by Color Code and column parity with the six rules After your shape has been designed on graph paper it must be translated in to data that the graphics routine can use Shape Definer does most of the work for you allowing you to input the shape in a form that resembles figure 1 Shape Plot Code O rA LSE 1 1 1 1 I D Imi JCICIMCICIC ICICIMCICIC JEN TL IL JENL 2L 2C 28M JE C 2L 20 28 1 moon 3 m 0 lt lt 39 lt A Figure 1 Shape on graph paper 78 Listing 1 Make Tables 5 1 10 FOR L 2304 TO 2559 X X 1 20 IFX 27 TEN Ys Y e L X d 30 POKE L Y 4d NEXT L EX 1 50 FOR L 2560 TO 2815 X X 1 60 X IF INT X 2 X 2 THEN Y Y 1 7 IF X 13 TEN X 1 80 POKE L Y NEXT L 90 When you run Shape Definer you are asked specific questions abo
165. aracter editor program There are several excellent character set editors available commercially that will assist you in creating character data files Whenever a custom character set is loaded the character base shadow register at 2F4 is set to point to the new character set The new characters would be used anywhere on the screen including the text window if it were not for a display list interrupt DLI routine added to DIGI DRAFT DLI routine is a short machine language routine that makes the computer display only Atari characters in the text window and adds extra color as a bonus Just before ANTIC instructs the CTIA or Listing 1 DIGI DRAFT Program Listing 0 REM DIGI DRAFT C 1982 TIM KILBY 5 OVERSCAN 0 8 REM OVERSCAN DETERMINES PERFECT CIRCLES CHANGE TQ VALUE FROM 0 GTIA chip to display the text window at the bottom of the screen once every sixtieth of a second the DLI routine is called up to switch to Atari characters and change two colors Later as the screen begins plotting anew all the shadow register data for graphics window colors and the custom character set location are loaded into the appropriate registers Thus the computer continually switches between given values for the text window and your colors and characters in the graphics window Line 9050 of listing 1 contains the numerical data that create this routine In assembly language it looks like this PHA TXA PHA TYA PHA LDA
166. arch 1983 privilege instructions used while in the user mode trace mode operation odd addresses associated with long word or word data and illegal or unimple mented instructions External sources consist of hardware interrupts bus er rors or reset request Exception processing is used when there may be a problem with either the software or hardware The processor is designed so that when it is in the super visor state it can inform the user of possible software or hardware prob lems and take the proper steps to cor rect these potential problems Most of the privileged instructions are used to manipulate the user stack pointer and the system status register There are however some special in structions that can be executed in the supervisor state Reset External Devices RESET is a Table 1 BCD Instructions command that causes the reset pin of 68000 to go low Any device connected to the reset pin is also reset This com mand allows the 68000 to reinitialize the peripheral components using soft ware in the supervisor mode Return from Exception RTE is the statement that is used to resume pro cessing after an exception has occurred Generally this statement is used at the end of some service routine to return control to the user The STOP instruction is used to stop the 68000 from fetching and ex ecuting instructions Execution does not continue until an external inter rupt trace or reset exception oc
167. at the records in a group or set can be accessed in a predetermined sequence Items within the set may be sequenced by some key field such as name or by the order in which the items are entered into the set The file may contain many sets of records linked together or it may be composed of just one set The records are chained to gether by including a pointer to the next and or previous record in the set The pointer simply a record number is car ried as a field in each record of the set Many design options are available when you work with linked lists For example records can belong to more than one set and there may be multiple record types within each set This month s programs LINK CREATE and LINK PROG use a simple file structure containing two sets I chose to include the second set simply to manage the free space in the file By chaining together unused records you can eliminate the necessity of performing what is commonly called garbage col lection a reorganization of the file When the file is initialized by LINK CREATE it contains two record types the header record there is only one placed at record zero and the data records The header record contains two fields FIC first in data chain and NA next available record The data records contain the following fields FIRST First name LAST Last name STR Street address CITY City address ST State address ZIP
168. ate support provided THE NEXT LOGICAL STEP IN THE EVOLUTION of WORD PROCESSING COPY WRITER Copy Writer is a full featured professional quality word processor It offers allthe capabilities required for high performance and efficiency In addition advanced features such as double columns multiple disk files printer hex control etc Copy Writer is written in FORTH a unique language that runs nearly as fast as machine code but actually occupies less memory This allows more room in memory for lines of text More than otherwise possible Copy Writer updates will be distributed on request to all registered users for just the update cost Even when a more powerful version is introduced AVAILABLE FOR 40XX 8032 C64 o 145 SEE YOUR DEALER OR P O Box 102 MICROTECH JLanghorne Pa 19047 215 757 0284 DEALER INQUIRIES INVITED Commodore Gets Smart Having a modem and a good terminai software package like this can really open up a new world of applications for your Commodore system Robert W Baker MICROCOMPUTING v record to disk transmit from disk v output to Commodore ASCII printer v XON XOFF control capability v translates files ASCII BASIC W PRO V system status line clock with alarm v user table allows encoded data v user access to routines telemetry The most sophisticated terminal package available Gives you ali the features need ed now and for the future Available Commodore 40XX 8032 with 4040
169. atted BASIC listings with indenta tion and spacing used to highlight pro gram structure as typically done for Pascal listings For example if you have a long FOR NEXT loop or many of them nested inside others the pro gram structure is seen more easily if the lines inside the loops are indented a few spaces A very simple example of formatting program output is given in listing 1 Looking at that program it s clear that this can be a tedious busi ness You need to append a whole new program to your program to control the listing However tedious is preferable to impossible This feature comes in most handy when you have a final draft of a program that you ve written for Listing 1 Print Control PAGE 1 1 REM DOUBLESPACE BETWEEN LINES COURTESY OF APPLESOFT LIST 2 REM ELIMINABLE IF YOUR PRINTER REVERSE LINEFEEDS 10 FORI 1 TO 16 26 REM NESTED AT FIRST LEVEL 36 REM SO INDENT TO SHOW IT 46 FORJ 1 TO 18 110 REM NOW FORMAT THE LISTING OF THE PROGRAM CHR 4 PRINT D PR1 PRINT CHR 9 81N REM MAKE PRINTER MARGIN 1 WIDER THAN MARGIN MARGIN 76 NEXT J 80 REM BACK TO THE FIRST LEVEL 90 NEXT I 99 REM BACK TO OUTERMOST LEVEL No 58 March 1983 MICRO 56 REM NESTED ANOTHER LEVEL 68 REM INDENTATION MAKES THIS CLEARER someone else and want to give that person a listing which is easier to read or looks more professional than an unformatted BASIC listing A final parameter which is not specifie
170. aves the deleted record number in DR then saves the data in line 3045 Line 3060 makes sure the deleted record is the first in the chain FIC RJ FIC is set equal to the next pointer of the deleted record If the deleted record is not first in the chain lines 3070 through 3080 update the previous record s NXT pointer to point at the record at which the deleted record originally pointed Lines 3100 3120 make the next pointer of the deleted record equal to the next available record NXT WR and the next available equal to the deleted record number DR This pushes the deleted record onto the top of the available record stack INQUIRE lines 2500 2860 By reading the header record and looking for an FIC value of zero line 2505 checks to see if the file is empty There are two types of inquiries BROWSE and DIRECT BROWSE allows the user to start anywhere in the file and call records up in sequence the user is also given the option of chang ing or deleting any record from the BROWSE option DIRECT requires the user to know the full key unless it finds a match on the exact key it will display a not found message Line 2509 asks the user which type of Inquiry is to be performed If the user replies D for DIRECT lines 2600 through 2630 ask the user for the key find the record and display the data When the user is done viewing the record any key can be depressed to return to the main menu
171. ay Because a perspective on the present can also be your window on the future Strobe Inc 897 5A Independence Avenue Mountain View CA 94043 Telephone 415 969 5130 The Strobe Graphics System Seeing is believing Circle No 57 M D ee gt ARK COMPUTING INC CP M uv pem n r Your Salvati i i ANC E Fe Microsoft Premium System f Includes softcard ramcard videx Novation Smart Cat AMDEK Videoterm softswitch user guide 1200 Baud full duplex 12 Amber Monitor m List 210 00 List 695 00 List 595 00 P O Box 2025 ARK 164 95 ARK 525 00 ARK 495 00 Corona CA 91720 Fo cc ig e C A 92 Ca E Pie Writer 149 95 99 95 Screenwriter 129 95 79 95 Super Text 40 80 175 00 129 95 Word Handler 199 00 149 95 Wordstar 495 00 369 95 LJ L MA FINANCIAL MODELING Magic Mailer 69 95 List ARK Calestar 145 00 109 95 Desktop Plan 11250 00 184 95 Visicalc 250 00 184 95 Magic Mailer 69 95 54 95 MailMerge 250 00 189 95 cu 1 ASSEMBLERS 3 1 PRINTERS i List ARK GRAPHICS 4 m List ARK TI ALDsS 125 00 89 95 List ARK Itoh Hee 1895 59 95 The Artist 79 95 59 95 Prowrtter 8610 595 00 478 00 AED 119 95 79 95 EZ 0 49 995 1 MERLIN 64 95 54 95 f GAS wee d tds 22 0 Prowriter 1550 995 00 750 00 Graphics m C Itoh f COMMUNICATIONS Magician 59 95 44
172. ay be one byte long or less or more One byte has two nibbles Chip An integrated circuit s on a wafer slice usually made of silicon CPU Central Processing Unit The central processor of the computer system which con tains the main storage arithmetic unit and CRT Abbreviation for Cathode Ray Tube The television tube used to display pictures or characters Also the computer terminal made from a CRT Cursor A position indicator displaying on the video screen the position of a character to be cor rected a position in which data is to be entered Different terminals have different restrictions for cursor movements Disk A circular metal plate with magnetic material on both sides continuously rotated for reading or writing Disks come in 8 and 54 sizes and are inserted into the computer to hold information DOS Disk Operating System Operating system integrating disk file facilities such as symbolic files automatic space allocation and sometimes dynamic memory allocation EPROM An electrically programmable ROM suited for high performance systems that need fast turn around for system program develop ment and for small volumes of identical pro grams in production systems Input Output Commonly called I O 1 A general term for equipment used to communicate with a computer 2 Data involved in such communica tion 3 The media carrying the data for input output Interface
173. blank interrupt routine is in two parts The first part updates system clocks and the second part shadows the hardware registers The second part referred to as the deferred vertical blank interrupt routine is easily disabled just POKE 66 1 Some interesting effects can be pro duced by playing with this feature For example instead of watching a screen fill up as the program draws it you can blank it out or put some other message on it then POKE 66 0 and your com MICRO pleted screen instantly appears Just follow these simple steps 1 POKE 66 1 to disable the deferred vertical blank interrupt routine 2 POKE 54272 0 to blank out the screen or set up a display list and a screen somewhere in memory that is not used by the OS screen and POKE the display list pointers into 54274 10 and 54275 hi POKE color and other information directly into the hardware registers not the shadow registers 3 Use the standard BASIC statements or the shadow registers in machine language to set up the next screen Do not use hardware registers directly 4 POKE 66 0 and your new screen will immediately appear on the television Normally you do not need to set the address for the Jump on Vertical Blank JVB instruction because the shadowing restarts the display list from the pointers in the shadow registers If you disable the deferred VBI routine you must supply the address or ANTIC will get lost in memory and not give you
174. by plugging it into any of the game I O sockets If it is not connected properly say you connected to the ground side instead of the bit 8 side of the cut jumper you might damage tbe chip that drives the annunciator outputs Once you are convinced that every thing is OK at the interface end turn off the Apple and make the con nection to AN1 Now turn on your system and print some text Everything should work normally If not shut it down and check your connections be fore proceeding Next POKE 16293 0 to switch bit 8 high Print a line of text to verify that the printer is printing graphics charac ters Finally POKE 16294 0 to set bit 8 low again Everything should be back to normal and you now have a full 8 bit interface for your printer j Now use the interface to print the HGR screen on the MX 80 other systems with TRS 80 compatible graphics also will work but probably you will have to change the offset value for graphics character set and the printer initialization Charles Taylor s article Apple Graphics for Okidata Microline 80 MICRO 48 48 in spired me to get control of bit 8 on my interface His assembly language pro gram needs only minor modification for use with program control of bit 8 he used a switch and the MX 80 Enter Mr Taylor s assembly lan guage program in hexadecimal using the Apple monitor memory load func _tion page 44 in the Apple II Reference Manual You can check your
175. c Apple Microsoft Compu Think OSI SofTech Microsystems Inc Ellis Computing Owl Computers Datasoft Inc GNOSIS Microsoft Datasoft Inc Krell Corp Radio Shack Terrapin Inc Apple HES Addison Wesley Publishing Co Volition Systems Creative Solutions Micronetics Design Corp 10K plus 24K 810 drive TSC FLEX 9 0 DOS 24K plus 10 12K working space 1 drive 48K RAM 1 drive APDOS 48K RAM 1 drive 48K Disk II 48K Z80 card 48K with 16K RAM card Ap Pascal Lang Sys 2 drives 48K 16K RAM card optional 1 drive 2 preferred W M Softcard includes CP M PILOT CP M CP M 8 disk drives 48K RAM 64K for Prog Develop UCSD p System Softcard CP M 1 drive DOS 3 2 1 disk drive APDOS 48K RAM Applesoft in RAM or Lang Card APDOS 32K 1 drive CP M 48K RAM 1 drive disk drive 1 lang card 1 disk drive 32K 1 disk drive lang card 16K memory board 1 disk drive lang card 64K RAM 2 disk drives lang or RAM card amp Pascal Apple Pascal 1 1 64K Motorola MEX68KDMI 64K min 100 79 95 disk manual 100 90 45 plus 40 Gen U til amp Vid Ed 123 RAM amp ROM 58 95 58 95 123 ROM amp RAM 89 95 139 95 hi res amp floating point 495 645 i 140 40 diskette or 60 with OGI Pascal 10 Level 3 5600 Level 4 full system source 3200 L Yeeug uoneunoju saseyoeg oSensurT 500
176. ccomplished by merely replacing the value of NL in line 30 NL is used in lines 220 270 3000 5090 5110 7000 and 8500 With twenty lines the calculations will take longer Comments and Multiple Statements For some applications you may want to type several assignments on one line or include a comment for documentation Change the following lines to add these features 2020 IFT gt ANDT lt THEN2070 2050 IFT SPC ORT I ORT THEN2070 3015 IFLEFT S JJ 1 THEN3090 4000 I 2 O KK z II 4010 I 2 I 4 1 KK 2 KK t IFII gt LEN AS THENGOSUB4100 RETURN 4020 XX ASC MIDS AS II 1 IFXX 58 THENGOSUB4100 GOTO4010 4030 IFXX 33THENGOSUB4100 RETURN 4040 511 KK XX GOTO4010 4100 511 0 0 SYS828 RETURN The program will now allow you to type colons exclamation points and spaces Everything appearing after a colon on a line will be ignored in evaluations It is even possible to have a whole line as a comment Also assignment statements but not value requests may be put together on one line separated by colons While these features make MICRO Calc more powerful they also make editing an existing screen more difficult To make changes you must still delete all characters back to the change This means that comments must be retyped each time a change is made earlier in the line See the section marked Suggestions for other changes for some tips on impr
177. ce of bare wire a w resistor lead will work inserted into the game I O socket Be very sure the alligator clips cannot come into contact with any other circuits If you use either of these latter two methods you will have to remove or bend out the corresponding pin on any game I O plugs you use After deciding on the method to use and attaching the wire to the interface card you should check this connection before making the connection to the game I O socket Replace the interface card in your Apple and connect the Listing 1 Modifications to Taylor s Routine 942B 20 A494 955D 20 9D 94 958E 20 9D 94 949D 18 6920 94A0 20 02 C1 60 A2 C1 A9 09 94A8 9D B8 06 A9 FF 9D B8 04 94BO 9D 38 06 A9 00 9D B8 05 94B8 20 EA 03 A9 OF 20 02 C1 94CO 8D 5B CO 60 MICRO JSR to new setup location JSR to offset routine JSR to offset routine New routine adds 32 to Graphic character value Turn on interface etc as in Taylor s routine INIT printer for compressed Print and set bit 8 high No 58 March 1983 eee PRINTERS ET printer When you power up your sys tem leave other end of the new wire unconnected Turn on the printer enable the interface and try printing some text It should print as graphics characters Now ground the wire by holding the stripped end against the power supply Text should print nor mally If this connection is made prop erly you cannot harm the Apple
178. characters on a program line we have to split it up This is accomplished by converting the codes for the letters A Z to numbers 1 to 26 If the resulting number is 13 or less then line 6510 is used Numbers 14 to 26 are converted to 1 to 13 and line 6530 is used If the last character is not a then the statement is assumed to be an assignment A Z etc Subroutine 4000 POKEs the characters of the line one by one into the BASIC input buffer and sticks a zero at the end The machine language routine described above is called with SYS828 and a return is made to line 3030 Subroutine 3000 continues through the array of No 58 March 1983 MICRO Calc Variable Usage Constants number of screen Hines CR carriage return DL p delete character fs screen line values screen lines handling wale v one way and handling assignments A another Only subroutine 5000 is left The LOAD SAVE routine is invoked whenever the key is pressed First a choice is offered between LOAD and SAVE Then the file name is entered Subroutine 5090 is used for SAVEing and subroutine 5110 for LOADing When a screen is saved each element in the line array S is added to the string A along with a carriage return If the array element is empty it is filled with a dummy character The carriage returns are used to separate the items so they can be read back with the INPUT statement in line 5110 The dummy characte
179. cluded TRACK SECTOR EDITOR An all new Track Sector Editor including the following features Read Write Insert Delete Search and impressive Print capabilities e DISK DIAGNOSTICS Checks such things as Drive Speed Diskette Media Reliability and Erasing Diskettes e HIGHEST RATED Best back up Program in Softalk Poll Rated 8 25 out of 10 e CONTINUAL UPDATES Available from Computer Applications and new listings on the source 69 95 Dealer and Distributor Inquiries Invited m IC RO WARE DIST INC 201 838 9027 MICRO 81 APPLE Disk Track for Non Matching Volume Numbers by Roland E Guilbault Change the volume number of your disks for library reference I decided to take advantage of the volume numbers on the disks and am writing a program to catalog a disk into a data base file Up until now I have been using the default disk numbers Once two or more disks are entered in to the data base it is impossible to tell which disk contains what programs The volume number on the disk will be used to provide this information To change my disks over I have to in itialize a new disk to the appropriate volume number then copy the entire disk To facilitate this process I am using the Call A P P L E disk 6B utilities which include a track copier This speeds up the copying process but the copied disks do not work To copy a disk using a track copier the volume
180. cs and became a popular companion to the original PET computer Today since little else in its price range can produce such excellent listings and graphics the 801P is still widely used But using it with late model PETs creates a prob lem with any but original ROMs the printer reverses upper and lower case characters when it is in lower case mode Refer to figure 1 as you read my description of the 2 00 add on circuit that corrects this problem With S1 in the NORM position the printer s function is unmodified But when 51 is flipped to TEXT the blocks of characters with decimal codes 64 127 and 192 255 will be swapped e g a CHR 64 will print as CHR 192 CHR 192 as CHR 64 etc With the printer in graphics mode this creates a nightmare but in lower case mode the upper and lower case alphabets are put where they belong As an unwanted side ef fect six keyboard generated characters will now print incorrectly but they are rarely used in actual text They are the square brackets at sign backslash up and left arrows Construction of the add on circuit is simple and noncritical All five con nections to the printer can be made where the 36 pin printer cable connec tor mounts to the green circuit board You can break wire XX by gently desoldering pin 9 from the board and holding it out of the way with a drop of epoxy To keep things small I glued the 7400 chip to the side of the toggle switch a
181. cuit board however is altogether different in layout the familiar components are there but in different locations This may cause problems with hardware accessories built for insertion into the computer On the E board model TRS 80 memory jumpers are labeled 16K and 32K On the 100 model they are marked 16K and 64K Does this indicate a possible marketing change Making a 64K machine available would cost lit tle yet provide an extra sale point The TDP 100 comes with a white case built slightly higher than the TRS 80 It has long cooling slots in the back of the cabinet into which a loose wire end or coin might easily slide When my warranty expires I will prob ably glue some nylon netting to the underside of the cabinet to forestall any accidents I have noticed that the colors displayed on the screen are slightly dif ferent from my other machine Ad justing the hue control on the TV does not restore the colors to those with which I am familiar I don t know if there is a difference in the color cir cuitry or if my sample happens to be adjusted differently Despite these minor problems my impressions of the computer have been favorable so far While on the subject of CoCo clones there are other computers available or in the works In England the Dragon is similar to CoCo although it is not completely compati ble with either hardware or software A Japanese company is making a com patible compute
182. curs The STOP instruction can be used to stop the processor and wait for an interrupt The immediate data follow ing the instruction is used to set the status register Mnemonic Data Size CCR Name Bee 207 CCR wit XNZVC SUUS MICRO continued 73 HYPERCARTRIDGE for ATARI 400 800 w o EPROMs ROMs FOR SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS AND HOBBYISTS e extend memory of 16K RAM and 32K RAM computers ecreate 16K cartridges easily with an EPROM programmer e combine ATARI BASIC ROMs with your own subroutines on ROM EPROM e eliminate need for disk drive and extra RAM for lengthy programs CONFIGURATIONS 1 combination of 4 2532 EPROMS 2332 ROMs 2 Two ATARI and two 2532 s or 23325 SPECIFY WITH ORDER ROMs Also order 2532 4K EPROMs 7 50 each with cartridge order only 3t kt je e e e he e e oe e e e e e e e e e CHAMELEON COMPUTING Dept of Physics amp Astronomy Box 119 M Dickinson College Carlisle PA 17013 717 245 1717 555555555255 884485534 Please add 1 50 shipping handling PA residents add 6 sales tax CHECK MC VISA Quantity discounts available Circle No 44 74 continued Data Size CCR Name Table 1 Mnemonic Comments The source is subtracted using BCD arithmetic from the destination with the extend bit _ and the result is stored in the destination SBCD O
183. d but saving the information and then im mediately re entering it under the new key name Like the delete command it makes sure the user is serious about the change before going ahead with it Perhaps the most crucial commands of all in the long run create and retrieve a sequential copy of the entire relative file This accomplishes at least two goals It allows the user to restructure the mail list with differing field lengths and record lengths without losing data Beyond this if the user ever upgrades to a commercial mail list program most are able to add data from a sequential file Therefore you usually FEATURES won t have to retype information This is a crucial feature of serious file handling programs Using the same technique this information can also be fed into word processing programs allowing the user to write customized letters to large lists Here is the subroutine that dumps the entire file in sequential order 3470 FOR II 2 1 TO NV 3480 RR K ll 3490 IF G R THEN 1 3500 PRINT DUMPING RECORD II OF NV 3510 GOSUB 4900 REM READ RECORD 3520 PRINT 5 K 3530 FOR JJ 1 TO NF 3540 PRINT 5 QT D1 JJ 3550 NEXT 3560 NEXT 3570 IF DS THEN 1690 3580 FOR Il 2 1 TO 9 3590 PRINT45 EF 3600 NEXT 3610 DCLOSE 5 3620 IF DS THEN 1690 Note line 3490 Actually the file can be dumped in two orders alphabetical CP M ON THE SS50 BUS META LAB 28
184. d 5 tax Add 2 50 domestic shipping charges Add 5 00 overseas shipping Further information available on request HIGH RESOLUTION GRAPHICS LIGHT PEN FOR APPLE II COMPUTERS The LPS Il is the only true High Reso Possible Applications lution Light Pen System with full soft Computer Aided Design ware support for the Apple ll Com Computer Aided Drafting puter High Resolution pictures dia Logic Design Simulation grams and other graphics can be Animation and Gome Playing easily drawn directly on the screen Graphic Arts of the Apple Il The pictures shown Menu Selection here were created with the LPS Il and Process Control easy to use Applesoft programs which are included on the DOS 3 3 diskette PENTRAKSthe Light Pen driver lets you easily create your own Applesoft programs for Light Pen graphics PEN PAINTER s color Sketching system which allows the user to create an infinite variety of patterns to be used for filing in the sketched areas Business Graphics Circuit Analysis Interactive Education Text Editing LPS II Features Include True Hi Res Resolution PENTRAK Ma chine Language Software PENPAINTER Software System with area fill refiil Four Complete Hi Res Drawing Area refilling allows Systerns various Combina Menu Selection tions of pattems to Programs be tried and changed Hi Res Text Hi Res Text generation is Generator a standard feature of the
185. d at the left margin buy a Grappler or similar interface board for your printer Our best efforts to date have not succeeded in convincing this program to talk to ours Similarly the DOS Tool Kit Assembler won t allow output to printers connected to the game I O which is what we drive our Teletypes through Nor will it allow us to vector output to printers connected to a communications card through a linefeed insertion program which we use to drive DECWriter printers which don t linefeed after carriage returns unless they re told to Suggestions for fixing the Apple Assembler code to allow us to print to these and other devices would be most welcome John R Vokey is an assistant professor of psychology at the University of Lethbridge in Alberta Canada H Cem Kaner is at McMaster University in Hamilton Ontario Canada Together they have published articles on the Apple II in BYTE Nibble and Compute This is their first publication in MICRO You can contact the authors at the Department of Psychology University of Lethbridge Lethbridge Alberta Canada T1K 3M4 ANICRO 29 30 VIDEO TERMINAL BOARD 82 018 This is a complete stand alone Video Terminal board All that is needed besides this board is a parallel ASCII keyboard standard NTSC monitor and power supply It displays 80 columns by 25 lines of UPPER and lower case characters Data is transfer by RS232 at rates of 110 baud to 96
186. d in the parameter list is the heading to be printed at the top of each page As long as your page length is not set to 0 the page number will be printed The program in listing 2 will output this as where PN is this page s number The string PAGE is replaced easily however In subroutine TITLEOUT the location of the title string is passed to STROUT Applesoft s string output subroutine Currently that string is stored in loca tions 3C9 through 3CE labelled TITLE in the program If you have a different title in mind simply define it in your program and point to it within TITLEOUT Only the pointer at 3A7 low byte decimal 935 and 3A9 937 which currently point to TITLE need be changed You can change the title and the pointer in a number of ways The one we find easiest works like this at the very start of the program line 1 insert a REM containing the title you want printed For example if you want LISTING PAGE printed at the top of each page where PN is the page number your program s first line would be 1 REM MY LISTING PAGE Remember to put a space after PAGE in the REM You won t see it in the pro 25 OPU SENSEI QUICK BROWN FOX The 1 word processor GENERAL LEDGER VIC 20 60 95 19 95 CHECK MINDER vic 20 19 95 64 24 95 19 95 CENTIPOD 27 95 Like Centiped only better FROGEE 27 95 The exciting arcade game
187. dge 99 95 CM102 24K Memory Expander Cartridge 119 95 VIC 1011A RS232C Terminal Interface 39 95 Provides interface between the VIC 20 and RS232 telecommunications modems Connects to VIC s user port PETSPEED Basic Compiler tor Commodore 130 00 Compile any Pet Basic program The only optimizing compiler Programs compiled with Petspeed run up to 40 times faster Petspeed code is unlistable and compiled programs cannot be tampered with No security device required for compiled pro grams Available NOW for the Commodore 64 Star Gemini 10 Printer Star Gemini 15 Printer SMD Monitor Call for price Call for price Call for price CARDBOARD 6 87 95 An expansion interface for the VIC 20 Allows expansion to 40K or accepts up to six games May be daisy chained for more versatility CARDBOARD 3 39 95 Economy expansion interface for the VIC 20 CARD CARD PRINT 79 95 Universal Centronics Parallel Printer Interface for the VIC 20 or CBM 64 Use an Epson MX 80 or OKIDATA or TANDY or just about any other CARDETTE 39 95 Use any standard cassette player recorder with your VIC 20 or CBM 64 LIGHT PEN 29 95 A light pen with six good programs to use with your VIC 20 or CBM 64 HOME amp BUSINESS PROGRAMS For VIC 20 amp C 64 CW 107A Home Calculation Program Pack 48 95 CPV 31 Data Files your storage is unlimited 14 95 CPV 96 Household Finance Package to keep records of ail 30 95 your household expenses CPV 208 Ba
188. e position in the input buffer by assign ing it to another variable Y MID X 1 Listing 3 is a short pro gram demonstration The BASIC listing depends upon the PRINT USING rou tine to align the numbers into columns as previously demonstrated and can be considered an extended application for the machine language routine Lines 600 and 625 set up X and read in the English words from the data strings at lines 1000 and 1002 Line 745 sets up the conversion mask that is interpreted by X and Y in the fol lowing manner 000000 00 0 1 Y 012012 Thus the X Y FOR NEXT loops inter pret the data string from the A and B arrays By extending the mask and including a C string conversion can be easily expanded to many times the national debt The machine language routine starting at location 6000 is totally relocatable to any other unused page in memory Lines 2 through 12 locate the mask X move its length to 1A and start adding to locations 8 and 9 Line 5 also stores the length in location 1C if there is no decimal point found Moving X to page 200 resolves several problems The first problem is how to keep track of all the necessary pointers Locating the beginning of the mask at 200 eliminates that pointer The second problem as some of the ex amples demonstrate is how to keep the data string when it overlaps the mask continued on pg 41 39 Circle No 29 ANIMATION 77 1 ORG
189. e used by anyone Paddle joystick 39 95 Apple Graphics Tablet 69 95 jo Penguin 5 J routine for increased disk si eof All Penguin applications products are now on unprotected disks for your convertenec tx d LE EF GRAPHICS SYSTEM II by Mark Pelczarski Everything needed for computer aided design Easily draw and design in two or three dimensions mix text apnd graphics freely define shapes and create typefaces with unique character generator Great for presentations videotape displays storing designs on disks graphies for other programs or just for experimentation Paddle joystick 69 95 Apple Graphics Tablet 119 95 50 additional fonts 819 95 J software 830 4th Avenue Geneva Illinois 60134 312 232 1984 Apple isa trademark of Apple Computer Inc Fo 4 e e ud s forthe Programmer Graphics Magician by Mark Pelczarski David Lubar and Chris Jochumson Add fast smooth animation and hund reds of pictures to your programs Create animated shapes and draw paths have up to 32 independently controlled figures on screen Use a special palette of over 100 colors to create pictures and objects in highly compressed format Easy to use and includes a special programming tu torial Has saved months in develop ment time for several games already on the market Paddle joystick 59 95 Appl
190. e Graphics Tablet 69 95 INICRO Editorial more things change the more they uh change Everyone knows that the way that old French proverb is supposed to end is more they stay the same But the fact is that s never been true at MICRO magazine Change is change It s accepted because it s necessary The microcomputer industry itself is far too dynamic to tolerate anything static for very long And of course MICRO has around for a while almost as long as the industry itself MICRO is now in its sixth publishing year which means it s seen its share of changes In that regard however our March 1983 issue is a benchmark you d have to go back a long long way before you found an issue of MICRO that contained so many changes and the promise of even more to come Start with this month s cover Maybe you noticed the image inside the screen is a painting not a photograph A small change but an im portant one The work is by Frank Wyman an exciting artist who s agreed to lend his talents to MICRO on a regular basis The cover art serves to introduce a brand new section in MICRO Learning Center but don t be mislead by the youngsters it depicts This new section is definitely not kid s stuff It s MICRO material presented just a little bit differently more clearly spelled out with some information gaps filled in The new section i
191. e all must perform Can the field of computer science be assimilated easily into our day to day existence if we are not conversant with high technology What practical steps can we take to prevent a future shock impact on our sensibilities Some of these questions are being resolved at the newly created Microcomputer Learning Center in Nashua NH The project is a combined effort of the Arts and Science Center Nashua and The Computer Mart of New Hampshire Inc and has education at the heart of its intent It is a merging of two entirely different kinds of organizations a non profit institution and a profit making business to create a unique blend of expertise and resources The result is an exciting learning center complete with knowledgeable educators hardware and software and an extensive library of computer literature Presently the Learning Center has ten Apple Plus computers with disk drives and video monitors and three printers A resource center has been established to provide the latest in applications software books and journals Hands on instruction is offered in such courses as Computer Literacy VisiCalc Word Processing and BASIC to name only a few In depth workshops cover LOGO and PILOT computer graphics specific languages software evaluation of computer assisted instruction and administrative management and computing for remediation Although the Center uses only Apple computers this is not a fact
192. e if the current record is at the end of the data chain NXT OLD 0 If so then the current record is rewritten making its NXT pointer equal to the record number of the new record NXT OLD The NXT pointer of the new record is set to zero as this record is now at the end of the data chain A GOTO 1500 then rewrites the header record and creates the new record On the other hand if the current record is not at the end of the data chain then it is saved as the last record compared to in setting LR R in 1075 The program prepares to access the next record in the chain by setting NXT OLD and performing a GOTO 1055 in line 1080 If the new record s key is less than the key of the record being compared then the proper position for the record has been found and the program falls through to line 1061 Line 1061 sets the next pointer of the new record to the current record number Line 1062 checks to see if the current record is No 58 March 1983 equal to FIC in which case FIC is reset to the new record number and the header record and new record are writ ten by a GOTO 1500 If the current record number is not equal to FIC then it is necessary to update the previous record to point to the new record which inserts the new record some where into the middle of the chain Then the header and new record are written line 1064 CHANGE lines 2000 2320 The change function reads the header record line 2004
193. e most fascinating challenge of your space career 29 95 Atari 400 800 with Disk Drive and Joystick At your computer store or from D cS dau 5 1 PRI Sa 2d 8943 Fullbright Ave Chatsworth CA 91311 VISA MASTERCARD shipping nanaung residenisadd s Atan register Inc Circle No 15 SOFTWARE SPECIALS A 100 machine code game with colortui graphics music sound and a tunny looking turtle to entertain your entire family By Thomas Kim and Jimmy Huey ONLY 15 95 SWARM Tronix Insects invade your Vic Cassette Circle No 16 DUST COVERS 7 95 For Vic 20 or Vic 64 Waterproof Brown Color Commodore Logo Protect your investment MARTIAN SOFTWARE a Another fast action game written entirely in machine language from Intergalactic Combat is STAR COMMAND Space Conflict All Machine Language INTERESTING SOFTWARE 21101 S Harvard Blvd Torrance CA 90501 213 328 9422 Visa MC Check Money Order CA residents add appropriate sales tax Write for free Catalog Add 2 00 Postage amp Handling Dealer Inquirers Invited Vic 20 is a trademark of Commodore Busness Machines Circle No 17 Nothing else even comes close to D R S our Disk Recovery System not Bags of Tricks not Dark not Disk Fixer nothing v Put your dam aged disk in one d a blank disk in the other D R S will do what all thos
194. e oc ke oe oc oe oe oe oe e oe oe oe oe oc oe eoe oe kkk oc oc oe oc oc oe oe oe oc oc kk Circle No 40 66 kok oc ode oc oe kok oc oc oe oe oc oc oc oc kok ok ok oc oc oo xx x Y oe oe kkk oc oe oe oe oc oc oe oc oc oe oe oec ok kkk oco oko MICRO program starts scrolling immediately and takes less memory Here is a simple outline of the program 10 30 SET UP 40 100 M L LOADER 110 1270 STRING PATTERNS 1280 1290 MORE SET UP 1300 1420 CHARACTER SET LOADER 1430 1570 MAIN LOOP 1580 1670 MENU 1680 2020 ROUTINES FOR CHANGING PARAMETERS You can change the starting message by changing line 30 To change the startup parameters change line 1280 All the REM statements are between the ten intervals so you dc not have to type them I suggest you save the program to tape before running it because a mistake might destroy the program When you have finished and you want to be sure all the letters are right enter nothing for a message The program will print the entire ASCII character set Bryan Christiansen is a 15 year old freshman in high school You may contact him at 314 25th Ave Fargo ND 58102 Machine Language Listing Constants LNLNTH EQU 1F COLOR EQU 80 SCRSTR EQU 400 Screen line length Background color Sern mem start address SCREND EQU SCRSTR 200 5 mem end 260 ORG 3035 STRING EQU 2 Addr for param passing Initialize 3035 86 80 START1 WCOLO
195. e on graph paper Any graph paper will do how ever you should note that hi res squares on the Apple are slightly taller than they are wide by an approx imate ratio of 1 13 1 Graph paper with this distortion produces more accurate results Numbered graph paper is ideal because it allows you to identify the odd and even columns I will explain later When designing your shapes paper fill in squares that will appear as colored dots and leave blank squares to appear black when the shape is drawn The following six rules provide a guide for defining a shape 1 Each shape has a Plot Code number This number is either 1 or 0 depen ding on whether your shape s left most column is drawn on even 0 or odd columns 1 2 Each horizontal row of your shape has a Color Code that is either O or 1 If the Color Code is 0 the row may contain the colors violet green black or white If the Color Code is 1 the row may contain the colors blue orange black or white 3 The following table decides the color of an individual dot TT Color Even Odd Code Columns Columns 0 violet green 1 blue orange 4 Any two horizontal dots placed side by side on sequential columns ap pear white overiding rule 3 5 Black appears wherever there is no dot except in the specific case of tule 6 6 Two horizontal dots separated by a black space appear to form a solid line the color of the two dots This tule does not
196. e other guys will do and far more v1 No other pro gram actually reads information from damaged sectors D R S does No 58 March 1983 vf No other pro gram can read disks that were recorded off center but D R S does v No other pro gram can read disks with errors caused by hub damage but D R S does No other gram types grades and fixes all possible rive Vi No other pro gram makes recov ered files accessible for conventional editing but D R S does but Available at your dealer or Call us at 612 929 7104 We accept VISA MasterCard MICRO files but D R S does v And all of this is totally automatic D R S a step ahead of the state of the art in Apple disk recovery systems SOF SYS 4306 Upton Ave So Mpis MN 55410 23 EN PRINTERS Print Control for APPLE Printers by John R Vokey and H Cem Kaner Automatic pagination and user selectable margins should be part of the printer driver routine but are rarely included This short machine language subroutine provides formatted output to most output devices Print Control requires Apple Il and printer If the area where you work on your Apple looks anything like ours you have a mess in need of a clean up solu tion Somewhere there s a heap of pro gram listings and perhaps a marginal ly tidier file drawer of folders
197. e respansive superior performer A bold aim 221 ti perfectly mates strong and widespread acceptance of the computer With i excellent PrintMate 150 is based on i prices beginning at 995 it is evident that outstanding user features the PrintMate 150 is the superior performe HIGH SYSTEM THRUPUT 150 ciiarac function and price ters per second advanced logic seeking impact printing with an accelerated print head slew rate and turnaround makes PrintMate 150 high speed performer i WIDE CARRIAGE VERSATILITY The Print Mate 150 s wide carriage can accommo date print lines from 136 to 231 characters in length and can easily handle forms from 3 to 15 inches wide and as long as 3t inches LARGE SELECTION OF PRINT CAPABILITIES The 7x9 dot matrix allows user selection be added t the PrintMate B mode Fab ote P PRINT The Printer People Micro Peripherals Inc 4426 South Century Drive Salt Lake City UT 84107 Phone 1 800 821 8848 aptionally expanded jan increments to 16K The PrintMate 50 expanded computer and downloaded to dix Circle No 31 Texas Instrument Features BANNER A Display Program for the Color Computer by Bryan Christiansen This ticket tape program written by a 15 year old high school freshman disp
198. e the screen and resets the printer and com puter when it is finished Mark Boyd teaches at a small four year liberal arts college His interest in computers began when he was an undergraduate taking a FORTRAN programming course You may contact Dr Boyd at St Mary of the Plains College Dodge City KS 67801 MICRO PEEK 16300 GOTO 55 REM PEEK 16299 1 REM SELECT SCREEN 2 PEEK 12304 FOR I 1 TO 2000 NEXT 1 TEXT 1 REM DISPLAY BO INPUT PLEASE ENTER THE TITLE C 140 CALL 378881 REM PRINT SCREEN 1 160 CALL 379041 REM PRINT SCREEN 2 4 REM SETUP CTRL D CTRL I AND TURN OFF INTERFACE BOARDS CHR 9 PRINT D PR WO 4 SCREEN PRINT PROGRAM PLEASE TURN TAB 12 THE PRINTER 40 PRINT LINE UP THE TOP OF THE FORM PERFORATIONS WITH THE PRINT HEAD NOW TURN THE PRINTER ON AND MAKE SURE THE READY LIGHT IS ON 45 FOR I 1 TO 5000 NEXT REM WAIT FOR USER TO READ PROMPT PEEK 10297 PEEK 15302 REM SETUP FOR HGR INPUT WHICH SCREEN DO YOU WANT 1 2 9 SELECT SCREEN 1 56 HOME INPUT IS THIS THE SCREEN YOU WANT Y N jE 50 INPUT DO YOU WANT A TITLE PRINTED Y N B 110 PRINT D PRS1 1 PRINT P BON REM TURN ON THE PRINTER INTERFACE AND LEN C9 2 REM PRINT CENTERED TITLE 16294 0 PRINT CHR 127 1 PRINT P I 1 PRINT D PRWO 1 REM 43 PRINT IE ater bo model vith a 4K or larger buffe GRAPHI SThe s
199. ease the defending player Nukewar Nuclear confrontation between two hypothetical 19 95 countries Defend your country with espionage bombers missiles submarines etc Computer Acquire New Second Edition The object is to 20 00 become the wealthiest person in this business game hotel acquisitions amp mergers Andromeda Conquest vast scale space strategy game of 19 95 galactic colonizing and conquest Strange life forms amp alien technologies exciting Telengard Microcomputer Dungeon Adventure game Time 25 00 fantasy and role playing 50 levels of ever more complex mazes to explore amp survive MORE MORE MORE Prices subject to change TO ORDER WRITE P O Box 18765 FOR ichi 1 FREE Wichita KS 67218 CATALOG 316 684 4660 Personal checks accepted Allow 3 weeks or C O D Add 2 Handling charges 2 00 VIC 209 is a registered trademark of Commodore Ca e Cas te C Ce Ca aa Ca aX Ca ur EE 5 5 9 ES 5 55 5 5 5 5 b A 55 858 8 E 9 9 9 5 X 8 EERE ai C X SIR I Nan Sa i S SSSR SSSSS SSKK Na Wa en wg e ur e ar ee nc Ng Nu eg EE Naz ur Nu ur Nan e d Nas ag a A AOI cI es east es Nez 18 MICRO No 58 March 1983 ee PRINTERS Hi Res Plotting with the VIC by Fred Wallace A discussion of the graphics mode available on a VIC 20 equipped with the VIC 1515 graphic printer is presented a
200. ed with OS65D3 To modify some of the utilities in volving access of the directory track in formation change line 10030 to show 240 instead of 248 in the DELETE ZERO and RENAME utilities Also line 11040 in DIRSRT needs to reflect this same change while line 10030 in CREATE should contain 246 instead of 254 These changes will prevent any in terference with the location of your new ID Finally you should eliminate line 10130 in DIR and DIRSRT or modify the 64 in that line to a 32 You may contact the author at 4406 Bridle Rd Bartlesville OK 74003 58 March 1983 Circle No 25 Circle No 26 OSI Disk Users CSE means OSI Software and Hardware Double your disk storage capacity Introducing 5 new disk programs Without adding disk drives Now you can more than double your usable floppy disk From DMP Systems storage capacity for a fraction of the cost of additional Superdefender disk drives Modular Systems DiskDoubler is adouble Universe density adapter that doubles the storage capacity of Edit all each disk track The DiskDoubler plugs directly into an OSI disk interface board No changes to hardware or software are required From Dwo Quong Fok Lok Sow WP 6502 Word processor Available in three The DiskDoubler increases total disk space under OS versions 65U to 550K under OS 65D to 473K for 8 inch floppies to 163K for mini floppies With the DiskDoubler each drive does the
201. ely in future issues of MICRO for diagrams col ored screen shots of running programs and even for its pure cosmetic effect in feature articles So what we have here in the March 1983 issue of MICRO magazine is the beginning of a new look a new section and a new service A fair amount of in novation I d say for a single issue April of course is another story Oh yes one more thing I d like to introduce myself MICRO s new publisher John Grow MICRO Attache s style cases for carrying and pro tecting your complete computer set up Accommodates equipment in a fully oper ational configuration Never a need to remove equipment from case Simply remove lid connect power and operate AP101 Apple Il with Single Drive 109 AP102 Appio it with Two Disk 0 rives Ap le Il 9 Inch Monitor amp Drives 1 Apple 1 Two Drives amp Yuri ilentype Printer 33 Monitor with Accessories Color Monitor TRS 80 Model Expansion Unit amp Drives 119 103 Aas 129 139 119 109 RS204 TRS 80 Model It 729 301 ATARI Computers with ee Coc Peripherals 109 P402 Centronics 730 737 amp 7575 7 Radio Shack Printer 89 P403 Epson MX70 80 or Um c7 Microline 82 89 P404 Epson 100 Printer _ 99 405 105 560 or Prism B 132 Printer 22109 406 Starwriter Printmas
202. emory address locations Since each address must be unique memory address space set aside for PIAs and other devices must not be used by memory The uP performs its operations so rapidly that any bit of data will be available for less than one micro second Figure 2 shows the bus activity for one machine cycle Assume that six of the eight data lines are connected to a latch or data register as shown in figure 3 if the latch is active reads the data when drops back to a logic 0 level then the data is captured by the latch You should realize also that this latch like any memory location must be addressed by the uP only when the data is intended for storage in the latch Several numbers appear in figure 2 and represent time in microseconds uSec measured from left to right For example the time for one cycle of signal E is 1 12 Sec and goes high 251 Sec after E goes low staying high for 502 In general I will present this type of timing diagram using worst case times Later I will discuss how to derive worst case data For now just realize that all integrated circuits have performance variations i e for number of one kind of IC some parts NOTE ALL TIMES IN MICROSECONDS NIN VALID CMOS STROBE No 58 March 1983 will be faster work better than others The manufacturer furnishes data on timing variations and the worst case data is that performance extreme that will be mos
203. entries most easily with the L command Since the entries must be correct and entry is tedious check things as you go along It s terrible to finish entering a few hundred hexadecimal pairs of numbers only to discover you entered an extra byte early on After you have entered and carefully checked Mr Taylor s program make the entries shown in listing 1 relocate the start of the printer setup routine to make room for the offset routine re place the setup routine with the offset No 58 March 1983 routine followed by the new setup rou tine and redirect the graphics output characters through the offset routine I couldn t find enough room to add a printer computer reset routine without reassembling Mr Taylor s program so you ll have to reset both the computer and the printer after running it After checking your entries again you can t be too thorough when check ing machine language entries BSAVE the routine A 9400 L 196 The pro gram can print either screen see Taylor s article so get a screen or two into memory and check it out Turn your printer off and set the paper to top of form before running The program turns on the interface in slot 1 so all you need to do is set the paper correctly turn on the printer and run it A screen fills a normal sized page and takes about five minutes to print Before you entered Taylor s pro gram you were told to set HIMEM to 37760 In the future before you BLOA
204. er Device Arbiter describing selection of multi ple input and output devices The UDA gives a DEVICE prompt in reponse to answering the IN or OUT prompt with U Joel s article explains how to access the two interfaces presented here and any others you may have on your system by putting a single letter code and a two byte address for each device handler in an output device table I call the Centronics interface C and the MX Driver P As presented in listing 1 the MX Driver works on MX 80 s and MX 100 s with Graftrax Plus For anything else you need to change the table of initialization parameters at the end of the program This table contains two strings labeled RESET and LPI8 Each string ends with a byte that has the most significant bit set The other seven bits of this byte are used as the default lines of print per page by the MX Driver The other characters at RESET are sent to the printer to reset it to the desired defaults for six lines per inch and those at LPI8 are sent if re quested to set up the eight lines per inch option At RESET in listing 1 the No 58 March 1983 printer is reset to power on defaults skip over perf is disabled since the MX Driver handles it and form length is set to 11 inches Listing 2 shows the alternate table for Graftrax 80 Graftrax 80 has a bug in the reset printer escape sequence ESC that causes the top of form to creep If you don t know whether or
205. ere within the record to begin the current write described in part 2 If you use the extension be sure each successive PRINT begins after all earlier PRINT s within the record Otherwise those following the new PRINT will be overwritten Each PRINT always writes to the end of the record regard less of where within the record it begins the write After the disk write subroutine our new information is on disk in record RR However the mail list could forget that the record is on disk if the program halted before re writing the key file It is a good idea to update keys about once an hour when adding to a file Safeguard changes whenever 86 you ve made enough that you don t want to redo them Changing a Record Now let s assume we have several entries in a mail list and we want to read one This is done with Bennett s change command even if we have changes to make It begins by asking for the record s key field Enter as much as you remember the nearest match will then be found If it is not an exact match you will be warned Not Found but even so it will be retrieved from disk for your viewing You may then browse alphabetically through the file pressing the UP ARROW key to see the next record and the BACK ARROW key to see the prior record Here are two subroutines that help 6220 REM CALC NEXT RECORD 6230 IF 9 lt NV THEN K9 K9 1 6240 RR 9 6250 RETURN 6260 REM
206. ersonic bomber over enemy terrain Drop all 25 bombs key tocations Midway Campaign Your computer controls a huge force of 19 95 Japanese ships trying to conquer Midway Island Your only advantage s surprise Dnieper River Line fictionalized engagement between Russian 25 00 amp German forces in 1943 Soviet forces controlled by the computer seek to overrun your line and capture sufficient objectives to attain victory Four levels of difficulty Tanktles Armored combat on the Eastern front of WWII You 24 50 start outnumbered 2 to 1 but you choose your tank types before the battle Guns of Fort Defiance You the commander of a 19th artillery 20 00 piece in a besieged fort Choose type of ammo Set the cannon s elevation deflection Computer Baseball Strategy You the manager of the 15 95 home team test you skill against a wily and unpredictable opponent your computer Lords of Karma Like an intriguing puzzle Decipher secrets 20 00 while exploring a mythical magical city amp countryside Avoid the lurking monsters North Atlantic Convoy Raider It s the Bismarck convoy 19 95 raid of 1941 The computer controls the British ships Will you change history Planet Miners Compete against others and the computer to 19 95 stake valuable mining claims throughout the solar system in the year 2050 Conflict 2500 in 2500 AD earth is threatened by attacking 19 95 aliens with an infinite of attack strategies with which to t
207. es When the recorder stops immediately pull out the earphone connector cable The computer will not hear the rest of the incoming data Now you can stop MICRO the recorder and reload your damaged file Disconnect the motor remote plug and position the tape to the beginning of the file Press PLAY and listen as the file is being read There will be a slight gap between data blocks When you first note the silence in the gap quickly reinsert the earphone plug When the next block starts the computer will ac cept it as a continuation of the previous file At this point you can use a text editor or possibly your file program itself to edit out the undesired infor mation from the first file block This method also erases any data contained in the first block You can restore program files saved in ASCII formiat that have an I O error in the center of the file CLOAD the file and count the number of blocks until the I O message appears Next use CLOAD to bring in the file again counting the incoming blocks When you reach the block number just before the damaged block pull out the ear phone plug Using the technique de scribed earlier skip over the damaged block When that block is finished quickly plug in the earphone cable The program will continue loading You will have to reconstruct only the data in the damaged block Though I haven t done much experimenting with the technique Iwas able to merge two programs toget
208. es enhancements Together Volumes 1 2 and 3 contain over 100 programs on diskette Fully documented and explained 3 Volume Gift Boxed 59 95 Mastering the VIC 20 23 95 Micro on the OSI 19 95 Please rush the MICRO Books I ve checked above to Name Address City Allow 6 8 weeks for delivery State 21 Vol 10 Vol 20 Vol 3 24 95 ea I m paying by 0 Check J MO VISA MC Total Enclosed _ 1 1 Add 2 00 5 per book res add 5 tax Visa MC Exp Date Reader Service Card The numbers below correspond to the numbers imprin ted on the advertisements in this issue of MICRO This card valid for 90 days only Mail information to Name Address City State Zip March 1983 BUSINESS REPLY CARD FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO 60 CHELMSFORD MA BUSINESS REPLY CARD FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO 60 CHELMSFORD MA POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE INCRO 34 Chelmsford Street Box 6502 Chelmsford MA 01824 BUSINESS REPLY CARD FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO 60 CHELMSFORD MA POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE INICRO 34 Chelmsford Street P O Box 6502 Chelmsford MA 01824 POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE INICRO 34 Chelmsford Street P O Box 6502 Chelmsford MA 01824 NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES NO POST
209. esign Group 1320 IF 0 gt 31 THEM 0 0 32 PLOT X1 2 Y1 I 5 3 1330 0515 THEN O D 16 PLOT X153 Y1 1 P O Box 3318 1340 IF 027 THEN D 0 8 PLUT 1 4 71 1 1350 IF D gt 3 THEN 0 0 4 3PLOT 5 1 La Jolla CA 92038 1360 IF 071 THEN O 0 2 PLOT X1 6 Y1 I y d 1370 IF 0 0 THEN PLOT X1 7 Y1 I 619 265 6940 1380 NEXT 1 1 8 605 0 MENUIBS CHRS 253 RETUKN E 1390 IF B gt 127 THEN 12 1400 IF gt 31 AND B lt 94 THEN B B 32 RETUKN 1410 IF 8497 THEM 8 84 Lessons Algebra 1500 REM BROKEN LINES 1510 BROKEN LINES MOOE Pre A K to exit and fun wa to learn the basic elements of high E y 1920 COLOR CiIF AOI ANO AO AND vi 4AINT Y1 41 TREN COLOR 1530 IF lt gt 14 AND lt gt 13 ANO X1 S INT X1 5 THEN COLOR 0 school algebra Apple computer diskette 29 95 30 day 1540 GOSUB JOY IF B 0 THEN GOSUB 418 d 1550 SOUMD 0 0 0 0 money back guarantee if not satisfie 1560 IF PEEK O ORET THEN 1500 1570 GOTO 1520 Earl 1580 GET 4 KEY IF KEY 32 THEN GOSUB MEMUIRETURN 1590 IF KEY 4B AND KEY lt 53 THEN GOSUB 180 21302 So General McMullen Dr 1600 GOTO 1520 dU LOU REN Cnr OR CHANGE San Antonio 78237 2010 Use joystick to change four colors Press FIRE also to chsnge intensit 2020 2 12 Press to exit 2030 5 0 5 1 0 lt gt THEM RETURN 2040 POKE 708 02 14 AND 8 lt g
210. esults of their learning can be seen on screen almost immediately 19 95 each at Book and Com puter stores everywhere or from computer world is roaring towarc us Make sure your children are prepared for the challenge With oul i books at their side they ll enjoy learning about computers Anc you ll know you ve helped open the door to their successful future 8943 Fullbright Avenue Chatsworth CA 91311 213 709 1202 INICRO 6809 Bibliography 113 The Rainbow 2 No 4 October 1982 Davis Gary are Three Assemblers Compared pg 30 37 Includes Cer Comp The Micro Works and Computerware assembler for 6809 systems Roslund Charles J Charlie s Machine pg 38 45 A mini monitor for machine language use with 6809 systems Albrecht Bob and Firedrake George Command is Secret to Good Games pg 46 48 Tips for the TRS 80 Color Computer game programmer Goebel Kathy Line Printer VII Not So Dumb pg 50 56 A logo for the Color Computer output Ebbert Jim Minicalc Will Handle all Your Projections pg 60 62 A mini spreadsheet for the Color Computer Sherwood Francis J How Much Will It Cost to Buy on Time pg 70 73 A loan amortization program for the 6809 based Color Computer Reid Chris Uammalu Provide Lovely Graphics Patterns for 80C pg 74 graphics program for the TRS 80 Color Computer Fraysse Joh
211. ether in the first place INTEGRATED means that every part of the package follows the same rules There s no need to learn one set of keypresses for the editor and a separate set of rules for the database RELIABLE means that ear lier versions of this software have been in the field for years onthe Apple RELIABLE means that thou sands of users have logged more than 1 000 000 hours of use on the Apple version RELIABLE means that we back you up after the sale with a hotline number printed right on the program disk If your dealer doesn t know the answer we do THE EDITOR Auto con figures to 40 or 80 columns on the Apple Ile supports a wide variety of 80 column boards or runsin 40 column mode on older Apples A coupon for a free Revision 7 LCA is included for older Apples THE PRINTER For more demanding output needs you can embed format com mands in your document while you edit and let our re formatting printer program handle all of your layout concerns More than 40 em bedded commands allow you to control every aspect of layout including pagina tion binding margins flex ible page headers volume length documents outline indentation and far more You can employ electronic shorthand so that commonly used phrases are represent ed by three or fewer key strokes And if your printer is capable of it you can do justification by incremental spacing boldface and more SOF SYS
212. etween 128 and 255 In the latter case bits 0 through 6 deter mine directly whether or not the head will place a dot on dot lines 1 through 7 of this particular print line For exam ple in order to place a single dot in dot line 4 the binary value required is 128 8 or CHR 136 Dot lines 3 and 4 would be darkened by sending 128 4 8 or CHR 140 Since you must Figure 2 Pin programmable graphics mode DOT LINE 200 20 ONE 1 0 PRINTLINE 6 MICRO BINARY WEIGHT 000000 OUTPUT BYTE issue one such byte for each vertical column of dots remember there are six of these in each normal mode char acter it is obvious that you can place dot anywhere you want it within the area reached by the printhead on each pass For example to duplicate the upper case in figure 1 you would have to send CHR codes of 254 137 137 137 254 128 The printer also automatically takes care of buffer overflow in the graphics mode It may take as many as 481 bytes of data to print one line in this mode i e the CHR 8 to get into graphics followed by 80 x 6 480 data bytes but the printer s internal buffer is only 90 bytes long Therefore it will print partial lines 90 bytes at a time until it completes the whole line This action is taken without any special programming requirement To avoid having space left between successive lines the line
213. evelopment pg 36 42 A 6809 based Color Computer program to handle the various factors involved in photo developing Giovanoni Richard Logchart pg 43 44 A Color Computer program to draw a sheet of 2 x 3 cycle log paper on the screen and adapt it to plot an aircraft log Greb Jack Disk DIR Ectory pg 46 49 A Color Computer program to assist in reading long directory files Phelps Andrew Comment Corner pg 51 54 Notes on the Color Computer error messages Hogg Frank 64K Korner pg 55 56 Notes on the operating systems for the 6809 based Color Computer Hass E J Neatprint pg 62 64 A Color Computer program to assist in printing out listings Brown Jim Memory Test pg 68 70 utility for the 6809 based Color Computer White Richard A Grades A Computerized Gradebook pg 73 78 A grade book program for the teacher using a Color Computer 117 Personal Computer World 5 No 11 November 1982 Staff Store pg 184 191 A tabulation of the specifications and main features of 113 different microcomputer systems including 6809 s 118 Byte 7 No 11 November 1982 Barden William Jr Inexpensive Transducers for the TRS 80 Part 2 on monitoring real world quantities covers switch sensing techniques for the TRS 80 Color Computer n 5 M MICRO Co
214. f the screen 24 wide by 192 long on which you cannot plot This space is ideal using Applesoft 79 the graphics routine is its collision in dicator If a shape is drawn and a colli sion with any other non black dot is detected a value greater than 0 is stored in location 2298 If P PEEK 2298 and P takes on a value greater than 0 then a collision has oc curred This value should be PEEKed only after drawing a shape not erasing SHAPE DEF INER INPUT WIDTH SHAPE 7 INPUT LENGTH OF SHAPE 15 gt INPUT SHAPE PLOT CODE 0 BEGIN SHAPE DEFINITION 1 COLOR C ODE O ROW 0011100 a shape AC 2 s COLOR CODE O ROW O101010 The graphics routine presented here 4 COLOR CODE 0 ROW 0011100 E there is one problem the graphics CODE 1 sed 000 routine resides memory beginning at Figure 2 Sample run of Shape Definer graphics for the game s name scoring extra men etc Applesoft To draw a shape on the screen the shape s X coordinate should be POKEd into location 2302 the Y coordinate into location 2301 and the shape number into location 2303 If you POKE a shape number that does not have a shape defined for it a ran dom mess will be drawn on the screen Similar problems arise when you POKE a Y coordinate which causes any part of the shape to be drawn off the screen Try to avoid these situations Calling 2048 draws your shape exclusive OR style This type
215. feed length is two thirds of that used in the character mode Plotting with Dots Although the most common use for the graphics mode is to create custom ized characters like the little monsters you chase all over the screen in games the real value lies in its ability to place a dot almost anywhere on a piece of paper In the graphics mode approx imately 98 print lines will fit on an 11 inch long sheet of paper that is 98 x 7 or 686 dot lines You have seen that the 80 column width means 80 x 6 480 possible horizontal points so on an 8 x 11 page you have available a grid of 686 vertical by 480 horizontal dot positions high enough resolution for some very fine work The subroutine in listing 1 is designed to use the grid concept to create a graph of any two dimensional relationship for which a VIC BASIC DEF can be written You need only to reserve an integer array A96 define the function and specify the start value and step value increment for X and Y variables XS XI YS and YI respectively If a title is placed in array T it is printed under the completed graph The routine uses only about 1600 bytes so plenty of room remains even on a 3 5K machine for data entry or tape read routines to automate the process For example calling the sub routine from the program in listing 2 produced the plot shown in graph 1 20 The Program print the characters that f
216. for all data fields For other functions it asks for only the first and last name 7000 Writes the data records from the WR elements 8000 Moves data fields from elements F from to ele ments T to 9500 Displays data fields from the old elements ADD lines 1000 1520 The add function first reads the header record by a GOSUB 4000 It MICRO then checks in line 1010 to see if NA is equal to zero If there is more free space the user is prompted to enter their various data fields by a GOSUB 6000 Line 1020 reads the available record by setting R NA and a GOSUB 5000 Line 1020 also saves the new record number for future use by NR NA Line 1030 resets to be equal to NXT of the new record The record previous ly pointed to by the new record becomes the next available If NXT is equal to zero then the new record was the last available record and NA is set to zero Line 1040 checks to see if FIC 0 which means this new record is the first and only record in the used record chain Therefore FIC is set to the new record s number NR and the next pointer of the new record is set to zero NXT NEW 0 The file is searched by starting at FIC line 1050 and checking each suc cessive record to see if the new record s key is less than the key of the record to which it is being compared line 1060 If the new record s key is more than the key of the record to which it is be ing compared then line 1070 checks to se
217. four 0 5 at the right end of the binary number For color 2 or you would use 16 2 or 32 Now you know what number to stick in However if you just POKE 36879 32 you will get a red screen with a black border and all the characters reversed You can preserve the original border color and reverse mode status with the AND function AND is a Boolean function usually used a BASIC IF THEN statement i e IF X2 5 AND Y20 THEN GOSUB 500 If both conditions on either side of the AND are satisfied then the whole expression is true otherwise the ex pression is false PET BASIC unlike most other BASICs allows the AND function to work on the bit level Like the BASIC expressions above a bit is considered true if it is 1 and false if it is 0 The two numbers compared by the AND function are compared bit by bit at each bit position If both bits at a given position are 1 then the resulting number will have a 1 there otherwise that bit position will get a 0 Consider the following example 10101011 AND 00001111 00001011 The equivalent BASIC statement is 171 AND 15 In PET BASIC this equals 11 the result of this bit level AND operation In other BASICs it would equal 1 or 1 indicating that both 171 and 15 were non zero and therefore true Notice that by ANDing with 15 you have preserved bits 3 0 exactly the way they were in the first number If you wanted to preserve bits 7 4 you would use 240 or 111100
218. ful work not even communicate with its oper ator So besides the memory which holds instructions and data the pP must have some sort of external circuit to perform the interface function Some early uPs had status and flag lines that were connected to package pins on the status line could be set to 5 volts logic one or 0 volts logic zero by external signals The flag lines could be set to logic one or logic zero by the and external circuits would read that level and cause some action to happen For example a flag line could be used to turn on a light or relay signalling that the uP had for example finished running a program Most modern including the 6809 have Programmable Interface Adapters that decode the address lines and read Figure 1 The pinout for the 6809E microprocessor used in the Radio Shack Color Computer See text for a discus slon of pin functions 40 Vss 1 2 39 TSC IRQ 3 38 LIC FIRQ 4 37 RESET BS 5 36 BA 6 35 Vcc 7 34 E AO 8 33 BUSY A1 9 32 AW A2 10 31 DO A3 11 30 Di 4 12 29 D2 5 13 28 03 A6 14 27 D4 AT 15 26 D5 AB 16 25 D6 9 17 24 D7 A10 18 23 15 A11 19 22 A14 A12 20 21 A13 A12 20 21 13 A12 20 21 A13 No 58 March 1983 or write data on the data bus trans lating the uP s blinding speed into fixed voltage levels PIAs are said to be memory mapped they occupy part of the 65536 m
219. gram controlled single step and dynamic breakpoint entry deletion TIM AIM SYM KIM AND KIM cassette versions 65 00 68 50 cassette HDE COMPREHENSIVE MEMORY TEST CMT Eight separate diagnostic routines for both static and dynamic memory TIM AIM SYM KIM and KIM cassette versions 65 00 68 50 cassette AVAILABLE DIRECT OR FROM THESE FINE DEALERS Johnson computers 5 Medina Ohio 44256 216 725 4560 Progressive Computer Software 405 Corbin Road York PA 17403 717 845 4954 Lux Associates 20 Sunland Drive Chico CA 95926 916 343 5033 Falk Baker Associates 382 Franklin Avenue Nutley NJ 07110 201 661 2430 Perry Peripherals 516 744 6462 Laboratory Microcomputer Consultants P O 8 East Amherst NY 14051 716 689 7344 Box 924 Miller Place NY 11764 It s All Relative Part 4 Using Commodore s Relative Records by Jim Strasma This fourth our series of articles tells how to actually read and write Commodore relative disk files In last month s article we had reached the point of actually using relative files Read on to learn safe ways to store and read relative file data Re opening a Relative File First the relative file is opened for both reading and writing access 1170 DOPEN 1 F D DD IF DS THEN 1690 The file name is in variable F and the data drive number is in DD Those with BASIC 2 will need to substitute as described in part 2 of
220. gram Works If you examine listing 1 you will notice that all floating point variable names have two characters That is because the single character names A Z are reserved for the program user The key to operation of the program is the machine language program contained in the DATA statements 9828 9868 Listing 2 is an assembly listing for the VIC of this routine The heart of the routine is two JSRs to the BASIC ROM routines LET and TKENIZE The rest is involved with manipulating the character pointer Using this little bit of machine language saves countless lines of BASIC programming The routine is POKEd into memory as soon as the screen is cleared and the screen color set to black line 10 The next two lines define constants and dimension the two arrays used to MiCRO No 58 March 19 hold the contents and values for each line of the MICRO Calc screen Using constants instead of literal values does more than save space in the program It also speeds execution BASIC doesn t have to figure out what 10 means every time when it can look it up under NL and makes changes easy Line 100 starts the mainline of the program The line pointer is set to the first line and the screen is printed using subroutine 8500 Line 110 is where the loop returns to whenever the cursor is moved to a new line The string array element containing the contents of the current line is moved into a temporary location Then the line is printed followed b
221. gram does ex cept for titling each page However if you use Apple s standard parallel out put board or one of the majority of other interfaces around and would prefer to spend a few minutes of typing to 200 to replace the board here s a program to format your output Using the Program The program is reached by a CALL command if you load it at location 768 5300 set PRNT 768 Before issuing the CALL initialize your output device e g PR 1 for a printer connected to slot 1 Some printers and interfaces re quire a few other initialization com mands such as CTRL I80N to allow 80 column output A few also require that at least one carriage return be printed before the printer is considered active by DOS Your printer and board manuals will give you initializa tion details Do the call at the point where you normally start printing data Parameter Label Legal Range Left Margin LM Right Margin RM Page Number PN Step over ST 0 lt 5 Title 255 chars MICRO 0 lt lt 255 LM lt RM lt 255 0 lt PN lt 255 Table 1 Format Parameters Default POKE Address and Notes 10 966 Blank lines forever if RM lt LM 70 965 Make it at least 1 less than printer allows 1 964 10 963 Blank pages forever if ST gt PL Page Length 1 PL 1 ST lt PL 1 lt 255 65 962 PL 1 0 kills pagination and title Page 935 low byte 937 high byte No 58 March 1983 nt instead of
222. h the built in graphics word processor system 6DAD 519 47 SBC 19 Save load and copy to disk Support graphics pedi 8514 P in d printers video digitizers joystick and graphics tablets 6051 A487 s 87 ANIMATION EDITOR Create a Hi Res animated sequence with color and sound Use the unique 6056 C920 53 827 ANIMATED SLIDE SHOW module to automatically 6058 0062 54 2 replay multiple sequences any order 65 C61A 55 DEC 1 6D5C B185 56 MOVZE LDA 85 Y SHAPE FONT MAKER EDITOR Create multi colored 914 57 STA 1A shapes easily Disassemble and edit ANY shapetable 25 6D61 D F 59 BNE COMMA Use with A G I L PAINT to cut shapes out of 6063 64 CLEAR REMAINING COMMAS either Hi Res screen 6063 M14 61 14 6065 A966 62 LDA 0 cial Intr ory Prices 6067 851A 63 STA 1A 5 oductory T oes 6D69 B11A 64 SKIP LDA 1A Y PAINT PROGRAM 139 6D6B 92 65 CMP 2C an n ANIMATION EDITOR 89 e 66 BEQ CLEAR F 67 340 SHAPE FONT MAKER EDITOR 59 i ae 6073 3006 69 BMI ENDO 6075 88 76 CLEAR DEY 6076 11 71 IDA 14 Y Applesoft and Apple Satistaction Gueranteed 6078 C8 72 INY are trademarks of VISA amp Master Card Weicome 6D79 911A 73 STA 14 Y Apple Computer Inc Dealer s inquiries invited 6D7B 88 74 END l DEY 607 D EB 75 BNE SKIP 6D7E Add 76 END IDY 3 60860 A906 LDA 6D82 9169 78 STA 369 Y 6D84
223. hat bear the protection for magnetic disks by guarding against 527 dx RockRoy m rk af quality A em On mess confimori handling Hazards Y eds D SEE Contact yaur Dealer or bistibutor A MESE 2 ass ZE TE ATTRACTIVE DiscSaverg signed handsome and 5666 Grey Road p Eus 4 professional method ot single disk storage and OCKROY BS Arizona 85260 ET i the look of your hardware v while M 602 998 1577 yout val able software gt Xie cse ah Ec TTA 2 Prodigcts Divisibrt ARM Free 800 528 2361 tees amp d 5 2 2 2 s 2 227 of RockRoy E 2 oe 4 e 2 MICRO 34 Chelmsford Street P O Box 6502 Chelmsford MA 01824 617 256 5515 Editorial Marjorie Morse Managing Editor Phil Daley Technical Editor Loren Wright Technical Editor Emmalyn H Bentley Assistant Editor Maureen Dube Editorial Assistant John Hedderman Jr Programmer Advertising Bob Mackintosh Sales Manager Dawn Blute Administrative Assistant Magazine Distribution Kathle Maloof Sales Manager Linda Hensdill Assistant Carol A Stark Subscriptions Graphics Helen Betz Art Director Paula Kramer Production Manager Accounting Donna M Tripp Comptroller Kay Collins Bookkeeper Contributing Editors Comelis Bongers Dave Malmberg John Steiner Jim Strasma Paul Swanson
224. have typed the screen correctly No 58 March 1983 save the screen to tape On the VIC 20 press the key and then press 5 for SAVE Type in AVERAGE position the tape and press RETURN Your screen is now stored on tape under the name you entered Loading the Screen Clear the MICRO Calc screen using shift CLR HOME and press the key This time press L for LOAD position the tape enter AVERAGE and press RETURN If all goes well in a few seconds the screen will return with the lines you saved before More Examples According to the Pythagorean Theorem hypoteneuse of a right triangle is equal to the square root of the sum of the squares of the other two sides You can use MICRO Calc to solve right triangles quickly Enter the following lines pressing RETURN after each line A 3 Assign one side equal to 3 B 4 Assign another side equal to 4 SQR A t 2 B f 2 The equation H The answer You can calculate monthly payments of installment loans using the following formula iis the interest rate per month and m is the number of months The principal the amount you are borrowing is divided by D to get the monthly payment Below is the screen you enter to perform these calculations with MICRO Calc A Principal M Number of Months of the Loan Interest Rate Annual Percentage Monthly Interest Rate decimal Calculate Divisor 121 1200 D 1 1 1 t My Curso
225. he device handler after you ve looked at them The second approach that of grab bing the characters before they re printed is much simpler due to careful thinking about output flexibility on the part of Apple s programmers While most device handlers are stored in ROM or EPROM chips all output is directed to these handlers through a pointer in RAM called CSW at loca tions 36 and 37 On an Apple that No 58 March 1983 nmmmm PRINTERS uses only cassette tape for mass storage CSW always holds the address of the current output device handler and all PRINTing is done by checking CSW and sending character codes to the address it contains All you need to do then is to read CSW store the ad dress it holds somewhere in your pro gram and then point CSW at your routine Send the data to the true out put device on line 75 of the program at JSR DOCHAR where the address after JSR is modified after each CALL to point to the correct routine Life is more complex if you use disks Many DOS commands are issued using PRINT commands Thus when a program is running you can t say sim ply PR 1 You have to say PRINT CHR 4 PR 1 The printed CTRL D CHR 4 is there to get DOS s at tention This is true also for commands to open and close files etc To find these CTRL Ds DOS has to grab each character as it goes by and check if it is a CTRL D How does it do that It point
226. he record numbers for anything such as envelope numbers in a church you won t want them changed and should always dump in record number order Loss of Power Even if power goes off to the com puter current relative file data is usually preserved with the key file reverting to its prior contents On the 8050 and later drives a surge protector within the disk system preserves the integrity of diskette data during loss of power On the 4040 and 2040 however a power loss often causes faulty data to be written momentarily Depending on where the read write head is at the time this could be disastrous If your area is prone to such outages make regular backups suspect any diskette in use during a power outage and keep the drive doors open when not access ing the disk i e no files open Better yet buy a backup power supply for about 450 Be sure it protects the disk drive in addition to the computer Multiple Users In Bennett s mail list the relative file remains open until the user is done with the module Usually this is no problem However leaving it open full time does create a problem for those wanting to connect two or more com puters to the same disk drive and have everyone use the same file To do this safely the file would be opened just before information from it is needed and closed again immediately after the data is read or written This ensures data in the DOS buffers gets written to disk so a
227. helps you Then use mail list merging to combine infor mation from your database with your pre printed forms ELECTRONIC MAIL With a Hayes Micromodem you can transfer your docu ments to another compu ter or to your local typeset ter for printing SPELLING CHECKER Eas ier to use than any other spelling checker Ours comes with 10 000 words and a capacity for 15 000 more Or you can start your own list from scratch Docu ments are scanned and you are shown misspellings in context Correct them on the fly or add words to the dictionary as you scan 75 00 option ABLE ORDER BY PHONE Available at your local dealer or call us at 612 929 7104 We accept VISA MasterCard Ask for The Executive Secretary at your local dealer Circle No 34 55 Lyco Computer Marketing amp Consultants TO ORDER CALL US SPECIAL PURCHASE DESIGNER TEE SHIRT with PURCHASE of 800 48K 489 00 FREE ATARI HARDWARE 410 CASSETTE RECORDER 75 00 825 PRINTER 830 PHONE MODEM 850 INTERFACE PACKAGES 482 EDUCATOR CX483 PROGRAMMER CX488 COMMUNICATOR CX419 BOOKKEEPER KX7104 ENTERTAINER SOFTWARE CXL4012 MISSILE COMMAND 28 75 CXL4013 ASTEROID 28 75 CXL4020 CENTIPEDE 32 75 CXL4022 PACMAN 32 75 CXL4011 STAR RAIDER 34 75 CXL4004 BASKETBALL 26 75 CXL4006 SUPER BREAKOUT 28 75 CXL4008 SPACE INVADER 28 75 CX8130 CAVERNS OF MARS 31 75 CX4108 HA
228. her I have some more memory loca tions and functions for you this month The start address of a BASIC program is located in memory locations 25 and 26 The end address is stored in locations 27 and 28 An interface with a machine language routine could be done easily with this information You can CSAVEM the BASIC program along with a machine language driver The driver could auto execute and do a JMP to AE75 the start address of the RUN routine This procedure creates an auto executing BASIC program You may contact John at 508 Fourth Ave N W Riverside ND 58078 INCRO No 58 March 1983 NEW FROM amp MICRO PRODUCTS INC Z80A CPU with 4MHz clock and CP M 2 2 operating system 64K of low power static RAM Calendar time clock Centronics type parallel printer interface Serial inter face for terminal communications dip switch baud rates of 150 to 9600 4 cooling fan with air intake on back of computer and discharge through ventilation in the bot tom No holes on computer top or side for entry of foreign object Two 8 single or double sided floppy disk drives IBM single density 3740 format for 243K of storage on each drive Using double density with 1K sectors 608K of storage is available on a single sided drive or 1 2 meg on a double sided drive Satin finish extruded aluminum with vinyl woodgrain decorative finish 8 slot backplane for expansion 48 pin buss is compatible with most OS
229. her in a hierarchy so that there are subchains and sub subchains This structure makes it possible to build large and complicated data bases LINK CREATE HOME 1 INPUT ENTER NUMBER OF RECORDS 52 5 CD CHR 4 ONERR GOTO 26 PRINT CD DELETE LINK FILE PRINT CD OPEN LINK FILE Ld PRINT CD WRITE LINK FILE R PRINT PRINT 1 FOR J 1 TO 52 PRINT CD WRITE LINK FILE R J PRINT A PRINT A PRINT A PRINT A PRINT A PRINT A PRINT AS IF J SZ THEN PRINT 0 GOTO 5d PRINT J 1 NEXT PRINT CD CLOSE LINK FILE LINK PROG Listing on next page LINK PROG 10 DIM FIRST 2 DIM LAST 2 DIM SRT 2 DIM CITY 2 DIM S T 2 DIM ZIP 2 DIM TEL 2 DIM NXT 2 20 CD CHR 4 NW 1 WR 2 30 PRINT CD OPEN LINK FILE L8Q 100 HTAB 4 VTAB 2 PRINT A DD C HANGE D ELETE Q UIT 110 4 VTAB 3 PRINT I NQU IRE GET A 120 IF A A THEN GOTO 1000 130 IF A C THEN 2000 140 IF A D THEN GOTO 3000 145 IF A I THEN 2500 150 IF A Q THEN PRINT CD PRINT CD CLOSE LINK FILE END 160 GOTO 140 1000 REM ADD RECORDS 1005 GOSUB 4000 REM HEADER 1010 IF NA 0 THEN INVERSE HOME PRINT VTAB 10 PRINT FI LE FULL NORMAL FOR K 1 TO 2000 NEXT K GOTO 100 1015 HOME GOSUB 6000 REM GET INPUTS 1020 NR NA R NA GOSUB 5000 REM GET NEW RECORD 1030 NA NXT OLD 1040 IF FIC THEN NXT NW FIC
230. his location equiva lent to location 66 in the 48K system is in the DOS key word data Note that the name of your HELLO pro gram starts at relative location 75 hex in this sector If you want to MICRO ib here does not change the volume TALOG command All routines m Zero page storage 2F where rom the Address Block at the odified You may be able to wevet to have DOS look at the odification to DOS so that a desire instead of the actual nal places during initialization P 4 Byte BF 2 Sector 4 Byte F9 miplement E olume number change Track I anges the code from LDA 37F6 to changing Track 2 Sector 2 Byte AF the CATALOG looks like DISK 000 Incidentally the above loce volum rogram the MICRO utility disk now modify the bytes on a disk ou receive Applesoft Variable Bongers e source is not included Box 6502 Chelmsford change the name of the startup pro gram make the changes at that loca tion on the disk Now write sector 1 9 back out to disk The third location that should b modified is in sector 17 0 in th VTOC table Load the sector int memory and change relative locatio 6 to the new volume number Nov write this sector back out to the disk In summary the locations tha must be changed to the new volum number are as follows 1 sector 0 1 displacement EB hex 2 sector 1 9 displacement 66 hex 3 sector 1
231. horough In addition the booklet gives a concise discus sion of 6809 programming techniques including a good primer on position independent code Skill level required Novice assembly language progammer Reviewer Ralph Tenny Product Name Alphabet Squares Equip req d Apple II with Applesoft 48K RAM and DOS 3 3 Price 29 95 Manufacturer Versa Computing Inc 3541 Old Conego Rd Suite 104 Newbury Park CA 91320 Description Young children can practice initial consonant and vowel sounds using keys paddles or joystick to move a happy face cursor to one of the three hi res pictures of letters The correct one chosen is then redisplayed full screen This continues until all letters have been correctly matched Pluses Kids like it and it reinforces letter sounds Attrac tive graphics use color intermixing for varied shades and textures Not copy protected modifiable BASIC code Minuses More could be done to maintain enduring in terest Music is marginal Paddles usable but awkward keyboard OK joystick is best Not protected against RESET or CTRL C Documentation Durable plastic covered storage folder is attractive and adequate Skill level required Ability to recognize letters by sight Reviewer Jon R Voskuil No 58 March 1983 Circle No 60 Personal Switcher POWER SUPPLY For Lab or Original Equipment FEATURES Efficient 30kHz switching frequency Four Models satisfy
232. ht margin and more Here I explain how you connect your MX 80 printer to the Rockwell AIM 65 Included are the driver routines that provide access to the many features of your printer through the user device function of the AIM 65 No 58 March 1983 With minor changes these routines can be used with printers other than Epson The MX 80 comes standard with a Centronics compatible parallel inter face Details on this interface are pro vided in Appendix K of the original MX 80 user s manual or Appendix 0 of the Graftrax Plus manual The inter face consists of eight data lines three handshaking lines and several special printer status and control signals Connecting the MX 80 to the Rockwell AIM 65 computer through its parallel interface is straightforward and simple Table 1 shows the connections to drive the MX 80 through Port B of AIM s User 6522 VIA Versatile Inter face Adaptor Only the eight data lines and two of the handshake lines are re quired for basic communication Use of the other lines is left up to the reader s imagination A cable con sisting of ten twisted pairs should be used between the computer and the printer Ribbon cable may be used if the cable is kept short At the printer end using an Amphenol type 57 30360 by Larry R Hollibaugh or equivalent connector connect one line of each pair to each signal pin Connect the other line of each pair to the associated return pin If using rib b
233. ically blanked 10 IR mode 3 is the only mode that I have not found any reason to implement and can t recall seeing any programs that use it If you want to implement IR mode 3 you need a complete custom character set It is fairly simple to alter a mode display list to use IR mode 3 The Atari 1200 has only two joy stick ports using the locations of PORTA PORTB doesn t exist The new arrangement of the keyboard makes more sense The BREAK key is no longer on the keyboard next to BACK S which should eliminate unin tentional BREAKs while you are trying to run your programs The new function keys as well as most of the keys on the keyboard are programmable There are three 64 byte maps in memory that define the code for the key alone SHIFT plus the key and CTRL plus the key Like the Atari 400 the Atari 1200 has only one cartridge slot Some third party cartridges will not work on the 1200 because there is a slight difference in the physical dimensions of the slot but the Atari cartridges will work fine Except for situations where the soft ware calls for game controllers in ports 3 and 4 and for cartridges in the right slot the 1200 should be fully upwards compatible as far as software If you obeyed the restrictions outlined in the operating system manual instead of looking for ways to cheat in the operating system listing your software should work on the 1200 Restoring Registers The vertical
234. ices are XNZVC Devices connected to the reset pin Opwort Format 151413121110 9 87 6 524 3 3 STOP Load D Th data is placed i in i die SR an CCR 2 Status the PC is advanced to the next instruction but XNZVC Register processing Stops at this point Execution i Depends on and Stop of instructions resumes when a trace Immediate 2 Wee Me interrupt t condition occurs Data E itd PIS 245 1413 12111098765 4 3 22 ro EEEPEEPREB 4 Immediate Data PCT RTE Retum The SR and pulled fom the system stack CCR fom 22222 processing continues at the PC pulled fr m XNZVC Exception the stack in either user or supervisor state pulled from 1 depending the S bit in the Status s Register S Stack polly from the stack 7 Opword Format No 58 March 1983 1 14131211 10 9 67 65 432110 Word Data 2151413 9876543 MICRO V Full Screen Editing Copy Move sentences paragraphs v Insert Delete letters sentences V Form letters User defined data v Shorthand words phrases Centering Justification Tabs v Headers Footers set page size v Automatic Page Numbering Double columns set margin line size Y Printer graphics send hex codes V Set up to support most printers V Disk file concatenation Y Program upd
235. ies may be made without read varify Disk 24 95 JJG products are available at computer stores B Dalton Booksellers and independent dealers around the world If IJG products are not available from your local dealer order direct Include 4 00 for shipping and handling per item Foreign residents add 511 00 plus purchase price per item U S funds only please Inc 1953 W lith Street Upland California 91786 Phone 714 946 5805 If tt sfrom Le IT S JUST GREAT ATARI TM Warner Communications inc MICRO Three new ATARI books for the serious programmer and beginner are now distributed by 1JG for use with the ATARI 400 and 800 microcomputer systems ideas on how to computer games BASIC examples bu advanced No 58 March 1983 A Versatile Hi Res Graphics Routine for the APPLE by Adam P King You can design and use multicolored high resolution shapes on the Apple Software is provided for shape collisions animation and exclusive OR drawing Graphics Sub requires Apple 1 with 48K and Applesoft One of the deciding factors for my pur chasing an Apple rather than another micro was the Apple s graphics capabil ities The prospect of using the Apple to produce arcade style games was par ticularly inviting Applesoft BASIC comes equipped with its own graphics routines However when using these routines to make my own games many inadequacies became apparent The programs prese
236. ilities including tests for RAM memory ROM memory Language Cards Memory Cards DISK system Drive Speed Keyboard Printer CPU Peripherals Tape Ports Monitors and more These tests will thoroughly test the operation of your Apple and either identify a specific problem area or give your system a clean bill of health You can even log the test results to your printer for a permanent record Apple Cillin Il works with any 48K Apple system equipped with one or more disk drives To order Apple Cillin Il and to receive information about our other products Call XPS Toll Free 1 800 233 7512 In Pennsylania 1 717 243 5373 Apple Cillin 49 95 PA residents add 6 State Sales Tax XPS Inc 323 York Road Carlisle Pennsylvania 17013 800 233 7512 717 243 5373 XPS Apple li is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc Circle No 51 83 Circle No 52 BOX 120 ALLAMUCHY N J 07820 inc 201 362 6574 HUDSON DIGITAL ELECTRONICS INC THE TASK MASTERS supports the AIM SYM and TASK with a growing line of computer programs and peripheral components All component boards are state of the art 4 x 6 with on board regulation of all required voltages fully compatible with the KIM 4 bus OMNIDISK 65 8 and 65 5 Single and dual drive 8 and 5 disk systems Complete ready to plug in bootstrap and run Include HDE s proprietary operating system FODS
237. ill continue to plot even if off screen BROKEN LINES Draws hidden or dotted lines instead of solid lines FILL Draws a line from the last plotted point then fills all areas to the right with solid color Fill lines cross screen unless stopped by a drawn line or plotted point TEXT Controls text Enter a text string then position cursor Text string will be plotted below and to the right of the cursor Text will wrap around the edges of the screen You may use all 256 characters including inverse and control characters LINECOLOR Chooses color for lines press 1 2 or 3 Color 4 is the background color so it acts as an eraser Set specific hues with the SELECT option CLEAR Erases the entire screen NEW FONT Controls character style Load a new character set from tape or disk Characters from that set will appear only in the graphics window Change character sets at any time No 58 March 1983 SAVE SCREEN Saves files Press S to save your picture as a data file If you are using a disk drive enter a complete filename LOAD SCREEN Loads files Press L to load a previously saved data file If you don t like DIGI DRAFT s sound simply eliminate lines 135 420 and 1550 When you are saving or loading files to and from a disk you must use complete filenames such as D1 FILENAME EXT Cassette users may wish to change nine lines to those in the cassette revision listing 2 otherwise type C whenever you re asked to
238. ion to LOGO and Computer Literacy for Teachers To help the schools prepare for a future in which computer courses may be required teachers are invited to bring their classes to the Learning Center for a working introduction to computers designed to fit any age group Individuals are offered one day sessions to help balance checking accounts and budgets perform diet analysis or even learn a new computer game Intensive courses can help the novice grasp the elements of computer savvy or provide added job skills Children Know the Most The Center is attracting a cross section of society young and old with little or no knowledge of computing According to Gerry Paquin M Ed Marketing Director and Education Consultant for The Computer Mart of NH and task force member of the Learning Center of all the people enrolling in the classes the children know the most They are being exposed to computers at school and at home or have had some prior experience on the few terminals the NH Children s Museum at the Arts and Science Center provided before the Learning Center opened The adults are the real novices they are curious to know How can it the computer help organize my information whether it be at home or at work How can it simplify certain things that I do repetitively There is a drive for learning a gusto for I ve got to find out about this because it s new and it s happening and I want to be in
239. ith the assistance of Motorola Inc BCD Instructions This month I have included a table of BCD instructions see table 1 These instructions are similar to BCD opera tions in most microprocessors except that there are only three instructions implemented in the 68000 The basic instruction operates on packed BCD data stored in memory in the byte mode The traditional method used to implement complex operations on BCD data is to convert the BCD to binary perform the operations on the binary data and then reconvert to BCD Privileged Instructions The privileged instructions in table 2 are used by the processor when exe cuting programs in the supervisor state The supervisor state of the 68000 is considered to be a protected state i e the user operating in the user mode does not have easy access to the super visor state When in the supervisor state the 68000 can make use of the full instruction set However when the processor is in the user state privileged instructions cannot be executed If the user attempts to execute any one of the privileged instructions the processor will go into exception processing When entering exception processing the S bit in the status register is set to 1 and the trace bit is set to O Exception processing can be entered two ways by internal sources or by external sources Internal sources con sist of the following instructions such as TRAP TRAPV CHK division by 0 No 58 M
240. l required Even pre schoolers should be able to learn this language Reviewer Jim Strasma 94 MICRO Product Name The Arithmetic Classroom Decimals Equip req d Apple II Plus or Apple II with Applesoft DOS 3 3 Price 49 95 Manufacturer Sterling Software Sterling Swift Publishing Co 7901 South IH 35 Austin TX 78704 Authors Patricia M Mullinix David N McClintock and Fawzy T Ibrahim of Courses By Computers Inc Description Decimals is one of a series of eight programs covering addition subtraction multiplication division fractions and decimals This objective based tutorial has plenty of practice exercises but is not just a drill program At the end of each lesson is a mastery test Pluses The tutorial approach allows each type of problem to be explained first Good feedback is provided correct answers prompt encouraging messages incorrect answers prompt hints The program also covers converting words two tenths to numeral format Minuses Program covers converting mixed fractions to decimals but only fractions with powers of ten denominators Documentation Well written manual has clear instruc tions practice paper exercises with answer key and achievement record forms Disk programs are easy to use Skill level required An understanding of fractions No pro gramming required Reviewer Mary Gasiorowski Software Development System SDS80C Product Name Equip
241. l still change the memory area that the operating system thinks the screen occupies SET COLOR as well as SOUND and a few other statements write to shadow registers so they simply set up the shadow registers for the new screen without affecting the current screen For ATARI e Highest quality available Reduces heat 48K Board 32K Board 4007800 16K Board 800 INTEC ConP 906 E Highland Ave San Bernardino CA 92404 VISA ATARI 400 800 Trademarks of ATARI Inc 714 881 1533 Circle No 8 No 58 March 1983 PERIPHERALS Compatibility Note The Commodore 64 has several features that are similar to those found on the Atari One external feature is the pair of control ports The 64 has two jacks that are pin compatibile with the Atari controller jacks so any device set up for the Commodore 64 control ports will probably work without alteration on the Atari controller jacks Commo dore s PORTA and are not the same as the Atari PORTA and PORTB so you will have to reshuffle the soft ware a little I recently had my Atari computer talking to a Commodore 64 through these controller ports and the differences were mainly the method of setting up the ports for mixed input and output and the memory location of the ports themselves RAM 48K RAM BOARD FOR THE 400 with Lifetime Warranty Reduces power consumption 150 90 60 FREE SHIPPING ANYWH
242. lays any message of your choice on a scrolling screen DIGI DRAFT by Tim Kilby DIGI DRAFT is a graphics program that allows images to be drawn on the screen with convenient commands The Computer Revolution Reaches Out to the Community by Emmalyn H Bentley MICRO Calc for the VIC 20 A look at the new Microcomputing Learning by Loren Wright Center in Nashua N H who is enrolling what A computer worksheet program that allows you courses are offered and how the Center is 5 to define series of calculations and preform contributing to the community as a whole them at the touch of a key No 58 March 1983 MICRO 45 JE FULL POWER OF YOUR O AT YOUR COMMAND s newest book RING YOUR VIC 20 with eight BASIC projects MICRO Calc for Commodore and APPLE by Loren Wright Minor changes provided for Commodore 64 and all PET models Equivalent program for Apple computers is presented on page 53 What is MICRO Calc The electronic spread sheet is one of the most popular types of business programs available The first program of this kind VisiCalc now sold by VisiCorp has been credited with Apple s big impact on the business market A spread sheet program lets you perform mathematical computations on the video display You enter formulas and data directly into the display via the keyboard Commercial spread sheet packages offer a large array of cells into which you can progra
243. le Unlike the Apple soft routines this routine excludes a Rotation and Scale function thereby gaining additional speed Collisions Applesoft routines do not detect shape collisions They are extremely difficult to implement within a program using only Applesoft commands Multicolored shapes In the cur rent form of Applesoft graphics defin ing a single shape containing more than one color is impossible Multicolored shapes are achieved only by super imposing one colored shape on another a slow and tedious procedure The routine presented here remedies the above problems and meets the rest of the criteria In addi tion this routine provides an easy to implement form of animation Entering the Graphics Routine Entering the graphics routine is a three part procedure 1 Enter the BASIC program in listing 1 Make Tables and run it This sets up two tables which are used by the graphics routine 2 Enter machine language call 151 MICRO and input the program in listing 2 Graphics Sub This is the actual routine 3 Re enter BASIC 3DOG and type BSAVE GRAPHICS SUB A 800 18300 Enter and save the programs listings 3 and 4 The first Shape Definer allows you to construct shapes The second Shape Table De finer takes these individual shapes and composes a shape table for use with the graphics routine Defining a Shape Before using Shape Definer it is a good idea to draw the shap
244. line is to delete from the right end and Avoiding Errors To alleviate the chance for problems MICRO Calc disallows characters that could cause trouble However if you are not careful it is easy to make a fatal error The program will stop and an error message such as SYNTAX ERROR or DIVISION BY ZERO ERROR will be printed Should one of these occur clear the screen type RUN and press RETURN You will have lost everything that was on the screen but you shouldn t have to reload the program from cassette If you use parentheses to assign a variable for example C A BJ be sure there are as many right parens as left parens Also remember that unlike in algebra multiplication here must be explicitly indicated with an asterisk Use 10 B and 5 A not 10B and 5 A If you use a variable that has not been assigned in a previous line its value is assumed to be zero Therefore division by an unassigned variable will result in a DIVISION BY ZERO ERROR Saving the Screen To save a format for re use type in just the assignments A B and the formulas C and then save to tape without running the program For example clear the MICRO Calc screen using shift CLR HOME and type in the second example bowling average without any values for A B and C Don t press The program would crash but this is the most convenient form for saving the screen When you are satisfied you
245. ll programming levels VIC 1212 Programmer s Aid Cartridge 45 99 More than 20 new BASIC commands help new and experienced programmers renumber trace and edit BASIC programs Trace any program line by line as it executes pause to edit Special KEY command lets programmers redefine function keys as BASIC commands subroutines or new commands VIC 1213 VICMON Machine Language Monitor 48 99 Helps machine code programmers write last efficient 6502 assembly language programs Includes one line assembler disassembier NEW GAMES FOR YOUR VIC 209 CC58 Astroblitz This game is challenging even to 39 95 VIC MASTER Navigate your stup carefully to avoid being hit by enemy fire CC60 Terraguard speed and caretul skill will enable you to 39 95 once again destroy the aliens Too slow You re destroyed by their beam CC98 Serpentine This game will test your patience amp 39 95 Skill Object to survive long enough to lay eggs and raise your young CC500 Intruder Scrambler in your bomber invade the 19 95 defending scramble system dodging rockets to blow up enemy posts etc CC101 Choplifter Rescue the American hostages amp return 39 95 them safely to the U S You encounter tanks jets and killer satellites CC102 Black Hole vour mission is simply to survive Your 39 95 Ship must not be hit by space objects or sucked into the Black Hole CC104 Apple Panic Speed is required Destroy the 39 95 apple monsters by digging holes in
246. ll users are working with the same information If you will have Circle No 55 Program from Commodore ROM emulator Jumper to target ROM socket Test programs in circuit Built in EPROM programmer and power supply Commodore VIC 20 too Comprehensive manuals Fits EXPANSION PORT VIC 20 USERS cet serious with a Acartridge development system VIC 20 keyboard into built in 4IK e Burns amp runs EPROMS for the Includes Hexkit 1 0 a powerful 100 machine code editor de bugger utility program that makes coding for 8 bit Micros a snap Programs 2716 2732 2732A 27C16 27C32 adaptable to 2532 amp 2764 PROMQUEEN CARTRIDGE COMPLETE ONLY 199 GLOUCESTER COMPUTER zc Distributed in U S by Arbutus Total Soft Inc 4202 Meridian Suite 214 Bellingham WA 98226 Phone 800 426 1253 in Washington 206 733 0404 Distributed in Canada by IBC Distribution Canada 4047 Cambie St Vancouver BC V5Z 2x9 Phone 604 879 7812 Send for Free Brochure 88 MICRO multiple users you may also want to add a special one character field to the record itself This would be a busy signal to other users If it has one value it would mean it is not in use and anyone may use it If it has another value someone is looking at that record In that case no one else should be allowed to change it Otherwise there could be two versions of one record active at once Single
247. long with a BASIC subroutine that permits plotting of either a mathematical function or a user generated array on a grid with labelled axes Hi Res Plotting requires VIC 20 5K or more VIC 1515 or VIC 1525 printer Mathematical relationships are best analyzed in the form of a graph Even an inexpensive computer like the VIC 20 can be used to produce such a graph if the computer is used with a pin programmable dot matrix printer For those who own the VIC 20 Commodore has provided a very cap able printer the VIC 1515 which has features that make plotting easy Although most people probably will purchase the 1515 for program listings and data printout only it comes with some very powerful graphics and for matting commands The commands Figure 1 5x7 dot matrix tor printer character A oooeooe No 58 March 1983 are explained thoroughly in the manual that accompanies the unit and the pro gram presented here uses most of them The newer VIC 1525 printer uses standard width paper but is pro grammed similarly The 1515 has three major operating modes When first powered up or after receiving a CHR 15 it is in the standard character mode which permits printing of all alphanumeric and keyboard graphics characters avail able on the screen This mode is used for program listings and normal data printout Acces
248. lor Computer 6809 machine language No 58 March 1983 MICRO 111 pac ne eA EIN TSC SH PP A Oo TIT ERO SRN National Advertising Representatives West Coast The R W Walker Co Inc Gordon Carnie 2716 Ocean Park Boulevard Suite 1010 Santa Monica California 90405 213 450 9001 serving Washington Oregon Idaho Montana Wyoming Colorado New Mexico Arizona Utah Nevada California Alaska and Hawaii also British Columbia and Alberta Canada Mid West Territory Thomas Knoor amp Associates Thomas H Knoor Jr 333 N Michigan Avenue Suite 707 Chicago Illinois 60601 312 726 2633 serving Ohio Oklahoma Arkansas Texas North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska Kansas Missouri Indiana Illinois lowa Michigan Wisconsin and Minnesota Middle Atlantic and Southeastern States Dick Busch Inc Richard V Busch 6 Douglass Dr R D 4 Princeton NJ 08540 201 329 2424 Dick Busch Inc Eleanor M Angone 74 Brookline E Atlantic Beach 11561 516 432 1955 serving New York Pennsylvania New Jersey Delaware Maryland West Virginia Virginia D C North Carolina South Carolina Loui sianna Tennessee Mississippi Alabama Georgia and Florida le ee RITE Next Month in MICRO April Communications Feature Computers are reshaping trends in the communications field Find out what s happening by reading the April issue of MICRO You ll also discover informa tion on system specific
249. ls until later One popular decoder has three address input lines and eight mutually exclusive active low outputs In effect if the three most significant address lines 13 15 are decoded the eight outputs will divide the 64K memory address space into eight 8K blocks with only one block enabled at a time If you refer to figure 3 the signature DECODE working in junction with R W and Q produces the latch enable signal STROBE shown in proper time rlationship in figure 2 As a result of the unique combina tion of signals the circuit of figure 3 will capture six of the eight bits of the data appearing on the data bus when STROBE comes true U2 will hold this data on its output pins until power fails or new data is written into the latch In other words the latch output can be considered as a permanent copy of the data that was available for only 6 pSec If you have a question or want to suggest a topic for discussion in this column please write to me at P O Box 545 Richardson TX 75080 Figure 2 left A basic timing diagram for the 6809E microprocessor show ing the timing relationships during a WRITE cycle The bottom wave form shows the timing response of the CMOS NOR gate U1 shown in figure 3 MICRO Figure 3 below One possible schematic diagram to implement a data latch on the 6809E bus U1 generates the proper strobe to cause U2 to capture the data shown in figure 2
250. m labels or values The values can be defined in very complex ways including values calculated in other cells The applications range from accounting to inventory to printing bar graphs Once your sheet is defined for a particular application you can save it and use it again and again for that application MICRO Calc is a miniaturized version of one of these spread sheet programs Instead of cells you have ten lines on the screen with which to work MICRO Calc is a short program that allows you to perform even very elaborate calculations at the touch of a key In addition MICRO Calc can be used to learn how BASIC functions work The format is similar to how BASIC programs themselves are written As presented MICRO Calc runs in an unexpanded VIC The minor changes described allow the program to take advantage of more memory in the VIC to use a disk drive or to run on the PET or Commodore 64 For the Apple use the equivalent program by Phil Daley on page Entering the Program Type the program in exactly as it is shown in listing 1 Do not include any spaces unless they appear within quotes If your machine is not a VIC be sure to make the changes described for No 58 March 1983 your machine at the end of this article When you have finished typing check carefully against the listing correct any errors and SAVE the program to a cassette if you don t have a cassette you ll have to retype this program for every session you
251. mentation Available High Technology Software Products Inc P O Box 14665 2201 N E 63rd St Oklahoma City OK 73113 404 478 2105 MICRO Name Super Image Saver Printer SISP PET CBM 2001 3000 4000 8000 16K RAM minimum Language BASIC original Upgrade or 4 0 Hardware Any Commodore graphics printer w programmable line spacing optional Description If you like or need to draw pictures charts schematics diagrams etc on the PET CBM screen using PET s graphics but can t stand typing in the program then SISP is for you SISP lets you draw simple or complex full Screen pictures save print modify and recall them with ease The program comes fully documented and steps the user through the complete process Price 9 95 cassette 14 95 on 4040 2031 disk Author Louis F Roehrs Available TELE TREX Software Systems 4 Waring Lane Littleton CO 80121 303 770 8144 System Memory Name The Dimensional Analysis of the Great Pyramid System Apple Memory 48K Language Applesoft Hardware One disk drive Description Programs include modern and ancient measure ments of the three chambers principle triangles and coffer Volume magnitudes are em phasized The programs are a mixture of theory and history based on 25 years of research Programs on Archimedes Cat tle Problem and Rhind Mathe matical Papyrus are included Price 25 00 Includes diskette Available Louis
252. more printer commands The general form of the PRNT call is CALL PRNT LM RM PN ST PL 1 where the parameter names LM etc are as defined in table 1 For example with a 132 column printer you might CALL PRNT 15 117 5 10 65 Output would be indented by 15 blank spaces LM The right margin would be 117 characters from the left edge not margin of the page The page number printed for the first page of output would be 5 Ten linefeeds would be in serted between each page of output and each page counting the step over linefeeds would be 66 lines long The example above contains a lot of parameters to bother with each time you call the routine Often your para meters won t change from one call to the next or you might be happy with certain default values such as those in table 1 You can omit specifying a new value for any parameter either by leav ing out the number but typing in the comma separating it from the next parameter or by terminating the list early with a carriage return or colon The values assigned to these para meters are the ones used the last time you called the routine or if none have been specified by the default values loaded into the appropriate locations when the program was brought into memory from the disk For example CALL PRNT with no parameters leaves all parameters as they were before CALL PRNT 80 50 defaults the left margin the step and the page number 10 FORI 1 TO 16 20 REM NEST
253. most any micro on the market serial or parallel THE MASTER The Printmaster F 10 Does all the same good stuff as the Starwriter except at 55 cps the Master does it faster Distributed Exclusively by Leading Edge Products 225 Turnpike Street Canton Massachusetts 02021 toll free 1 800 343 56 3 OF ikl Masse husetts all collec t GEZI 8928 9150 lek 951 624 Circle 70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 VisiCalc is a registered trademark of VisiCorp MAGICALC is a trademark of Artsci Inc Circie No t 2MHZ 6809 SYSTEMS GIMIX offers you a variety to choose from 38 MB WINCHESTER SYSTEM 17 498 99 HARDWARE FEATURES x 2MHz 6809 CPU x DMA Double Density Floppy Disk Controller x 512KB Static RAM x Dual 8 DSDD Floppy Disk System x 8 RS232C Serial Ports x Dual Winchester Subsystem with x 2 Parallel Ports Two19 MB 5 Winchester Drives SOFTWARE FEATURES x OS 9 LEVEL TWO Multi User OS 9 Text Editor Operating System OS 9 Assembler 05 9 Debugger 19 WINCHESTER 8 8 8998 09 HARDWARE FEATURES 128K Static Ram 4 RS232C Serial Ports 2MHz 6809 CPU 1MB 5 Floppy Disk Drive 19 MB 5 4 Winchester DMA Subsystem DMA Double Density Floppy Disk Controller SOFTWARE FEATURES OS 9 LEVEL TWO Multi User OS 9 Debugger Operating System OS 9 Assembler OS 9 Text Editor 128KB MULTI USER SYSTEM
254. multiple label and default options and instant ac cess to any record Diskette version up to 2400 records can later adapt to hard disk version up to 32 000 records Price 125 00 diskette 250 00 Corvus hard disk Includes complete documentation Author Joe Marinello Available Satori Software 5507 Woodlawn N Seattle WA 98103 Name MicRo Math Blaster System TRS 80 Model VIC 20 Memory 16K TRS 80 8K VIC 20 Language BASIC Description MicRo Math Blaster offers a combination of arcade game excitement and basic mathematic drill in addi tion subtraction multiplica tion and division with levels of difficulty from grades one through eight Price 15 95 Includes instruction manual Available M R Information Systems Inc P O Box 73 Wayne NJ 07470 No 58 March 1983 amp FOR YOUR APPLE II SOFTWARE ARTSCI List Magicalc 149 00 Magic Window Il 149 00 DBase Apple 695 00 BRODERBUND Payroll 395 00 34 95 Arcade Machine 44 95 Serpentine 34 95 Home Accountant 74 95 Home Accountant Plus 150 00 DATAMOST Snackattack 29 95 t o eee 29 95 Swashbuckler 34 95 Zorkl It or lll 39 95 Starcross 39 95 Format ll 250 00 System Saver amp 59 95 ultiplan 275 00 ON LIN
255. must be done The BIT command performs an AND between the accumulator and the con tents of a memory location setting the right flags but leaving the accumulator alone So if you can find a memory location holding 60 you re in business Since 60 is the machine code for RTS BIT RTS1 does exactly this job From there you branch around the line updating the position of the print head if you do have a control character To intercept the data your routine must count each character printed to tell when the right margin is reached At that point it breaks the line car riage returns and tabs inserts blanks in the printout to the left margin The routine also needs to detect carriage returns sent from BASIC in order to tab over for the next line after these and to check if a new page should be started To accomplish this at some point you have to pass every character being sent to the printer through your routine counting non control characters car riage returns etc To do this you must find out where the subroutine control ling output to the printer modem TV or whatever device is active is located in memory After finding it you can either direct it to pass control to your program after it s done printing the character which is rather tricky if that routine is in ROM and is thus un modifiable or you can find out as well what routine calls this output routine modify that one instead and then pass characters to t
256. n Go Sailing with the Sailor pg 76 84 game for the 6809 based Color Computer Bruck Bill Maintain a Mail List with this Program pg 86 90 complete mailing list program for the 32K Color Computer Lewandowski Dennis Assembly Language Makes Good Graphics Easy pg 92 94 tutorial for the Color Computer Nolan Bill Make Monsters from Silicon And Use Them pg 106 109 Use the Color Computer to generate demons for your fantasy program Garrett Ron Accounts Receivable Program Can Help You pg 118 126 Use the Color Computer to set up a disk based accounts receivable program to maintain balances on accounts of money owed you 114 80 Micro No 34 November 1982 Shorter Andrew Annual Salary as an Indicator of the Value of Your Savings pg 18 program for the TRS 80 Color Computer Commander Jack CCFORTH pg 45 46 FORTH for the TRS 80 Color Computer Norman Scott L Colorterm pg 63 64 cassette program that converts a 16K or 32K Color Com puter into an intelligent terminal Barden William Jr Color Computer on Parade Part pg 80 87 tutorial on graphics and the GET and PUT commands Freeman Jimmy L More Color Conversions pg 164 170 Converting TRS 80 Model I programs to Color Computer listings Fowler John D Jr Astrodynamics for Beginners pg 205 210 Use your Color Computer to explore the basic la
257. n is indirect and takes significantly more processing time than a similar machine language subroutine I find that for my purposes Pascal supports scientific programs admirably THIS FUNCTION RAISES Y TO THE X POWER Note Apple Pascal users must USE S the TRANSCEND library unit in their main program FUNCTION EXP2 X Y REAL REAL BEGIN EXP2 EXP X LN Y END CARD CARD PRINT UNIVERSAL CENTRONICS PARALLEL PRINTER INTERFACE FOR THE VIC 209 Now you can use your VIC 209 with an EPSON MX 80 printer or an OKI DATA printer or a TANDY printer or just about anybody s printer And you don t have to give up the use of your user port MODEM or change to Special printer commands or load any special software driver programs to do it Outputs standard ASCII codes to the printer Plugs in the VIC 209 printer serial i o port Understands all standard VIC 209 print commands No modification to your VIC 209 No special programs required Includes all necessary cables to hook up a standard printer using centronics parallel input MADE IN THE U S A The CARD is a product of CARDCO Inc 79 95 TO ORDER P BOX 18765 WICHITA KS 67218 316 684 4660 Personal checks accepted Allow 3 weeks or COD Add 2 00 Handling charges 2 00 VIC 20 is a registered trademark of Commodore N Ss E No 0 IS THERE LIFE AFTER BASIC YES WITH
258. nd soldered wires directly to the pins mounting the switch in a hole in the side of the printer Once the circuit is in place turn S1 to NORM and run the short program 12 BREAK WIRING PRINTER PC BOARD NOTES 1 HEAVY LINES ARE ORIGINAL PRINTER WIRING 2 EXCLUSIVE OR GATE CIRCUIT 15 FROM RADIO ENGINEERS NOTEBOOK 1980 EDITION 3 IN TEXT WHENEVER BIT 8 I5 HIGH THE CIRCUIT INVERTS BIT 7 EXCHANGING CODES 8419 127 amp 192 255 listed here Then flip to TEXT run the program again and compare the two printouts Be advised that CHR 96 127 and CHR 224 255 are not generated from the keyboard so their swapping will have little practical ef fect In use you will usually keep S1 in the NORM position where the printer will work in standard fashion When you want to print upper and lower case text switch to TEXT and send a CHR 14 to the printer to put it in lower case mode When you see your capital letters right again at last you ll 50 REM AXIOM PRINTER TEST 60 REM 70 REM PRINTS ALL PRINTING CHARACTERS 80 REM IN GRAPHICS amp LOWER CASE MODES 90 REM 100 OPEN4 4 CMD4 PRINTCHRS 8 CHR 12 110 G 15 L CHR 14 120 PRINT CHR GL CHR GL 130 FOR 3270127 140 IFI lt 100 150 PRINTI GSCHRS I LSCHRS GSCHRS I 128 LSCHRS I 128 160 J J 1 IFJ 16THENPRINT J 20 170 NEXT 180 PRI
259. ne 19MB Drive Interface and Software grav s gre ND SA E odd 4288 90 91 includes two 19MB Drives Interface and 6688 91 Contact GIMIX for systems customized to your needs or for more information 50 HZ Export Versions Available GIMIX Inc reserves the right to change pricing and product Specifications at any time without further notice 1337 WEST 37th PLACE CHICAGO ILLINOIS 60609 INC GIMIX and GHOST are registered trademarks of GIMIX Inc FLEX and UniFLEX trademarks of Technical Systems Consultants Inc 31 2 927 5510 05 9 is a trademark of Microware Inc TWX 910 221 4055 1982 GIMIX Inc No 2 About the Cover AGON ROKEN t AD SCREEN Childhood Dreams is one of a series of original oil paintings by Frank Wyman for children s books The computer in dustry is touching all of us even children MICRO s new section The Learning Center caters to beginning computerists including children The graphic of a modern castle was generated by one of the programs appearing in the Learning Center Digi Draft by Tim Kilby page 57 Photo and painting by Frank Wyman Wyman Art Studio Lowell MA 01852 617 459 7819 IAICRO is published monthly by MICRO INK Chelmsford MA 01824 Second Class postage paid at Chelmsford MA 01824 and additional mailing offices USPS Publication N
260. nes 4500 POKE 204 0 4510 GETTS IFT THEN 4510 4520 POKE 204 1 RETURN For the PET use 167 instead of 204 in lines 4500 and 4520 Normally when the GET function is used the cursor is turned off POKEing a 0 into this location turns the flashing cursor on and POKEing a 1 turns it off Incidentally you can change the cursor character from the diamond to anything you want Just change the diamond near the end of line 20 to the desired character If you want to save this or any other enhanced version be sure you don t record over the original version of the program Key 17 1 shift CLR HOME J CLR HOME CRSRup dn 7 CRSR left right shift OFF RVS one appears in a row the number of repeats 2 Space bar precedes the abbreviation 1 2 CU means CTRL 8 58 March 1983 MICRO 49 Twenty working lines If you have particularly lengthy screens you may need more than the ten lines provided Upgrading to twenty lines is easily accomplished by using the lines in between the original ten Several program lines must be changed to accomplish this 30 NL 20 DIMS NL S NL 230 PRINTRB CR GOTO110 270 S LL S LL LL 11 NL PRINTRB CH 20 CD GOTO 110 280 PRINTRB CR 2 CU GOTO 110 7020 PRINTCR S X NEXT RETURN 8520 PRINT YEL S RVS LEFT BL 20 LEN S NEXT PRINT CH CD RETURN Note that the most significant change is a
261. new answer 5 appears on the fourth line Now let s try a more practical example calculating bowling averages Use shifted CLR HOME to clear the screen and type the following pressing RETURN after each line 165 first score in 148 score 173 third score S A B C sum of three scores S display sum 5 13 calculate average score v display average score MICRO 47 Press and after a brief delay the sum of the three scores 486 will appear after the S on the fifth line and the average of the scores 162 after the V on the seventh Of course this procedure is not restricted to bowling scores Any three numbers you want to average could be used To show how similar programming MICRO Calc is to writing BASIC here is a BASIC program that does the same thing as the averages sheet above 10 5 20 INPUT SECOND 5 30 INPUT THIRD SCORE C 40 S A B C 50 PRINT S 60 V S 3 70 PRINT V 80 GOTO 10 The Rules MICRO Calc as you can see is easy to use However it has some rules that must be followed to avoid disastrous results 1 Each line must begin with a letter followed either by a ora z 2 Nothing should be typed after a That is where the program fills in its result 3 After a you must type either a number or a BASIC expression that evaluate
262. ng Subroutine COMMA starts the move by first checking the receiving position of the mask for a comma Finding none it jumps to MOVZE and moves the rightmost data bytes to the mask If it finds a comma in the mask area before finishing the data string this loop decrements the memory pointer at 1A to skip it and stores the data with MOVZE anyway at the next mask location Clean up involves checking the re maining length of the mask for com mas namely from whatever length is left in 1A to zero If it is a comma then CLEAR uses as the fill character whatever character is in the mask that preceeded the comma Line 67 checks for any characters in the mask This ensures that commas in the mask are not cleared 1 a mask of X TOTALS 0 This keeps the comma after the word TOTALS from being edited out Finally END forces the start ad dress of the new X to 200 The length remains the same and you return to the BASIC program Mr Monclova is a systems programmer for a large diversified computer user in Manhattan You may contact Mr Monclova at 229 03 129 Ave Laurelton NY 11413 MICRO MICRO Circle No 30 41 A Full Byte for Your APPLE Printer MN PRINTERS by Mark J Boyd Many modern printers use an 8 bit code but most Apple printer interface cards can send only 7 bit ASCII code This article shows an easy way to add program control of the eighth bit to allow full use
263. nted in this article use a completely independent graphics rou tine to remedy these shortcomings When designing the routine I kept the following criteria in mind as essen tial for arcade style graphics Speed The routine has to be fast to achieve smooth graphics movement Multiple shapes Many shapes must be able to co exist Using different numbers to represent different shapes is ideal Collisions For almost any graphics game it is necessary to know when one shape comes in contact with another shape or object on the screen Multicolored shapes The appeal of multicolored shapes over solid colored shapes is substantial The flavor of most arcade games would be lost with out a diversity of colors Constant background For many arcade style games and especially No 58 March 1983 those of the non shoot em up genre it is important the drawing of shapes does not destroy previously existing back ground design Applesoft BASIC s graphics routine proved limited on three counts speed collisions and multicolored shapes Speed The Applesoft routines often produce a flicker effect when a shape is moved This is especially apparent when solid shapes i e not stick figures are used The routine presented here is considerably faster and is designed to handle solid shapes Speed does not come cheaply however This routine is relatively inefficient in terms of memory storage so I suggest you use a 48K App
264. o the number Put that number where I have a sign and enter POKE 27 INT 256 POKE 28 INT 256 256 Run the program When it starts scrolling press the BREAK key and delete lines 34 to 90 Finally enter 1290 GOTO 1430 Now the program is finished You can save a copy and when you load it in the next time it will load in the machine language also Since the program gets rid of the wait at the beginning the POWER rom COMPUTECH prices J Check the postpaid outstanding Continental documenta U S tion supplied otherwise with AIM65 2 credit Top quality power supply designed to Rockwell s specs for fully populated AIM65 includes overvoltage protection transient sup pression metal case and power cable PSSBC A 5V 2A Reg 24V 5A Avg 2 5A Peak Unreg 64 95 Same but an extra AMP at 5 volts to drive your extra boards PSSBC 3 5V Reg 24V 5A Avg 2 5A Peak Unreg 74 95 The professional s choice in microcomputers AIM65 1K RAM 3429 95 BASIC 2 ROMS 359 95 AIM65 4K RAM 5464 95 ASSEMBLER 1 ROM 532 95 FORTH 2 ROMS 359 95 SAVE EVEN MORE ON COMBINATIONS AIM65 1K PSSBC A 479 95 AIM65 4K PSSBC 3 524 95 We gladly quote on all AIM65 40 and RM65 items as well ORDERS 714 369 1084 P O Box 20054 Riverside 92516 California residents add 6 sales tax r1 kk c e oe kc oe oe e ke oc o
265. ock video output accepts CP M MICRO Cards uses both floppy and hard disk drives The Rover System weighs less than 18 lbs The battery will allow up to six hours of operation with the Multifunction Expansion Unit option 001 Price 1850 00 Computer 2500 00 System Includes Rover 1 Portable Computer Rover Display Unit Multifunction Expansion Unit option 001 and attache carrying case Available Exclusive Dealer Distributer Computer Services Corp 2396 Encinal Station Sunnyvale CA 94087 408 735 0871 Dealer inquiries invited Name Rabble OZI Expansion Board Ohio C1P Superboard 11 Memory 32K RAM plus up to 32K ROM Description The Rabble Ex pansion Board system for the 1 contains 32K CMOS RAM and sockets for 32K ROM A simple modification to the CIP will permit 40K RAM using 2114 Features are Ohio compatible floppy disk controller with motor control and data separator real time interrupt facilities two programmable sound gen erators and amplifier provide six simutaneous sounds to be output at once and user in out expansion is provided for with a peripheral and versatile interface adaptor PIA and VIA A prototype area is available for approximately 20 ICs Price 430 00 90 00 bare board and manual Includes fully socketed fully populated except board tested and set up for 5 drives 8 if requested N C Ninety page manual with circuits Available
266. ogram are likely to puzzle anyone attempting to under stand the code The first is a BIT RTSI command used at line 76 The second is our technique for intercepting data sent to the printer The BIT RTS1 command is a trick that we ran across in the old Apple II Reference Manual the red one now out of print Control characters are not printed on the screen or on the printer so if the program counts these as having been printed it will force a car riage return before the true right margin is reached ASCII control codes are in the range 00 through 1F high bit clear or 80 through 9F high bit set To detect the codes in a straightforward way would require three or more compare and branch instructions which would make our routine too long to fit on page 3 of memory Note however that the ASCII codes are distinguished by having the second and third highest bits clear whether the high bit is set or not Therefore if they MICRO PRINTERS were ANDed with 60 the result would be 00 This is true for all con trol characters and no others Thus if you store the character in the ac cumulator AND it with 60 and test the zero flag you have a control character when Z 1 The only prob lem is that the AND wipes out the ac cumulator in the process You need to keep the character to determine if it s the code for a carriage return in which case tabbing to the left margin and a check on page length
267. oing a printed directory listing without making calls to other tracks or sec tors The following lines will need to be included in any program to access and print this information DISK 2 79 12 1 pg s FOR J 12143 TO 12152 D D CHRS PEEK J NEXT J PRINT DV DIRECTORY D FOR PN TO PN 240 STEP8 If you are using a BEXEC that sup ports up to 14 character directory names the same idea should work but you will have to make that second call to track 12 2 after picking out the Sample Directory OS 65D Ver 3 0 6 2 82 Directory OS65D 17 File Name Track Range OS65D3 0 13 BEXEC 14 14 CHANGE 15 15 CREATE 16 16 DELETE 17 17 DIR 21 21 DIRSRT 22 22 FILIST 23 23 RENAME 24 24 TRACE 25 25 ALCO 34 35 LG15 36 38 SORT 39 39 18 entries free of 32 MICRO stored ID word at the end of the buffer filled by the first call The ID information must be put on the directory track as follows OK EXIT 01 TRACK A CA 2E79 12 1 2 0 Q2F6F 2F6F 23 20 2F70 23 4F 2F71 23 53 2F72 23 36 2F73 23 35 2F74 23 44 2F75 23 20 2F76 23 LF 2F77 23 31 2 78 2337 2F79 23 RET A SA 12 1 2E79 1 You may want to change the protec tion of the track 0 read write code in track 13 by placing a 13 2E80 before going on to the changes shown for 2F6F and on The next time you a direc tory it will be includ
268. on MICRO 61 Circle No 36 ACORN 68666 ATTACHED PROCESSOR FOR THE APPLE II HARDWARE 68000 Microcomputer with 1 e 131 072 Bytes of RAM e 32 768 Bytes of e ment System e Bi Chure or send 10 for 100 page refunded with order for ACORN ACORN SYSTEMS INC 4455 TORRANCE BLVD 4108 e TORRANCE CA 90503 Telephone 213 371 6307 Apple Apple and Applesoft are the trademarks of Apple Computer Zoom HiRes Graphic Printing for Apple Computers Print front or back view of either or both screens Print upright upside down rotated left or right Selectable printing densities for many printers Easily place zoom viewport using on screen crosshairs Large range of scale factors independently selected Load files to either screen in just 5 keystrokes Type upper lower case English or Greek text on screen Attach screen dump to your own programs complete details Real Apple DOS 3 3 format Unprotected backup with COPYA Supports over 70 dot matrix and letter quality printers Supports serial parallel graphic and buffer I O cards Also works with the Basis and Franklin Computers Only 34 95 postpaid or see your dealer Versions without text annotation available for Apple 11 Pascal 34 95 Apple Ill SOS 1 1 544 95 2281 Cobble Stone Court Dayton Ohio 45431 513 426 3579 Dealer inquiries art invited Circle No 37 62 it Mr Paquin claims The hardest part ab
269. on cable alternate signal and ground lines At AIM s Application Connec tor hook up the signal lines as shown in table 1 using a Vector type R 644 or equivalent connector and tie all the return lines to GND The STROBE line pin 1 indicates to the printer that data is available and the ACKNLG line pin 10 signals when the printer is ready to accept more data The 6522 VIA can be contigured to han dle this handshaking automatically The software to handle the interface consists of two parts a routine to initialize the port as outputs with pro per handshaking and a routine to transmit characters These functions are provided by the routines CTINIT and CTOUT in listing 1 The AIM firmware provides the ability to direct output to any of several output devices The subroutine WHEREO E871 allows selection by Table 1 Connections between the AIM 65 s Application Connector and the MX 80 s Centronics Connector AIM 65 Centronics Appl Signal Signal Conn Name Pin 19 CB2 1 9 PBO 2 10 1 3 11 2 4 12 PB3 5 13 PB4 6 16 PBS 7 17 PB6 8 15 PB7 9 18 CB1 10 1 GND MICRO Return Signal Pin Name 19 STROBE 20 DATA 1 21 DATA 2 22 DATA 3 23 DATA 4 24 DATA 5 25 DATA 6 26 DATA 7 27 DATA 8 28 ACKNLG 31 PRINTERS issuing the OUT prompt Answering this prompt with U for User device transfers control to the program pointed to by UOUT at address 10A This is a vector or hook
270. on line may have a name signifying the function of both levels There are at least two common ways to signify the active level the active low state may have a line over the signature or the active low signature may be designated by an asterisk Figure 1 shows the pinout of the 6809 uP used in CoCo you can see 16 address lines A0 A15 and 8 data lines DO D7 If the pP sets the address lines to read one of 65536 2 16 unique memory locations the memory responds by making available one byte eight bits of data on the data lines The uP continuously performs sequen tial operations following instructions in the program Each byte of an instruc tion is located at a unique address in the memory of the computer Besides the address bus 16 lines and the data bus 8 lines already men tioned the pP has some control lines two of which are called R W Read not Write Write is active low and R W signals the memory to furnish data when this line is at logic MICRO one READ is active high or to receive data when R W is at logic zero Q isa timing signal that tells the memory when the data is valid and causes the memory to record data presented dur ing a Write cycle For now I will bypass how a pro gram is placed in memory What you need to visualize is an interface to the real world After all if the computer can t communicate with the world out side its case it can t do use
271. oom for another record the key field described last issue is entered Unlike many packages Ben nett s mail list requires each record to have a unique key When a key is entered the file is binary searched for a match If one is found the new key is rejected This protects against re entering the same name If the key is accepted the user enters the remaining data entry is via a machine language editor that filters out troublesome characters If you enter relative file data without such an editor do not include quota tion marks in the data They would in terfere with the technique used to allow commas colons and semi colons also troublesome in the data PET owners may defang quote marks by adding 64 to their ASCII value making CHR 34 64 But since this doesn t work on the CBM 64 it is often better to just convert quotes into apostrophes After a record is entered the user is asked Any corrections needed Y N If so the user is asked to specify a line to change and that line of data is re entered in an editing subroutine Once the data is accepted the primary and alternate key arrays are updated to in clude the new record a currently un MICRO used record number is assigned to it and the record is written to disk Here is the subroutine used to write out the data 4960 REM WRITE RECORD FROM 01 4970 RECORD 1 4980 IF DS THEN 1690 4990 D K C 5000 FOR I2 1 TO NF t D D
272. or when decisions are made about what courses to take The Learning Center teaches applications and word processing that are transferrable and generalized it offers across the board learning Knowledge is what it is all about According to Stuart Carduner NH Children s Museum director and member of the Learning No 58 March 1983 Center s Task Force the long range goal is to have a central resource center that provides the community with access to many types of computers hardware software and information to enhance the learning process as well as the competency to pass on this knowledge to the public in an informative and educated fashion The Center will go wherever there is a need the limit is only what the community wants explains Mr Carduner Plans include adding more specific courses of study as the demand increases advanced LOGO for teachers supplemental extensions to the VisiCalc family and Pascal But the core of introductory programs will continue to be a very integral part of the learning system Because the center is community oriented the general public is encouraged to particpate in this inspiring educational venture Businesses can send employees to specially custom designed training programs One Nashua school sent four secretaries to the center to learn word processing Teachers are encouraged to actively participate in such workshops as Computer Applications in the Classroom Introduct
273. ord 4890 REM READ RECORD INTO D1 4900 RECORD4 RR 4910 IF DS THEN 1690 4920 INPUT 1 K 4930 IF DS THEN 1690 4940 FOR I 1 TO NF INPUT H D 1 1 IF DS 2 0 THEN NEXT RETURN 4950 GOTO 1690 Through 4930 the program is like the key field reader we used last month The rest of the work is done in line 4940 Unless an error occurs it completes the record read and returns to the main program The reason for writing it this way is to save time When a FOR NEXT loop is entirely contained on one BASIC line the BASIC interpreter doesn t waste time looking for line numbers In a long pro gram the savings are considerable Line 4950 will be executed only if there is a disk error Occasionally the program may halt at line 4940 with a STRING TOO LONG ERROR This means over 79 characters were read without a carriage return retry with the same record always succeeds Unfortunately if it happens the program will halt Move the cursor to a blank line and type GOTO 1190 to return to the update menu without losing data Ros Eit d consider its other useful features First if some data fields are left entirely blank when entered the program fills them with default contents as selected by the start up module This speeds data entry when many records share similar information This typically in cludes the town and state name the zip code and the leading part of the phone number Here s an example 2270 IF
274. orm the ver tical axis and then put the printer in Lines 1000 to 1020 perform initial graphics mode ready to plot setup B is the VIC printer equivalent Line 1030 begins the outer func of a TAB function and advances the tional loop YR is the Y increment per printhead to the twentieth character print line 7 dot lines and RV is the position The tab is used for locating row value of the uppermost dot line in the vertical axis C sets the printer to each print line Line 1040 initializes standard character mode D1 and 02 the output to graphic spaces Listing 1 998 REM 7999 PLOTTING SUBROUTINE 1000 B sCHR CIE 4CHR SO 4CHR CAB 1 15 1010 D1 CHR C171 CHR B DOE CHR C123 CHR CB SP 128 1020 OPEN1 4 PRINTMI PRINTSI 0 1038 1 7 07049 5 50 1040 FORCN T0380 AZ CN SP 1050 IFRN 1OINTCRN 18 gt C gt STHENPRINT 1 C BS D1 00701090 1860 EN RV 3KVI IFRBSCCN CB S YITHENCNSD 1070 PRINT 1 C ES STRSECCN F RNS1TOC19 LENCES25 tPRINTRI NEXTN 1080 PRINT amp 1 E B D2 CE Q 1092 FORCN 8T0299 1198 RS RV FNVCKE4CNKKI IFRSCOTHENI 138 1118 DR2INTCRS VI IFDRD6THEN1130 1120 AZCCN 128 24DR CEmCN 1138 NEXTCN 1150 1 AZ CE 13 1169 FORCN TOCE PRINT amp 1 CHR amp CRZCCN j NEXTCN 1170 NEXTRN PRINT 1 C BS CHR C173 1180 FORCN 0T058 IFCN 10MI
275. out computers is to get people to sit down and try it and to deal with their preconceptions about what it 15 Eight or nine of ten class members have never used a computer before They don t know what a computer can do and in most cases are truly amazed A computer can do that is a familiar refrain The task force members at the Learning Center are actively seeking people from a variety of backgrounds the businessman educator student and homemaker Recently they offered a course to the Nashua Women s Club Mr Paquin tells of one instance where a computer course taught in a nursing home was an incredible success Courses for children are provided as an extension to what they have learned at school filling a need to give the youngsters a place to further their computer education One of the most popular courses that fills like crazy is Advanced BASIC for Young People Mary Gasiorowski task force member talks about a mailing list program she taught in which one youngster wrote an imaginative title page that moved an envelope across the page to a mailbox The Future is Now One final comment about the revolutionary growth of computers in the community Three or four years ago the computer world was an entity of its own and appeared to consist of two groups the ultra serious high technology computerist who sat in his lonely corner preparing incomprehensible programs for inexplicable applications and
276. oving MICRO Calc s editing 50 Saving files on disk Enter the following lines to substitute disk storage for cassette storage 5020 IFT L THENSA 9 F S R GOTO5045 5030 IFT 5 10 F S W GOTO5045 5045 PRINT DRIVE NUMBER RVS O OFF OR RVS OFF 5046 GOSUBA50Q IFT Q ORT gt 1 THEN5046 5050 INPUT 2 CD NAME NA NA T NAS FS 5060 OPEN1 8 SA NA IFSA 10THENGOSUBS5090 GOTO5080 The major changes are selecting the drive number changing the primary and secondary addresses and adding the prefix and suffix to the file name The actual reading and writing process is exactly the same as for cassette Suggestions for other changes With just a little work MICRO Calc can be made to handle strings as well as numbers First all string names within the program must be changed to two characters Second a separate series of subroutines with an appropriate calling routine similar to 6500 6810 must be added to extract the proper values for printing Third the quote and dollar characters must be accepted by the editor Finally the print routine at 7000 must be made to recognize and print strings Probably other minor problems would have to be solved as well The editor can be improved considerably by allowing insert delete and cursor movements within a line With larger screens it may be desirable to divide some of the lines into smaller cells How the Pro
277. peed of a disk drive CPV 328 HESCOUNT monitors program execution 19 95 CHV HESPLOT Hi res graphics subroutines 12 95 CPV 367 Conversions figures volume length weight area 7 95 and velocity to possible configurations CC The Mail your complete program Cassette 24 95 Disk 29 95 CPV 220 Client Tickler 16 95 CPV 221 Club Lister 13 95 CPV 224 Depreciator 9 95 CPV 236 investment Analyst keep track of investments 12 95 and investment opportunitites CPV 251 Present Value 10 95 CPV 269 Super Broker 12 95 CPV 270 Syndicator caiculates whether to buy or sel 13 95 CPV 274 Ticker Tape maintains investments profile 14 95 CPV 276 Un Word Processor screen editor 16 95 CPV 286 Phone Directory never lose a phone number again 9 95 CS 111 Checkbook home utility program 14 95 CPV 294 Calendar My Appointments print a calendar 14 95 for every month in any year CPV 296 The Budgeter place your personal finances in order 12 95 QUICK BROWN FOX 60 50 The Word Processor of this decade COMMODORE SOFTWARE VIC 1211A VIC 20 Super Expander 57 99 Everything Commodore could pack into one cartridge 3K RAM memory expansion high resolution graphics plotting color paint and sound commands Graphic text multicolor and music modes 1024x1024 dot screen plotting All commands may be typed as new BASIC commands or accessed by hitting one of the VIC s special function keys Includes tutorial instruction book Excellent for a
278. pword Format 151413121110 9 87 65 43210 1 0 Register 1 o o o o R MiRegisted Rx Ry R M 0 specifies a data register R M 1 Specifies an address register for the predecrement addressing mode 22 2 memory to memory 7 Rx specifies the destination register Ry specifies the source register addressed data along with the extension bit is subtracted from zero using BCD atithmetic and the result is stored in the destination Opword Format 11413121110 987654321 By NBCD SRL Negate ne Decimal CO o NS Extend The effective Sieb field specifies he destination The following effective addressing 2 modes cannot be used 2 10 11 12 13 14 U the bit is not defined Table 2 Privilege Instructions Mnemonic Data Size CCR Comments The contents of the user stack pointer is 227 transferred to or from the specified address register MOVE 3 5 0 27 CER Opword Format E 151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 27 i 0 2 2 dr field specifies the direction of transfer 0 specifies the address register to USP 2 9 T specifies the USP to the address register i The register field specifies the address register gu gt that i used in the transfer The contents of the source operand i is moved to 8 te status register
279. r each line requires as many as 330 Extra time is consumed with serial bus handshaking Astute BASIC programmers also will notice that the function FN Y is called from the innermost loop and is consequently called 50 x 300 15000 times Worse yet only 300 of these calls produce unique values This was done to save memory as the storing of 300 floating point numbers would use over 1500 bytes almost as much as the routine itself If you have an ex panded VIC you can change the code to precalcujate the values and then use No 58 March 1983 them directly in line 1100 but don t expect too dramatic an improvement Interpreted BASIC is not outstanding when it has to run FOR NEXT loops 15000 times You may want to try the program in listing 3 This routine eliminates the FN definition and instead loads array VA directly Don t forget to make the accompanying change in line 1100 before running This program which just barely fits in an unexpanded VIC not only runs faster but also shows how point plotting as opposed to function plotting can be implemented Conclusion A VIC 20 VIC 1515 combination can produce high resolution dot plots comparable to dot addressable printers available at much higher cost With the addition of the VIC RS 232 option and a few lines of code the package could become an intelligent graphic output MICRO station for another micro or mainframe one that can buffer an entire graphic
280. r Chart display your numerical data 8 95 CH Turtle Graphics tearn programming 34 95 CH VIC Forth is a powerful language for BASIC programming 49 95 CH HES MON isa6502 machine language monitor with 34 95 a mini assembler CH HES Writer time saving word processing tool 34 95 CH Encoder keep your personal records away from prying eyes 34 95 CT 21 Statistics Sadistics statistical analysis 14 95 CT 121 Total Time Manager 2 0 creates personal or 15 95 business schedules CT 124 Label a mailing list and label program 13 95 CT 125 Totl Text BASIC 15 95 CT 126 Research Assistant keep track reference data 17 50 CT 140 Totl Text Enhanced 29 95 CM 152 Grafix Designer design graphic characters 12 95 CQ 5 Minimon allows you to program toad save or execute 13 95 machine language programs CT 3 Order Tracker 15 95 CT 4 Business Inventory to maintain record of inventory 15 95 CS Home Inventory lists your home belongings 17 95 cs Check Minder V 20 amp 64 14 95 keep your checkbook the right way CS General Ledger a complete general ledger 19 95 CHC 504 HES Writer word processor 39 95 CHC 503 Turtle Graphics ll utilizes the full graphics of your 64 49 95 CHC 502 HESMON machine language monitor w mini assembler 34 95 CHP 102 6502 Professional Development System 29 95 CFC Data Files a management program 27 95 CPV 327 HESCOM transters data and programs bidirection 40 95 ally between VICs at three times the s
281. r Control Characters in Listings Commodore computers allow cursor controls to be programmed as characters within a string However in listings these appear as reverse field characters for instance clear screen is represented by a reversed heart character To make these listings easier to type in and easier to understand we have substituted bracketed abbreviations of the functions of these characters When more than hold shift and press CRSR up dn twice Calculate Monthly Rate 100 5 100 Round to Nearest Cent P Display Payment Before you try it out SAVE the screen as described above When it is SAVEd the program will return with the cursor at the end of what you typed on the first line Enter values for A M and I press and the result will appear on the eighth line Now you can make a change as you did in the example above hit and instantly see the change in the monthly payment Once you have the hang of MICRO Calc you can use it to perform a wide variety of repetitive calculations Be sure to save the more elaborate screens to tape and you will develop a library of useful screens Improving MICRO Calc MICRO Calc was intentionally kept simple so that it would be easy to type in and easy to use The next section describes how you can make changes in a few lines to improve the power of MICRO Calc Flashing cursor With the MICRO Calc program in memory type the following program li
282. r that probably will be available by the time you read this There are rumors of still another com patible machine but I have no informa tion on that There should be no short age of software for CoCo I received a letter from Maury Mead asking about the Supercharger board available from Spectral Associates This board accesses map type 1 the all RAM mode without modifying the computer He would like to know if the board will work with Frank Hogg s FLEX If you have any information on this please let me know Ken Christiansen of Fargo North Dakota provides the following infor mation regarding tape ASCII files If you have an I O error in a tape ASCII file or if you have accidentally re corded over the header there is a way to recover at least some of the data You can experiment by loading a pro gram and resaving it using the op tion CSAVE filename A saves the program in ASCII format rather than tokenizing the keywords As the tape is being written you will notice that it contains blocks of data Watch the record indicator you will see the spindles actually stop turning between the blocks That is the key to recover ing the data If you accidentally record over a file header trying to load the information only results in an I O error message Put in a tape that contains a valid file its filename is unimportant and begin the loading process watching the record indicator and tape spindl
283. rd cassette player re corder with your VIC 20 or CBM 64 LIGHT PEN 29 95 A light pen with six good programs to use with your VIC 20 or CBM 64 Prices subject to change TO ORDER P O BOX 18765 WICHITA KS 67218 316 684 4660 Personal Checks Accepted Allow 3 Weeks or C OD Add 2 Handling Charges 2 00 Circle No 23 C64 FORTH for the Commodore 64 Fig Forth implementation including Full feature screen editor and assembler Forth 79 Standard Commands with extensions High resolution 320x200 pixel 16 color graphics Sprite graphics for control of 32 sprites Three voice tone and music synthesizer Detailed manual with ex amples and BASIC FORTH conversions Trace feature for Debugging 99 95 Disk Version Specify CBM 1540 or CBM 1541 Disk 99 95 Cassette Version CBM amp Commodore 64 are Trademarks of Commodore PERFORMANCE MICRO PRODUCTS 770 Dedham Street Canton MA 02021 617 828 1209 Circle No 24 35 Disk ID for Printed OSI Directories by Robert A Paul Utilize the open area of OS65D3 directory sector 1 to allow inclusion of diskette ID on printed directories When you use large numbers of disks it soon becomes obvious that you need hard copies of the directory for each disk on file Furthermore you need to correlate the printed sheets directly with the specific disk to which each refers While examining se
284. re versatility 87 95 TO ORDER BOX 18765 WICHITA KS 67218 316 684 4660 Personal checks accepted Allow 3 weeks or C O D Add 2 Handling charge 2 00 VIC 20 is a registered trademark of Commodore Circle No 19 26 gram but it will be printed if you include it REM specifies what the new title should be but you haven t told the for matting program where to find it The title itself starts in memory six bytes after the start of program text as pointed to by Applesoft s pointer TXT TAB at 67 68 For example if TXT TAB holds 801 the usual case the M of MY LISTING PAGE starts at loca tion 807 POKE 8 into location 937 3A9 and POKE 7 into location 935 3 7 and your title instead of the default title will be printed at the top of each page We should stress that the program is handy for more than just producing listings Often we print long tables of data that run for more than a page Using this routine we can indent the first column of data automatically and leave blank lines between pages Fur ther we can automatically print the headings for each column of output at the top of each page by making that our title For example 1 REM PARAMETER LABEL LEGAL RANGE DEFAULT POKE ADDRESS amp NOTES PAGE would be used to print the column headers at the top of each page of out put for table 1 Notes on the Program Itself Two things in the pr
285. resulting from the STR function can be printed even those with exponents Lines 1090 to 1130 form the inner functional loop For each column num ber you find the value of the EN Y and determine if that value lies within this print line If it does make an entry in A96 Variable CE keeps track of where the last entry was made so you can truncate trailing spaces Lines 1150 and 1160 append a carriage return and finish the line by sending A96 to the printer When all 50 lines that is 350 dots vertically have been printed then lines 1170 1200 output the horizontal axis complete with tic marks Printing the labelling for this axis is somewhat more challenging than the vertical however since you want to center the number string at a given position rather than right justify it Lines 1210 to 1250 accomplish this first by tabbing to the start of the allowable space for each label then spacing over to the correct beginning point before actually output ting the string This algorithm is less able to deal with lengthy labels because of restricted space so you may want to do some intelligent rounding here Finally lines 1260 to 1280 center the caller supplied title in double width characters under the graph Upgrading the Routine The first complaint you will have about the above example is that it is painfully slow figure 3 takes over 20 minutes Much of this is due to the sheer number of bytes sent to the printe
286. rigin vertical 9002 36866 7 Screen address bit 9 6 0 Number of video columns 9003 36867 7 Part of raster value 6 1 Number of video rows 0 23 0 Character size 8 x 8 0 8 x 16 1 9004 36868 Raster value 9005 36869 7 Must be 1 6 4 Screen address bits 10 12 3 0 Character memory value 0 3 ROM 12 15 RAM 9006 36870 Light pen horizonal 9007 36871 Light pen vertical 9008 36872 Paddle X 9009 36873 Paddle Y 900A 36874 Bass voice 7 Switch 6 0 Frequency 900B 36875 Alto voice 7 Switch 6 0 Frequency 900C 36876 Soprano voice 7 Switch 6 0 Frequency 900D 36877 Noise voice 7 Switch 6 0 Frequency 900E 36878 7 4 Auxilliary color _ 30 Volume 900F 36879 7 4 Screen color 3 Reverse mode normal 1 reversed 0 2 0 Border color Data Sheet 14 Centronics Data Computer Corp Hudson NH 03051 603 883 0111 Datasouth Computer Corporation P O Box 240947 Charlotte NC 28224 Smith Corona Corp 65 Locust Ave New Canaan CT 06840 Atari Computer Systems 1265 Borregas Ave Sunnyvale CA 94086 NEC Information Systems 5 Militia Dr Lexington MA 02173 49 7 ewm H F Axiom 1014 Griswold Ave San Fernando CA 91340 Commodore Business Machines Inc 3330 Scott Blvd Santa CA 95051 Qume Carp 2350 Drive San Jose CA 95131 Diablo Systems inc 5003 Har p C Itoh Electronics Inc 5301 Beethoven St Los Angeles Ca 90066 P
287. rinters Information Sheet 2 bidirectlonal logic seeking 10 CPI Daisy Wheel Letter Quality Dot Matrix Bi Directional 5 16 5 charac in 10 12 charac in charac in 10 15 charac in 7 ASCH APL 7 inter 75 x 72 dot in pin Centroncis Parallel national sets addressable Various print wheels Parallel or RS 232C available in traditional and modern faces E condi Centronics Parallel or 5232 Centronics Paralel IEEE 488 Parallel or Serial 50 programmable features for torms control printing and communications non volatile format retention Selectable impression control Does proportional spacing EAS mc GEMINI FOR PRINTER VALUE THAT S _ OUTOF THIS WORLD Over thirty years of down to earth experi ence as a precision parts manufacturer has enabled Star to produce the Gemini series of dot matrix printers a stellar combina tion of printer quality flexibility and reliabil ity And for a list price of nearly 25 less than the best selling competitor The Gemini 10 has a 10 carriage and the Gemini 15 a 15 2 carriage Plus the Gemini 15 has the added capability of a bot tom paper feed In both models Gemini quality means a print speed of 100 cps high resolution bit image and block graphics and extra fast forms feed Gemini s flexibility is embodied in its diverse specialized printing capabilities such as s
288. rks ee Bake RE Smartware s de eos Sof Sys M 2 Sorrento Valley Assoc RUE Southwestern Data DOE 11 96 Star 2 106 Strobe n6 o scie ater nate 91 Time Trend 2298 Versa RA dades NIE Vista Computing tbe oen rr tel IBC XPS 1 eh 83 2 Stas EE 13 MICRO Advertising Mastering Your 20 46 MICRO on the 38 What s Where in the 80 MICRO is not responsible for claims made by its advertisers Any should be submitted directly to the advertiser Please also send written notification to MICRO No 58 March 1983 2288 A 2 was always acing new devices t solve problems Pictured here are many studies for milita and armor and battlements ilities of the standard Disk 11 at a frac on 9t the cost
289. rs are discarded and replaced with empty or null strings Before returning to the main program the machine language routine must be POKEd back into the cassette buffer 8000 It is destroyed on any LOAD or SAVE operation Finally subroutine 8510 is called to reprint the screen Note that a call to 8500 as in line 100 prints an empty screen while starting at 8510 does not clear the arrays Running MICRO Calc on Other Commodore Computers MICRO Calc will run with relatively few changes on any Commodore machine Provided here are substitute program lines for the Commodore 64 listing 3 4 0 PET listing 4 2 0 PET listing 5 and 1 0 PET listing 6 The only differences are in line 10 and lines 9828 9868 Type the lines appropriate to your machine followed by the rest of listing 1 The program will MICRO 51 52 now run as it is However you want to take better advantage of your 40 column screen by changing the lines in listing 7 Listing 1 MICRO Calc BASIC Listing for VIC 10 PRINT CLR POKE36879 8 GOSUB8808 20 CR CHR 13 DL CHR 20 RB RVS CL BL 20 SPACES DI OFF CL 30 NL 18 DIMS NL S NL 100 11 1 6050 88500 110 S S LL IFRIGHT S 1 THEN PRINT RVS BL CR CD 120 605082000 130 5 11 5 005083000 GOSUB7 PRINT CH CD LL 1 GOTO 110 146 IFT CLR THEN1OS 150 IFT CRSORT CD THEN2
290. s 2 00 shipping Filewriter Filereader Includes software cassette and documentation Also includes data tape for C64 File Author Kinetic Designs Russell Grokett Available RAK Electronics P O Box 1585 Orange Park FL 32073 No 58 March 1983 Name Data Fax System Apple II Apple II Plus Apple IBM PC Memory 64K Language Pascal Hardware One disk drive Description This free form relational filing system is modeled after the standard folder page manual system i e folders etc It is simple to use to keep track of unstructured information Price 249 00 Apple 80 column 199 00 Apple 40 column 299 00 IMB PC Includes 250 page manual Available Link Systems 1640 19th Street Santa Monica CA 90404 213 453 1851 Name The Menu Maker System Apple II Plus Memory 48K Language Applesoft Hardware One disk drive minimum Description The Menu Maker will help you create and edit disk program menus It allows up to 30 items per menu and up to 15 sub menus plus full editing add delete change and rearrange display order The Menu Maker generates a BASIC program you can modify Price 19 95 Includes disk and user notes Author Larry Houbre Jr Available L R H Enterprises 358 Ashley Blvd lw New Bedford MA 02746 16171 997 7346 Name HBJ Computer SAT System Apple II Apple II Plus Memory 48K Language BASIC Description Now your
291. s With other purchase 19 95 Without other purchase 23 00 69 95 NEC 8023 or C ITOH 8510 89 95 Virtually identical Specifications 100 CPS dot 49 95 matrix printer 80 column print 136 characters 89 95 per line Tractor friction feed 7 different print 49 95 fonts included 2K printer buffer Proportional 99 95 spacing Bit image graphics and graphic symbols 119 00 8023 or NEC 8023 or C ITOH 8510 with when paying by credit card r b wi 168 00 Parallel Interface and Cable 550 MAII items are normally in stock 79 00 B EPSON 100 with Parallel Interface P 31415 490 3420 c EL 7 i eae di 0 5 we ll be here to help after you receive your order Feel free to call the SGC f Technical Staff for assistance SOC All e shipped factory fresh Manufacturers warranties included California customers add 672 tax Include payment by personal check money order or cashier s check with order and SGC will pay shipping charge Call for amount of shipping charge 27 95 VERSAcard FROM PROMETHEUS 49 95 tion Includes 1 Serial Input Output Interface 45 00 2 Parallel Output Interface 3 Precision Clock 45 00 alendar and 4 BSR Control All on one card 5 Fully compatible with CP M and Apple Pascal 325 00 List 249 p 0 The mail order specialists 179 00 342 Quartz Circle Livermore CA 94550 MICRO 99 INICRO Hard
292. s CSW at itself stores the true output device handler address in a safe place inside the DOS code and passes characters to the device when it s through with them DOS is very pro tective about the contents of CSW It s easy enough to change CSW but if you do just about anything after that turn ing your head often seems adequate you ll discover that DOS changed it back There is no way to grab the out put before DOS gets it without com pletely rewriting the operating system Instead what you have to do is to fool DOS into thinking that your routine is the correct device handling routine and let it pass the data to you Then as before your routine can send it to the real device The first part is easy If you change CSW to point to your output checking routine called HOOK at 34D then when DOS takes back control of CSW using a subroutine called DOSCON for DOS CONnect it stores 34D in the place it reserves to hold the CSW value and outputs all characters to HOOK thereafter So far so good but where does HOOK send them If it uses the CSW contents as a guide it sends them back to DOS which sends them to HOOK which sends them to DOS and you ve just created a lovely model of a bureaucracy at work Nothing ever gets printed this way Instead you have to find out where DOS has hidden the true device handler address and before allowing DOS to overwrite that with HOOK s address you have to save it in
293. s is met which causes the program to return to Single Step Price 50 QUICKTRACE was written by John Rogers QUICKTRACE is a trademark of Anthro Digital Inc QUICK TRACE allows changes to the stack registers stopping conditions addresses to be displayed and output destinations for all this information Ali this can be done in Single Step mode while running Two optional dispiay formats can show a sequence of operations at once Usually the informetion is given in four lines et the bottom of the screen QUICK TRACE is completely transparent to the program being traced It will not interfere with the stack program or without interfering with those operations Look at these FEATURES QUICK TRACE is relocatable to any free part of memory its output can be sent to any slot or to the screen QUICKTRACE is completely compatibie with programs using Applesoft and Integer BASICs graphics and DOS Time dependent DOS operations can be bypassed It will display the graphics on the screen while QUICK TRACE is alive QUICK TRACE is a beautiful way to show the incredibly complex sequence of operations that 8 computer goes through in executing a program QUICK TRACE requires 3548 5 00 bytes 14 pages memory and some knowledge of machine language programming It will run any Apple I or Apple II Ptus computer and can be loaded from disk or tape It is supplied on disk with DOS 3 3 QUICKTRACE DEBUGGER Last
294. s more tutorial and generally speaking plans are to keep its focus on programming infor mation for the Atari 400 800 Commo dore 64 and VIC 20 TRS 80C and Apple But you may find similar infor mation on other systems like the TI 99 4A and Timex Sinclair from time to time We see this section as a way of breaking new editorial ground we re No 58 March 1983 taking MICRO s approach to com puters and programming and applying it to these relatively new systems Think about that for a second The possibilities are truly intriguing The Visicalc type program in this premier edition of The Learning Center is a good example Another alteration you might notice in this issue is the new page of Reader Service Cards we ve bound into it The top two are self explanatory The card on the bottom is designed to be used with the individual advertisements you ll find in this issue There s a number on or near each ad If you want to receive more information about a product you see advertised in this issue just circle the right number fill in your mailing information and drop the card in the mail Throughout this issue and in issues to come you ll find MICRO using more color than in the past We believe that color adds an important dimension to the magazine For example in a wir ing diagram color can clarify and deliver the information far more effi ciently than the written word It is our hope to use color extensiv
295. s to a number Any BASIC function that yields a numerical result such as TAN SQR RND LOG or ABS may be used BASIC string functions such as LEFT MID ASC or VAL and integer variables may not be used Consult your VIC User s Guide to learn about BASIC s built in functions Then use MICRO Calc to help you understand how they work MICRO Calc allows you to use 26 storage locations called variables Each variable is uniquely identified by a letter of the alphabet In our first example when we typed A 5 we assigned the value of 5 to the variable A we typed B 2 6 to assign the value 6 to B and typed C A to assign the sum of A and B to C Until it is changed 5 is substituted for A whenever it is used in an expression Likewise B and C retain their values until they are changed As in a BASIC program MICRO Calc looks at the lines on the screen from the top down Therefore a C on a line before C is defined will give the wrong answer Also if you assign a variable a new value the new value will be used in all subsequent calculations Editing MICRO Calc has limited editing capabilities You can move the cursor to the end of the line 48 MICRO below by pressing either RETURN or CRSR down From the last line the cursor will move to the top line Similarly CRSR up will move the cursor to the end of the line above and from the top line to the bottom line The only way to change existing
296. s to the alternate set of keyboard graphics i e those on the left front of the keycaps is with a special secondary address in the OPEN command Double width characters are ob tained with a CHR 14 This expands each character horizontally reducing the number of characters per line from 80 to 40 in the process These may be used in either the standard or alternate printer character sets The graphics mode is entered by transmitting a CHR 8 In this mode you gain control of each individual in the print line To understand how this is done first look at how the character modes work When the printer receives the code for a particular character it first looks the code up in the built in ROM to see what dots are required to form that character The ROM supplies informa tion fora 5 x 7 matrix of dots see the upper case A in figure 1 and then the printer logic leaves the sixth col umn blank before proceeding to the next character By sending one 8 bit code you can print anywhere from 0 to 35 dots In contrast the graphics mode allows you to bypass the printer s char acter ROMs and send information to the head directly see figure 2 Once in this mode each 8 bit code received by the printer is no longer interpreted as a character it is either processed as a control code if bit 7 is zero that is if the binary value is less than 128 or it is sent directly to the head if bit 7 is one binary value b
297. shipping on all orders CP M is a registered trademark of Digital Research Inc Beginner s Glossary A Beginner s High tech Glossary To help you befriend your computer and become literate in its vocabulary here is a list of commonly used words Learn the meanings of these words and you will feel more comfortable advancing your computer knowledge ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A standard 8 bit information code used with most computers and data terminals Many systems use only seven of the eight bits providing a total of 128 possible characters including upper and lower case alphabet punc tuation numbers spacing and machine or con trol commands Assembly language A machine oriented language for programming BASIC Beginner s All purpose Symbolic Instruc tion Code One of the easiest computer program ming languages to learn and master Bit 1 A binary digit either a0 or 1 2 A unit of information capacity of a storage device 3 A single pulse in a group of pulses Bug Any mechanical electrical or electronic defect that interferes with the operation of the computer or a defect in the coding of a program Byte A generic term to indicate a measurable portion of consecutive binary digits A set of eight bits A byte is universally used to represent a character Microcomputer instructions require one two or three bytes A word m
298. t 0 THEN 0 0 182 CO gt RET THEN 0 0 25 lt Targeta AIM 65 Newsletter E ae qu ied er eoa 2 C2iIF Aa C2 161 C2 E 3070 PORE 712 CATE azii AND lt gt 0 THEN C4 C4 163IF C4 gt RET THEN 4 4 25 N ormation for your 65 computer News 0 ANO A 14 THEN C0 C0 2 IF T THEN CO ce 2090 IF 8 0 AND 4 7 THEN CisCi 2iIF CIORET THEN CI CI 98 software and hardware examples of items covered in the 2100 IF 8 0 AND 13 THEN 2 2 211 C2 gt RET THEN 2 2 254 2110 IF 8 0 AND A il THEN C4 C42 IF CASRET THEN Cinca 296 newsletter Yearly subscription rates are 7 00 in the US and Canada 12 00 elsewhere Back issues available 3010 POKE 752 01 Enter filenane for drawing INPUT FSSPOKE 752 11 1 Fe beginning with 1979 at the same eper year rate THEN RETURN 3020 TRAF 3080 PUKE PL O CLOSE 1 0PEN 1 8 0 F8 o Donald Clem 3030 FOR 12708 TO 712 PUT 1 PEEKCIDiNEXT I 3040 POKE 852 PEEK 88 POKE 853 PEEK B9 POKE 856 1281POKE 857 12 POKE 850 11 3050 J USK ADR CIOS 3060 POKE 54286 192 C8 08 Screen has been saved asi OF 99 F0R 0 1 TO 500 D 3070 POKE PL XiTRAP 130 RETURN 3080 POKE 54286 192 C 0 Sorry Check connections try again jBS F R D 1 T 0 400 NEXT D GOTO 3070 4000 REM LOAD SCREEN 4010 POKE 752 03 Enter the drawing s filenane INPUT F POKE 752 11 FS THEN RETURN 4020
299. t and fastest complete 6502 macro assembler editor package you can buy 80 00 for structured programming an easy to use inter preter a learning tool 99 95 a powerful self relocatable debugger FREE with MAC 68 34 95 And More OS A the first and finest operating system for BOTH Atari and Apple computers is NOW included FREE as a part of every OSS systems softwz package OS A features a keyboard driven easy to use command process several simple resident commands and logical and readable requests for even t most sophisticated utility commands Versions of OS A for some higk capacity drives are available at extra cost NOTE Unless otherwise noted all OSS products require 48K and at le one disk drive ASK YOUR DEALER or call or write for our brochure ATARI APPLE II and TINY C are trademarks of Atari Inc Apple Computer Inc a Tiny C Associates respectively MAC 65 C 65 BASIC A BUG 65 and OS A trademarks of Optimized Systems Software Inc OS Optimized Systems Software Inc 10379 Lansdale Avenue Cupertino California 95014 408 446 306 60 Circle No 2 No 58 March 19 The Computer Revolution Reaches the Community by Emmalyn H Bentley Many questions confronting the public today concern the computer revolution s role in our daily lives How is this revolution affecting business education communication recreation and even the drudgery of routine tasks w
300. t likely to cause a circuit design to operate improperly Figure 2 represents a snapshot of the precise time interval that data is being sent to the latch in figure 3 How long do you have to capture that data The data first becomes valid 251 028 223 502 uSec after E goes low That means that the manufacturer guaran tees that a 6809E will take no longer than 502 pSec to deliver data to the data bus Two numbers in figure 2 are followed by this designates hold time or how long the data is available after another signal changes If you sub tract 502 from 1 12 then add 03 Sec hold time you will derive how long the data is available the answer is 618 During the very next machine cycle the data on the data bus will be different and intended for another destination If you think about it there are only two things that distinguish the machine cycle of figure 2 from any other machine cycle First this is a WRITE cycle since R W is low W active so it is sending data out from the uP Second each data destination must be unique to avoid memory errors and conflicts The proc ss of defining a unique destination would be easy if every part that interfaces with the pP had 16 ad dress lines However this would re quire large and expensive IC packages to make room for so many pins Since that isn t feasible devices called decoders are used For now I will ex plain the function and leave the detai
301. t of com puter interfacing so that you can realize maximum personal use and satisfac tion from your machine I will deal with programming as necessary but there will be special emphasis on the Radio Shack Color Computer This machine is one of the most cost effective designs available for its original purpose of game playing and it also has great potential for other ap plications In many cases the theory behind my discussions will apply to any Microcomputer but specific de tails will apply to the Color Computer Since I will be talking about com puter interfacing let me define what that means A computer interface is an electrical circuit that transfers informa tion or electrical energy between the computer and the outside world This transfer can occur in either direction from the computer to the outside world or to the computer from the out side world I will also use the terms transducer and sensor trans ducer is a device or material that trans forms input energy of one form to out put energy of another form a sensor transforms a physical stimulus into an electrical signal Fundamentals Editor s note For CoCo users who are beginners with machine language I recommend Rodney Zak s Program ming the 6809 published by Sybex or a similar elementary programming book to get started Let me review some microprocessor 4 P fundamentals before I discuss in terfacing the Color Computer
302. tandard graphics capa bilities all PrintMate 150 models allow printing of up to 6 120 individually address able dots per square inch git ng exceptional resolution for gra hics special characters intMat Tur APPLICA IONS PACKAGES i for mictosystem and personal sers MPI offers four wide Prk 12 lad deni lix sen fontip erat inch uelity pr in Eh racte PANEL s model ges providing To custom graphs tables and picture g Specialized characters such as logo fitch gm dnt panel keydads fpr externally easily efined and edited for printing directly anging dris length pri it density hori ftom ut computer ERA n ontal and tabs a drateand CONSI DE THE FEATURES 274 2 are faci equipped witha 2K arid aractel imple econ entry Hcc 50 Ls in ahy ays to j Ki 16 buffer respectively PrintMate 150 isplay the p ratin ode models have an ect PrintMate 50 standing graphics and font capab ery entry with pleasant t optional expansion and oth radvanced n Sof m features that differentiate the PrintMate off the print even i frie oftSwitchT inter 150 from its competitive ite 5Q ry deta it f i 1501 is th
303. ter 10 10 Printer 119 407 Okidata Microline 2T 83A or 84 Printer 99 P408 Prowriter 2 Printer 0 99 2 409 Prowriter Apple Dot Mari Printer 18501 IBM Personal Computer Ps 18502 Monitor 99 HP 41 with Accessories 99 Commodore Model 64 HP601 M703 2 with Drives _ 119 CM704 Commodore Model 64 RAT with Dataset 109 5010 North Star Advantage 139 CC80 CC91 CC92 Computer case company 5650 Indian Mound Court Columbus Ohio 43213 614 868 9464 CALL TOLL FREE 800 848 7548 Circle No 6 Matching Attache Case 5 85 Matching Attache Case 3 75 Matching Accessory Case 95 5 25 Diskette Case 49 INCRO CoCo Bits By John Steiner In my January column MICRO 56 92 I mentioned the TDP 100 a Color Com puter built by Radio Shack for distribu tion through other dealers This month s column was written using my new TDP 100 with disk Scripsit The System 100 computer is presently available in stock configuration as a 16K computer with either standard or Extended BASIC In addition it is available from some locations as a 32 64K model Retail prices are com parable to Radio Shack prices My machine is equipped with the 64K RAM mode modification provided by Computerware Inc As I become more adept at using the 64K capacity I will pass the information along Technically the computer is software compatible with the TRS 80 Color Computer The cir
304. the computer hobbyists who gathered on Saturday mornings in computer shops to talk talk talk Mr Paquin believes one of the positive things to come out of this is the willingness of customers and shop owners to exchange information and ideas a phenomenon that does not occur in any other phase of business These preconceived stereotypes no longer exist The staid programmer has emerged from his dark recess with a sense of altruistic values that he now shares with others there is a comraderie a feeling of we re doing this because it s fun Apple for example is potential movement with its festivals and clubs and this enthusiasm is spreading It is an exciting age when the most ordinary of us have an inclination to become computer literate to get on with the business of living in this inescapably technical world in a more meaningful fashion The Microcomputer Learning Center in Nashua is helping to make this happen By bringing the micro to the general public people are able to get in touch with one another in the computer environment in a very human kind of way MICRO No 58 March 1983 BUSICALC __ Do BUSICALC A Honey of an Electronic Spreadsheet Why electronic spreadsheet programs Electronic spreadsheet programs allow the user to create a gridsheet spreadsheet worksheet or any other table of information using the memory of the computer as pencil and paper The computer display or terminal acts as a
305. tion Operation with the PeUCBM is similar 68000 SOURCE CODE For Apple users only we provide a nearly full disk of un protected 68000 source code To use it you will have to have DOS toolkit 75 ASSEM68K 95 both available from third parties Here s what you get 1 68000 source code for our Microsoft compatible floating point package including LOG EXP SQR SIN COS TAN ATN along with the basic four functions The code is set up to work either linked into BASIC or with our developmental HALGOL language 85 sectors MICRO Circle No 43 2 68000 source code for the PROM monitor 35 sectors 3 68000 source code for a very high speed interactive 3 D graphics demo 115 sectors 4 68000 source code for the HALGOL threaded interpreter Works with the 68000 floating point package 56 sectors 5 6502 source code for the utilities to link into the BASIC floating point routines and utility and debug code to link into the 68000 PROM monitor 113 sectors The above routines almost fill a standard Apple DOS 3 3 flop py We provide a second disk very nearly filled with various utility and demonstration programs SWIFTUS MAXIMUS Our last advertisement implied that we sold 8MHz boards to hackers and 12 5MHz boards to businesses That was sort of true because when that ad was written the 12 5MHz 68000 was a very expensive part list 332 ea Motorola has now dropped the price to 111 and we have adjusted our
306. type parallel printer board complete with cable and connector This unique board allows you to turn on and off the high bit so that you can access additional features in many printers Easily upgradeable to a fully intelligent printer board with graphics and text dumps Use with EPSON C ITOH ANADEX STAR WRITER NEC OKI and others with standard Centronics configuration 139 00 IF YOU WANT GRAPHICS AND FORMATTING THEN CHOOSE THE PERFORMER for Epson OKI NEC 8023 C ITOH 8510 provides resident HIRES screen dump and print formatting tn firmware Plugs into Apple slot and easy access to all printer fonts through menu with PRY command Use with standard printer cards to add intelligence 49 00 specify printer THE MIRROR FIRMWARE FOR NOVATION APPLE CAT 11 The Data Communication Handler ROM Emulates syntax of an other popular Apple Modem product with improvements Plugs directly on Apple CAT 11 Board Supports Videx and Smarterm 80 column cards touch tone and rotary dial remote terminal voice toggle easy printer access and much more List 39 00 Introductory Price 29 00 MINI ROM BOARDS DOUBLE DOS Plus Place your 2K program on our Mini Rom A piggy back board that plugs into the disk Board Room forone2716 EPROM Useinany controller card so that you can switch select slot but zero Only 34 95 between DOS 3 2 and DOS 3 3 DOUBLE 005 Plus requires APPLE DOS ROMS 539 00 Hires screendump software for the Epson OKI C Itoh and Nec 802
307. uble finding your machine language program BASIC can find it easily just by PEEKing the address those two memory locations hold Since your machine language program does not change its length BASIC only has to subtract to find the beginning of your machine language program You do it like this enter PRINT PEEK 27 256 PEEK 28 Copy down the address the computer gives add the length of your machine language subroutine to the number you have on paper then POKE the new number back into those memory locations Since the number will be different for different programs I have put a sign where you are to insert the number you calculated Enter POKE 27 INT 256 POKE 28 INT 256 256 Take the first number you wrote down and add one to it You can start POKEing in your machine language program at that memory location Now save your BASIC program The next time you CLOAD it will load your BASIC program and your machine language program at the same time To find the beginning of your machine language MICRO 65 program simply add a line like this to your BASIC program put the length of your machine language program where I have a sign A PEEK 27 256 PEEK 28 To combine the machine language with the BASIC in my program start by entering this line 30 EN PEEK 27 256 PEEK 28 972 Then enter PRINT PEEK 27 256 PEEK 28 Write down the number and add 972 routine length t
308. ull 1 year limited warranty 1 0 EXPANSION BOARD for the SYM AIM 122 60 222 72 and other microcomputers that use 6522 VIAsfor 1 0 and do not provide full address decoding on board This board has physical space for four additionat 6522 VIAs and provides additional decoding for a total of 16 devices Connectors far all 1 lines and further expansion are included 6522 uncuons are available with no interference with previous functions of the original VIA Two versions of this board available The l 0X 122 mounts above and directly plugs inta an on board 6522 socket and relocates the original ViA ta the expansion board Where there are space limitations the 1 222 uses a dip header and 8 cable for remote Installation REAL TIME CLOCK CALENDAR 60 Write for Info P O Box 1019 Whittier CA 90609 213 941 1383 ALTERNATIVE ENERGY PRODUCTE Circte No 50 No 58 March 1983 MICRO What s eating your Apple Find out with Apple Cillin If you use your Apple for your business or profession you probably rely on it to save you time and money You can t afford to guess whether it is working properly or not Now you don t have to guess Now you can find out with Apple Cillin Il Apple Cillin 11 is the comprehensive diagnostic system developed by XPS to check the performance of your Apple 1 computer system Apple Cillin Il contains 21 menu driven ut
309. umber 483470 ISSN 0271 9002 Send subscriptions change of address USPS Form 3579 requests for back issues and all other fulfillment questions to MICRO INK 34 Chelmsford Street Box 6502 Chelmsford MA 01824 or call 617 256 5515 Telex 955329 TLX SRVC 800 227 1617 Subscription Rates Per Year U S 24 00 2 yr 42 00 Foreign surface mail 27 00 Air mail Europe Mexico Central America Middle East North Africa Central Africa South America South Africa Far East Australasia New Zealand 42 00 48 00 72 00 Copyright 1982 by MICRO INK All Rights Reserved INICRO March Highlights Printer Feature Adding a printer to your computer system or enhancing the capabilities of one you already own will offer you versatility convenience and power Many of the programs presented here expand the graphics formatting or control capabilities of a variety of printers You can make automatic pagination and user selectable margins a part of the printer driver routine read John Vokey s PRINT Control for Apple Printers p 24 Mr Vokey presents a short machine language subroutine that provides formatted output to most output devices Larry Hollibaugh s MX Driver assembly language program Centronics Printer Driver for Your Microcomputer p 31 will expand the use of your Centronics compatible printer In PRINT USING Routine for the Apple p 39
310. uper sub script underlining back spacing double strike mode and emphasized print mode An other extraordinary standard SUG SX feature a 2 3K buffer An additional 4K is optional That s twice the memory of lead ing comparable printers And Gemini is compatible with most software packages that support the leading printers Gemini reliability is more than just a promise It s as concrete as a 180 day war ranty 90 days for ribbon and print head a mean time between failure rate of 5 million lines a print head life of over 100 million characters and a 100 duty cycle that allows the Gemini to print continuously Plus prompt nationwide service is readily available So if you re looking for an incredibly high quality low cost printer that s out of this world look to the manufacturer with its feet on the ground Star and the Gemini 10 Gemini 15 dot matrix printers MAKING A NAME FOR OURSELVES 1120 Empire Central Place Suite 216 Dallas TX 75247 EVERYONE NEEDS 5 VeAC LINE BATTERY w m m m m 2 MINUTES GEL GUARDIAN AN LECTRONICS INC ELECTRONICS INC 566 IRELAN BUELLTON CA 93427 805 688 2047 Circle No 67 INCRO Interface Clinic by Ralph Tenny Some of the fun I have working on the Color Computer is making use of the superb architecture of the basic machine It is my intent to use this col umn to help you learn the ar
311. ut the shape First you are asked for the shape s width the maximum width of the shape In the case of the man the width is 7 Next you are asked for the length of the shape the number of horizontal rows that contain the shape The man s length is 15 Next you must enter the shape s Plot Code The man s Plot Code is 0 After answer ing these questions the information for each row is requested beginning with the top row and working down For each row you enter the Color Code and then the row itself The row is entered as a string of 0 5 and 1 s A O represents an empty square on the graph paper and l represents a solid square Figure 2 shows the beginning of a run of Shape Definer using shape man After entering the whole shape you are asked if the shape is to be animated yes or no questions should be answered with a Y N Enter N for the man How to animate shapes will be dis cussed later When you finish the shape you are entering it is relisted and you are asked if the shape is correct answer allows you to make changes In this case you are asked which line is to be changed and you are allowed to change it When you indicate that the shape is correct the program takes over It prints different PHASES followed by WAIT FOR CONVER SION These listings deal with anima tion After seven phases you are in structed how to save the shape Be careful here a mistake could
312. uter science at Lincoln College You may reach him at 1280 Richland Ave Lincoln IL 62656 MICRO No 58 March 1983 56 FOR COMPLETE GRAPHICS rsalllriter EDUCATION ARTIST GAME PROGRAMMER Em fs E on Generator H Ei HOBBIEST ENGINEERING CHILDREN Teachers artists engineers programmers amp hobbiests find VersaWriter an easy to use tool for creating micro computer graphics No programming experience is required Pictures can be made by simply tracing Even children can explore the exciting world of computer graphics The VersaWriter is as limitless as your imagination VersaWriter contains complete software for drawing with color brushes amp dots Add text or fill in over 100 colors Create your own shapes and place anywhere on the screen Use Area Distance Move Picture Electronic Drawing amp Skeleton programs plus much more Complete hardware software system for Apple II Il lle 299 00 Versa Computing Products are available VersaWriter is also available with at your local computer products store software designed for Atari amp IBM PC Distributed by um Computerland Corp Micron Distributing Educational Media Hayward Calif Toronto Canada Washington Penn Softsel Computer Products Program Spektrum ESD Laboratories m Inglewood Calif Bromma Sweden Tokyo Japan Pu t
313. veral of the utilities for my OSI Superboard MF I noticed that OSI has taken utilities that were probably written for 8 disks and only slightly modified them for 514 disk systems For instance the directory oriented utilities contained on my 54 disks all include two calls to track 12 sectors 1 and 2 For 54 disks this is not necessary Track Numbers Utility Name 0 12 OS65D 13 track 0 r w 14 BEXEC Total number of tracks used 15 out of a maximum of 40 Total number of en tries used by OSI 2 of 32 available This leaves 25 additional entries re quired in the directory even if all the rest of the programs on the disk are only one track long Therefore a total of 27 entries are needed If the contents of the directory buffer are examined after a call to track 12 1 has been made you can see that there are spaces for 32 8 character zones including two char acters per name which set the first and last track of the program If you stay with the original 6 character program names only one call to track 12 1 will give you more than enough spaces for all the programs that you can access by track name Deleting the second call from the directory oriented utilities 36 will reduce the wear and tear on the disk and will slightly speed up the printing process However the main insight here is that you now have a location where disk data such as ID name or number can be stored and you have automatic access to it when d
314. ware Catalog Name Color Chart System Commodore CBM PET Rockwell AIM Description Color Chart is a color video RAM board that Operates in eight different modes alphanumeric 32 x 16 with built in character generator to high resolution 128 x 192 pixels Color Chart generates an independent RS170 output Business graphs and game graphics can be dis played in color Price 139 95 Includes color chart board and instructions Available CGRS Microtech P O Box 102 Langhorne PA 19047 215 757 0284 Name Mannesmann Tally Microprinter MT160 Memory 2000 characters Language USASCII plus six European languages Description This 80 column serial matrix printer has 160 characters per second friction feed optional tractor feed dot addressable graphics optional correspondence quality print with right margin justifica tion text centering and pro portional spacing The printer features 8 bit parallel and RS232 interface Price 845 00 and up Available Mannesmann Tally for OEM quantities Industrial distributors computer dealers and computer stores Name Rememory Board System AIM 65 Memory 4K Description The Rememory Board for the AIM 65 provides 4K of low power CMOS RAM with battery backup Simply remove the AIM 65 RAM chips and plug the Rememory Board into the RAM sockets Pro grams and data are protected if the computer is turned off or loses power and are ready to run when the power is
315. whether AIM is in KB or TTY mode since the mode affects whether or not OUTALL sends line feeds MXOUT will not send two suc cessive form feeds This saves you from shoving out a whole blank page if the last job on the printer left the paper at 33 PUNTERS Rs the top of a form Margins are now in Listing 2 continued serted if indicated by the last character LINE LOC CODE LINE having been a carriage return vertical 0204 OF 4F SNDOPT SEND REQUESTED OPTIONS TO PRINTER tab form feed and the charactertobe gis i Tre surren printed is sent via the CTOUT 9207 55 F BEQ ZERO MARKS END 6298 F57 C9 24 CMP ws 5HEX NUMBER subroutine Finally MXOUT checks for 0209 GF59 FO 04 BEQ HEXNUM YES 210 F5B C9 27 27 38INGLE QUOTE FOR CHG LINMAX form feed carriage return and vertical 9211 FSD D 25 BNE ESCSEQ tab characters for special handling Form Eois WEIL a ed TEMP i SAVE BYTE USE MARKER 0214 F44 PKBYT INY 1 feed zeros out the line count and flags 3215 ges 39 aa LBA DIBUFF Y NEXT CHARACTER for a margin Carriage return or vertical 0217 Bren 50 cA JSR PACK Pace TT IN ON tab advances the line count generates a 9219 CA BEX eee tT E PKBYT form feed if the maximum number of 221 9 72 AE 04 LDX TENE T lines have been printed and flags for a 922 977 08 o BEQ SNDBYT PRI
316. with manual 55 cass 59 disk with DOS 85 disk 495 460 49 95 35 60 60 150 49 95 24 95 149 95 29 95 99 95 150 29 95 179 95 52 90 FLEX 9 47 50 if you have RLOADI 47 50 005690 59 95 plus assembler pkg 35 150 150 includes APEX DOS 45 others 15 user s manual VIC 20 O VIC 20 Memory 6502 based home computer manufactured by O Commodore Address Function Connects to any TV through RF modulator 00 FF Page zero operating system storage pointers floating Full size keyboard includes graphic characters point accumulators flags etc j and programmable function keys 100 1FF Microprocessor system stack 100 10A Floating to string work area Graphics 200 2FF Operating system buffers tables vectors I O flags 16 colors keyboard handling Multi color characters 300 3FF Vectors tape I O Programmable characters 400 FFF Expansion RAM Limited high resolution 1000 1DFF User BASIC RAM in unexpanded version Sound 1E00 1FFF Screen RAM in unexpanded version 3 Music voices 2000 3FFF 8K RAM ROM expansion Noise voice 4000 5FFF 8K RAM ROM expansion 6000 7FFF 8K RAM ROM expansion Commodore cassette 8000 8FFF Character generator ROM Expansion cartridge 9000 900F Chip 6560 Parallel 9110 911F VIA 6522 Commodore serial 9400 95FF Color RAM location with RAM at 400 RS 232 partially implemented 9600 97F
317. work of two You can have more and larger programs related files and disk utilities on the same disk for easier operation without constant Training Manual disk changes CSE s Rom Source Code Listing 100 Pages 15 95 Your OSI system is an investment in computing power NEW NEW NEW Get the full value from the disk hardware and saftware ANCHOR SIGNALMAN MODEMS that you already own Just write to us and we ll send you the full story on the DiskDoubler along with the rest Please write for more info on new disk programs or of our growing family of products for OSI disk systems send 2 00 for catalog Please include 2 00 shipping 3 00 for modems DiskDoubler is a trademark of Modular Systems EO EEEEEBEEEEEBE Telephone 201 262 0093 Modular Systems CAaAMEPUTERA SCIENCE ENGINEERING Box 50 291 Huntington Ave Boston 02115 617 423 9501 UPGRADE YOUR AIM 65 INSTANTLY trademark of Rockwell Inc INTRODUCTORY PRICE To A 6809 Development System With The 3 MACH 9 gt gt And Handling F em Includes 6809 CPU Plug in Assembly Super set of AIM Monitor Two Pass Symbolic Assembler Complete Monitor Source Listings Enhanced Cut amp Paste Editor 200 Page Manual Full 1 0 Control MACH 9 is assembled and tested with local BUS 5 locking low force ROM sockets and 2K Static RAM MM S Inc 1110 E Pennsylvania Sr Tucson AZ 85714 602 746 0418
318. ws of gravitation Heusinkveld John Color Assembler pg 213 221 You can speed up your programs with this assembler for the Dr William R Dial 438 Roslyn Avenue Akron OH 44320 Battista Frederick F Show the Score pg 272 281 Put numbers on your 6809 based Color Computer screen while in the graphics mode Gilliland E O Color Computer Pointers pg 288 290 Combining programs on the Color Computer Blyn Steve Music Marvel pg 308 316 A program listing to play music on the Color Computer Ramella Richard Fun House Adventure pg 488 494 A game for the 6809 based Color Computer 115 Creative Computing 8 No 11 November 1982 Norman Scott L Alternative Languages for the Color Com puter pg 124 138 Assembly language for the Color Computer can add speed to your programs Wilkins Dennis An Editor Assembler for the Color Com puter pg 142 147 An inexpensive way to obtain some editing features for 6809 machine language programs David H Build a Paddle Control for Your TRS 80 Color Computer pg 242 244 A hardware article to provide paddles at a modest cost 116 Color Computer News No 13 October 1982 Steiner John Morse Code Instruction Part 1 pg 19 26 Programmed CW instruction for the TRS 80 Color Computer Kilpatrick Roger Color Data File pg 27 35 A program for storing data on the Color Computer Ashley Peter Film D
319. y the cursor 01 Subroutine 2000 GETs characters from the keyboard accepts or rejects them and returns on an acceptable character Some characters checked in 2010 are control or editing characters These are dealt with in line 130 180 in the main program Other acceptable characters are printed with a return to the main program where they are added to the temporary line string in 190 In line 200 the length of the string is checked If the last character fills the line the temporary string is stored in that line s array element and the cursor automatically advances to the next line Lines 210 230 handle advancing to the next line lines 240 260 handle a delete and lines 270 280 handle moving up one line Line 130 handles the or calculate directive First the cursor is removed by printing RB Then the line contents are stored in the proper array element Next the evaluation 3000 and printing 7000 routines are called Finally the cursor is returned to the end of the first screen line The evaluation subroutine 3000 3030 sets all the single letter variables equal to zero subroutine 9000 Again using A instead of zero saves a little execution time If the last character is a then subroutine 6500 is used to assign the proper variable value to the value array element for that screen line Ideally the ON GOSUB structure should have all 26 routines listed on one line However because the VIC allows only 88

Advancing Computer Knowledge

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents